What if I told you that you can make your first $100,000 by the end of 2025 with the power of AI? And no, you don’t need to be an AI expert, spend thousands of dollars on softwares, or have thousands of followers. You see, back in 2019 to build a profitable business, you had to manage a team of people, spend thousands of dollars, and then maybe if you got lucky, you’d make some profit. But now, thanks [music] to AI tools like ChatGPT, Canva, and Claude, you can handle all the workload of hundreds of employees for [music] less than $40 a month. Meaning almost anyone can build a successful one-person business making $10,000 per month only working one to two hours a day. Cuz this is the exact same path I took in 2020 when I was a complete beginner to make my first $100,000 online. And now, I make that same amount per month working much less thanks to the power of AI. That’s why in this video, I’m going to break down my four-step process that helped me build my one-person business from scratch so you can do the same. But before I show you how it works, first let’s break down how to make $10,000 per month in general. So, if we do the math, $10,000 per month divided by 30 is $333 per day, which means $333 is the amount we need to make every single day to get to $10,000 per month. And we can do this in three ways. You can sell five $75 ebooks per day. You can sell seven $50 affiliate products per day. You can sell one $350 digital course per day. And as you can see, all of these ways require getting eyeballs on your products, which I’ll go over how to do with AI in step four. But now that you know how much we need to make, let me show you the first step in the process to making this entire thing work, which is what I call problem pinpointing. Think about it like this, making money always comes down to solving problems. And the more people you solve it for, the the money you can make. Let me explain. Think of an Uber driver versus the CEO of Uber. Driver gets paid to take one person from point A to point B, but the CEO built a system that helps millions of drivers do that all over the world. There are thousands of Uber drivers doing the same job, but there’s only one person behind the app making it all possible. That’s why the CEO earns $150,000 an hour while the driver earns $15 an hour. That’s a 10,000x difference just by solving a bigger problem for more people. And this is the same concept we’ll apply to your one-person business. Pinpointing a niche problem to solve so you can consistently make $10,000 per month. But don’t worry, you don’t have to build a global app. It could be smaller everyday problems that people are already looking for help with. And right now you might be thinking, how can I pinpoint a problem if I don’t have much experience? But I promise you’ve already solved more problems than you think. Think back over to the last 5 to 10 years. There’s at least something you figured out that others are still struggling with. For example, were you overweight and lost weight? Were you nervous about public speaking but got better at it? Were you bad with stocks but got better at investing? And even if you’ve solved something on a smaller scale like learning a new language, that’s still a big problem that many people face everyday and want to solve. These are just a few examples of problems you can solve to attract and serve your core audience. There are thousands more you can specialize in to start earning money today. But if you’re still struggling with this, don’t worry. You can ask ChatGPT this prompt to get all of your answers. Give me a list of common problems people face everyday that I can solve for my one-person content business. And once you type that in, pick one and let’s move on to the next step. Now that you’ve found a problem to solve, there’s still one major issue. If you scroll on YouTube for even a second, you’ll see there are already hundreds of people solving that same problem. Whether it be weight loss, financial advice, or learning a new language. So, how do you stand out in the sea of creators offering similar solutions without looking like a copy of everybody else? And more importantly, how do you do this without waiting months or even years to finally see some growth? To do that, you need to stand out. You need something unique. You need something that separates you from the sea of creators, and that’s where having our unique selling proposition comes in. This is what makes you or your product stand out from the rest. For me, I remember struggling to sell digital products when I first got started, and it was a pain to find clear, beginner-friendly information online that actually helped. So, I decided to create my own product, one for beginners who work a 9-to-5 and who wanted to build a consistent side income by working just 1 to 2 hours a day. Because the truth is, I was in those exact same shoes. I knew how it felt to work a 9-to-5. I knew how annoying it was to deal with a boss who was always on my case. And because of this, I knew I needed a way to build a consistent side income only working a few hours per day. That’s why promoting products online quickly became that solution. So, creating a product for complete beginners working 9-to-5s ended up becoming my unique selling proposition because most other products were either too advanced or aimed at a younger audience like college students. And this is just one example of a unique selling proposition. For you, that might be a value stock investing program that shows retirees the best companies to invest in or a self-improvement course for working moms focused on improving their family life, moving up in their careers, and deepening their relationships. The key is to find something that differentiates you from the rest of the market. And if this sounds overwhelming, it doesn’t have to be because with AI, you can ask it to help you figure out your unique value proposition with this prompt. Give me 10 unique angles or USPs I could use to stand out in your niche. But even after knowing all this, every day I’m still flooded with questions like, what niche should I choose? What digital products actually sell? And how do I promote them without a huge following? So, to answer all of that and more, I created the content creation coaching program. Inside, I show you the exact strategies I’ve used to go from zero to making my first seven figures with content creation and the same strategies I’ve been using to build a massive social media following of over 1.5 million online. But the best part, you’ll have me and a seven-figure coach guiding you throughout every step of the way. So, by joining it becomes impossible to fail with all these accountability systems already in place. If you’re interested in learning how hundreds of beginners are taking advantage of this opportunity to build a consistent online income working 1 to 2 hours a day, then click the first link in the description and I’ll see you inside. Now that you found your unique selling proposition, the next big question is, what product should you create to sell to your audience? The truth is, you could create just about anything, whether it be ebooks, courses, or a mentorship program. But, if you’re feeling overwhelmed by all of the options and aren’t ready to build something big, that’s also totally fine. In fact, that is why I don’t recommend creating any of these products right away. Instead, your goal should be to create a minimum viable product, a product quick, simple, and easy to launch as soon as possible. A minimum viable product is a lower-priced version of a bigger offer. For example, that could be a $50 cookbook with a few recipes to test demand before, [music] you know, you go and sell a $500 cooking course with hundreds of recipes. If your audience likes the minimum viable product, great. Now you know it’s worth building the bigger product. If not, then you’ve saved yourself from wasting time, money, and energy creating something people don’t want. And to create your minimum viable product quickly, you can use ChatGPT. Here’s a prompt you can use to do this easily. I want to create a simple ebook or mini course for beginners who describe your audience. For example, people who work a 9-5 and want to earn side income. Break it down into easy-to-follow sections and include tips, examples, and actionable steps. These are the problems they struggle with and how I plan to solve them. List down your problems and your solutions. And you don’t have to do mini courses or ebooks. You can also do one-on-one coaching sessions to test the demand for a group coaching program. Or if you don’t want to create your own digital product, that’s fine, too. You can promote a lower-priced affiliate product to test the demand for your bigger product down the line. The point is to get something out as quickly as possible and test demand before you build anything big. And now that you’ve got your minimum viable product, you might be thinking, “How do I actually make this valuable in the eyes of my audience?” What makes a product worth buying? Don’t worry because there’s a simple equation that helps us solve this problem. [music] And for that, we turn to Alex Hormozi’s purple book, 100 Million Offers. In the book, he talks about the value equation, which is a simple way to increase the perceived value of your offer. Now, there are four pillars to this equation. The first one is the dream outcome. This is the dream goal your audience wants to achieve. It could be losing 10 lb, making $10,000 consistently, or finding their dream partner. The bigger and more desirable the outcome, the higher the perceived value of our product. The second pillar is the likelihood of achievement. This is how likely others and yourself have achieved the same dream outcome. Here, you’ll show social proof such as your own results, client results, and testimonials. Think of the last time you shopped on Amazon. You most likely browsed at least five reviews before you bought anything. It’s the same thing here. The third pillar is time delay. How fast can they achieve the dream outcome? Basically, if you can help them achieve their dream outcome in 1 month instead of 3 months, your product becomes way more valuable. Because as humans, we want things fast. Think of taking an Uber instead of waiting for a taxi or taking a few supplements to lose weight instead of spending 3 months in the gym. And the last pillar is effort and sacrifice. This is how little they have to give up to achieve their dream outcome. For example, do they have to give up snacks to lose weight or can they keep eating their favorite snacks while seeing the scale drop? And now that we’ve understood what the pillars are, here is how they work together to make your product valuable. The bigger the dream outcome, the higher the perceived value of your product. The higher the likelihood of achievement, the more they trust your product will work. The shorter the time delay, the more valuable the product is because it can shorten the time it takes to get their dream outcome. And the lower the effort and sacrifice, the easier it becomes to reach their dream outcome without having to give up anything. [music] So, when you have all four dialed in, your product stands out. Your viewers will think, “This gets me what I want. It’s proven. It’s fast. [music] And I won’t have to give up anything to get there.” And that’s exactly when they buy. If this still seems a little too hard, there is one prompt I’ve used to have ChatGPT give us all our answers. Feel free to pause the video and write this prompt down. And by now, you should have three things figured out. The problem you’re going to solve, how you plan to stand out in the market, and what you’re going to sell. But the next big problem is getting the attention of people to sell it to. But not just any attention, you want attention from the right people. Think of it like this. If you’re selling an ebook on cooking, then you don’t want to create random videos of you doing some crazy dances on TikTok. Instead, you want to share recipes and cooking videos to target your ideal audience. And you don’t have to do just videos on TikTok, you can also create short posts on Instagram showing your viewers what recipes to cook to lose weight, quick pins on Pinterest linking them to your blog about your favorite recipes, or quick educational shorts on YouTube where you teach people how to make their favorite dishes. But, if you’re currently lost and don’t know where to start, I’ve came up with another quick ChatGPT prompt you can use to put this all together. Feel free to pause the video and write this down. Once you have this written down, the next thing you want to do is have a call to action in your social media posts to link people back to your minimum viable product. After your audience has watched your valuable content and built trust in you and what you offer, that’s exactly when they buy. And this is how you’ll be able to sell $750 ebooks per day to make $10,000 per month. Now, you know how to start a $10,000 one-person business with AI. If you’d like to fast-track your progress, skip [music] the years of mistakes I went through making my one-person business with AI, and get the help from me and a seven-figure coach all throughout your journey, then click on the first link in the description, and I’ll see you inside the content creator coaching program.
Author: davenkross2026
-
How I’d Build a 10K/Month Online Business If I Had to Start Over – Sara Finance
Have you ever looked at all these people online and asked yourself, “How did they get so rich?” Well, I can tell you from personal experience. They got rich from the one thing. The same thing that I’ve used to generate over $6 million online where I work on my own terms and don’t have to worry about a boss that constantly nags me to get things done, retire my mom so she never has to stress about money again, and travel all over the world to places like California, Cancun, and even Barcelona where I get to work whenever. and wherever I want. That’s why in this video, I’m going to pull back the curtains and reveal to you my five-step wealth blueprint to show you how they did it, how I did it, and how you can use the same path to generate your first $10,000 month faster than ever before, even if you’ve never made a single dollar online. But before I do, I want you to understand the biggest mistake beginners make when trying to create wealth. You see, the way traditional wealth building works is like this. Step one, you get an entry-level job trading your time for money. Step two, once you get more experience, you get promoted to a higher position, still trading your time for money. Step three, you work there for most of your life or get into different careers that pay a bit more and then enjoy your retirement benefits. Now, there’s nothing wrong with this, but here’s a small problem most people face. You will never truly unlock money freedom until your 60s, which means you are always trading your time for money. Sure, more money in some cases. But the problem still stands. You will always be tied to work in one way or another. And the truth is that by following the traditional path, it will take you years, if not decades, to build your wealth. Now, this doesn’t have to be your reality because there’s a little known smarter path that solves all the problems of traditional wealth building so you can reach your first $10,000 month in record time. Be creator economy. more specifically building a micro niche personal brand. And here’s the thing, this isn’t just something I’ve made up. Take it from the insiders at Goldman Sachs who are saying the global creator economy market is currently worth $250 billion and is projected to double to $480 billion by 2028. Take for example Draco, who is a small day trading YouTube creator with 882 subscribers and is generating $16,781 per month with a small online community on Patreon with 173 people each paying $97 to join. or Melvin, who is a faceless AI automation YouTube creator with 952 subscribers and is generating 17,251 per month by posting content on how average people can monetize their Faceless AI brand through Instagram. and Boris, who is a videographer on YouTube with 1,200 subscribers and is generating $40,43 per month by coaching other videographers on how to scale their business past $10,000 a month through local ads. Draco, Melvin, and Boris are all leveraging the creator economy to make millions. Now that you’ve seen real proof of real people making thousands with this one opportunity, let’s go over what it actually is and how it works. A micro niche personal brand is a small social media brand of 500 followers to 5,000 followers that focuses on helping a specific type of person overcome a particular problem in their life. Like Draco, who helps people make money through day trading, or Boris, who helps struggling videographers monetize their services. The best part is you don’t need to be an expert at solving that one problem, and you most definitely don’t need to have any marketing experience to get started. Here’s how it works. You’ll be posting a few pieces of content a week that will take you at max an hour or two a day to attract your ideal viewer to your social media account. Then you’ll help those viewers go from point A to point B, which is a transformation from their problem state to their desired state through a handful of digital products or services that I’ll discuss later in this video. So, the smartest path to making $10,000 per month in 2025 is Crystal Clear Microniche Personal Brand Plus Digital Product. Now, I’m going to go over the five-step wealth blueprint to show you how you can take advantage of the creator economy to make your first $10,000 online. Which brings us into the first step of the wealth blueprint. That’s to find your unique value zone. Now, I didn’t say niche on purpose because while it’s similar, your unique value zone is like your niche but upgraded. Let me explain. A niche is broad. Think cooking, fitness, affiliate marketing, crypto, or relationships. But your unique value zone goes one level deeper. For example, instead of just fitness, maybe it’s fitness for moms. Now, take it even further. Fitness for postpartum moms or fitness for stayathome moms. See the difference? Your unique value zone is about choosing one niche and then going one layer deeper than most people do. This way, you’re solving one clear problem for one specific person. And when your offer is the perfect solution, they’re excited and ready to buy. The next strategy is to look for gaps in your niche. Take for example Draco, the same micro niche personal brand we went over earlier in the video. He posts simple day trading videos using stick figures and paint for both his editing and thumbnail style. These two elements are what set him apart. You rarely see that kind of raw creative approach in the day trading space. And that’s exactly why he stands out and why he’s able to monetize quickly, even with a small following. Although finding your unique value zone and identifying gaps in your niche is a good way to start, without proper guidance on how to execute this correctly, you would end up wasting hours of your time without seeing any real progress. That’s why I created a brand new content creation program where I go over how to put this into practice so you can make your first $10,000 a month even if you’re a complete beginner and have less than a,000 followers. So, if you’re interested, I’ll leave a link in the description below. Now, your unique value zone can help you attract your core audience so you can monetize it as soon as possible. But what it doesn’t do is show you where your core audience hangs out. And this could be the key difference between having a brand that generates only a few hundred per month to generating thousands of dollars or more. Which is why the second pillar of the blueprint is to find your platform. But the thing is, most beginners mess this simple part entirely. They try to juggle five different platforms before establishing themselves on one, and it only ends up disrupting their growth. Instead, there’s a much more simple way to go about it. And it all starts with this. Find one platform like Instagram, YouTube, or Pinterest. Learn everything you can about it and research if that is where most of your audience spends their time. For example, if you’re signed to a young fitness audience who’s focused on gaining muscle, start with Tik Tok since most of the demographic are younger athletic viewers. Or if you’re signed to an older crypto audience who’s focused on making an extra $3,000 per month, start with Facebook since most of the demographic are older males who are focused on generating side income. Take some time to decide and see which platform works the best for your brand. Now you understand how to define your unique value zone and find your platform which sets the foundation for your micro niche personal brand. But this is just the beginning. Without knowing how to create content that keeps viewers engaged from start to finish, you won’t hold their attention long enough to build trust and monetize your following. But that’s where step three comes in. It gives you the exact tools you need to turn attention into profit in the creator economy. Which is why step three is how to create microniche content. Just like we spoke about having a microniche personal brand to attract our ideal viewer. Our content has to reflect the same thing so they get value, stick around, and purchase our products for years on end. That’s why I’ve come up with a three-pillar micro niche content strategy so you can never run out of content ideas again. Pillar one, study the competition, but in a different way. What questions are they leaving unanswered? What are they saying in their videos? How can you take inspiration from their content and add your own unique spin? I recommend watching three to five of the top ranking videos for your topic and take notes on their key points, structure, and introductions. For example, if you want to create a video about the best day trading strategies for beginners, search for that topic and study the top videos. This will give you plenty of ideas to build on. Pillar two, browse comment sections. Look for comments like these. This goes to show that the viewer is more confused than when they started. So you can make a point in your own investing video where you explain that concept in depth. Not only that, but you should also look for comments that get a lot of likes. This shows you that this is a validated idea by viewers so you can use it for your next video topic. Lastly, you can go on sites like Reddit to see what most people are having problems with in your niche. For example, if you see a lot of questions asking how to day trade with little to no money, this could be a perfect video idea. The last pillar is the GPT method, which is where we’ll go on chat GPT and give it this exact prompt. I’m a creator in your niche and my target audience are your target audience description. Generate 15 to 20 viral video ideas I can use to craft my next video. You can even link your competitor’s channels and ask it to give you even more ideas based on them. The possibilities are endless, so play around with it and see what you come up with. So, the strategy to making your first pieces of micro niche content is crystal clear. Solve problems and answer questions that other creators in your niche aren’t talking about, specifically for your ideal viewer. We just learned how to come up with ideas by studying our competitors and looking at the burning questions our target audience is asking. We also learned that if you don’t know how to come up with strong content ideas, you’ll struggle to hold your viewers attention, making it hard to build trust, grow your audience, or actually monetize. But now the real challenge begins. How do you shoot content so good people can’t stop but watch? That’s where step four of the wealth blueprint comes in, which is how to record your content. Now, I want to be completely transparent with you guys. If you’re currently feeling camera shy or nervous, do not worry. That is a normal feeling for everyone. In fact, my first video didn’t even have my face. It was just this. And after recording hundreds of videos, I still go back and dislike hearing my own voice. But even if you feel this way, even if you feel nervous about what everybody will think, go ahead and post anyway. Because when you get over that feeling, you’ll grow an audience that trusts you so that you can monetize it faster than ever before, which is the key to hitting your first $10,000 month in the creator economy as easily as possible. And here’s another thing. You don’t even need much equipment to start. A phone camera, natural lighting from a window, basic cap editing software. That’s all you need to get started. Most beginners think they need more than that. But the truth is, until you’re a highlevel channel with hundreds of thousands of subscribers, you can stick to the bare essentials and make your first $10,000 per month, just like Draco, who had basic editing, paint, and stickman figures, and is consistently making six figures per year with his online community. Now, if you’d like to join hundreds of students who are using my exact system to monetize their personal brand and make thousands of dollars online, I highly recommend joining my brand new content creation program. In it, I go over the step-by-step playbook from a $6 million creator to creating a microniche personal brand so you can make your first $10,000 month and escape that dreaded 9 to5 and live the life you’ve always wanted. and the A Toz framework showing you the only five steps you need to take to actually monetize your brand from zero and much more. So, if you’re ready to start a brand that generates the salary of a full-time doctor, click the link in the description and get started with my content creation program. Now, you know how to create microniche content that drives viewers into your business and gets you thousands of potential customers. You also know how to find your platform and your unique value zone. But the big question remains, how do you tap into this $250 billion industry if you don’t know how to monetize your micro niche personal brand? And that’s where our fifth step comes in, which is how to monetize your personal brand the right way. Because other videos will just tell you one way to monetize it, but I’ll go over my money makeover formula to make sure you have the three different ways you can start earning money from your brand today. The first way is through affiliate marketing. This is where you recommend products you love and get paid when people buy through your link. For example, I love Shopify. It’s an amazing product and I personally use it myself. So, I promote Shopify links in a lot of my videos and make over $50,000 per month from them alone. This is one of the easiest ways to make money from your personal brand because from one video that randomly goes viral, you can make thousands of dollars. All you have to do is place your affiliate link in your video description and once someone signs up or purchases whatever you’re promoting, you’ll earn commission. The second way is through digital products. Just like I talked about earlier, these are the digital products that will get your core audience from point A, their problem state, to point B, their desired state. There are products like courses, guides, or ebooks. For example, I currently have three courses where I teach people about affiliate marketing, drop shipping, and content creation. And from all three of these courses, I’m making over $50,000 per month. This is the best way to monetize because overhead costs are low and the profit margins are skyhigh from all these digital products. And the third way is through one-on-one coaching or consultations. This is where you get paid to help people move from their problem state to their desired state, not through digital products, but through direct coaching. [music] You can charge five to 10 times more than you would for a digital product because you’re offering personalized guidance, direct feedback, and a deeper level of support that most beginners are willing to pay extra for. By working closely with clients, you can fine-tune your process, collect case studies, and later scale into high ticket offers or group coaching. There are hundreds of more ways you can monetize your brand. And this all is possible thanks to the power of the creator economy. Now that you’ve seen beginners like Draco, Melvin, and Boris make thousands of dollars with this single opportunity, you now know the potential of this $250 billion Titan industry, the creator economy. With that said, there are three paths you can take after learning all this. Path one, do nothing. Most people will scroll away, [music] forget they ever saw this, and go back to their jobs they can’t stand, wishing months later they’d take an action sooner. Path two, try to figure it out alone. You could spend hours researching niches, testing content, and making painful and expensive mistakes like I did in the beginning. It’s slow, it’s frustrating, and most people give up before they even see results. Or path three, follow a proven system. I built the content creation program to give you everything I wish I had when I started. a step-by-step guide to find your profitable micro niche. My affiliate marketing plus digital product blueprints, a plug-and-play content system to attract the right viewers and turn them into paying customers, a full website building plan so you know exactly where to sell your offers, and a proven blueprint to help you hit $10,000 a month faster with way less trial and error. I’ve used this exact system to grow to over $1.5 million followers and earn $6 million online starting with zero experience and no audience. And now I’m handing you that system. But here’s the truth. Opportunities like this don’t stay wide open forever. The creator economy is expected [music] to reach half a trillion dollars by 2028. Right now you’re early, but it won’t stay that way for long. So, the question is, will you take action now and position yourself for success or wait until the space is crowded and you wish you had started sooner? If you’re ready to build your micro niche personal brand, grow your audience, and hit your first $10,000 month faster than trying to do it alone, click the first link in the description, and I’ll see you inside the content creation program.
-
09/03/2026 – EXPLOSIVE GROWTH ACADEMY • 3-DAY LIVE EVENT – DAY 2 – THE SYSTEM – Is this the decision that changes everything. Might be yes
So, welcome back everyone. Welcome back to day number two. It is great to have every single one of you with us. You know the drill by now, team. Go ahead, locate that chat box. Give me a me in the chat who is back. Give me a me in the chat who is back there, team.
Fantastic. And just before you ask, no, I am not wearing the same shirt. I get asked this all the time. I do wash my clothes. I literally just bought like 10 to 15 of the same shirt. I promise you team, I have showered and I do have a fresh shirt on. So, welcome back everyone. In fact, give me a number seven in the chat if you loved yesterday. By the way, team, give me number seven in the chat if you loved yesterday. Teen, give me a number seven. Beautiful. Because look, yesterday was all about laying the foundations. I get it. I know, team. I know. Okay, you got to remember like, yes, I’m I’m the coach. I’m your mentor now. I’m on the other side, team. I’ve been sat on that side as well. And I know yesterday you were probably sat going, “Ch, just just show me what like the sexy stuff. Show me the sexy stuff, Sam. Show me how to make the $5,000, how to get that $500 a month. Come on. I want to I want to know it.” And I love love the enthusiasm team. But here’s the thing. We have to lay those foundations. Okay. Without the work we put in yesterday, none of this works. Give you a great example here. I live in London. There’s building work going on all the time in London. And have you ever had that experience? Maybe like think about where you live or maybe you’ve kind of seen it. Have you ever like walked or like driven past a building site and it it feels like nothing has happened for like 6 months and then all of a sudden you go past it like a week later and it’s 10 stories high. Give me a 10 in the chapter. Have you ever experienced that? You’re just like, “Wow, they did nothing for 6 months and all of a sudden they got a bit busy, right? Maybe the manager give them a bit of a kick up the backside.” No team, what were they working on for six months? Let me know in the chat. What were they working on for six months?
Yes, they were working team on the foundations. Because here’s the thing. It doesn’t matter how much you will it to, want it to, or wish it to. If there’s one crack in those foundations and you build a size skyscraper, team, it’s going to fall down. So, I know you’re so excited, but team, the patience that we did yesterday is going to pay off today because we’ve got an amazing, amazing system. We are going to be building very very quickly on everything we went through yesterday. And today, by the way, team, we are diving in. We are building the system. We are going to be covering off LinkedIn. We’re going to be covering off our outreach, our AI outreach. We’re also going to be covering off um exactly the entire process of the audit funnel team. We are going to have an amazing amazing day. Give me a me in the chat. By the way, who is excited about day number two? By the way, give me a mi in the chat. Who is excited about day number two?
Beautiful. Loads of mis coming in. Now, before we do get going here, team, look, just want to address the uh proverbial elephant in the room, if you will. Cuz look, it happened yesterday. It happened overnight. happened in the morning our time as well. It happens on every single event we run. People have messaged us maybe on email, maybe in the chat said look um I really feel like I want some help and support. You know what mentorship program do you have? Can you tell me more about it? What is it? And that first things first team those of you you know who you are genuinely just want to say a massive massive thank you to every single one of you that put in an applica. So, but basically said, “How do I put in an application? How do I work with you as well?” Massive, massive thank you. But here’s the thing, team. Okay, I’ve been to quite literally dozens and dozens and dozens of three-day events when I first started out. In fact, give me number three in the chat. Who Who here has been on other three-day events before? Anyone been on the other three-day events before? Yeah. But when I would go team, something really weird would happen because, you know, I I’d turn up there, day one was great, and then on day two, they spent about 80% of the entire day ju just trying to sell me something. And then they spend about 80% of day number three just trying to sell me something. give me a little on me in the chat if that’s ever maybe happened to you at all. Maybe you’ve never experienced that. Yeah, happened to me. And I was like, well, I understand, you know, you you know, you’re a business. You’ve got to try and sell your mentorship program. But here’s the thing. I I paid for 3 days of training. I I turn this a light on for some reason. It’s not There we go. You can see me better. I paid for 3 days of training. I I I’ve barely got a day and a half. Now, here’s the thing, team. I I don’t know about you, but I I don’t think that’s very fair. Give me a little yes in the chat if you agree. I don’t think that’s very fair. No, absolutely not. Team, every single one of you investing time, energy, effort, and money for three full days of training. So, here’s the thing, team. You are going to get three full days of training. Yes, of course, we have a mentorship program. We’re an education business team. This shouldn’t surprise you. There’s always a next level. Anyone here go to university or college? Yeah. Did you turn up in day one and go, “Wait, whoa, whoa, whoa. What do you mean there’s a master’s degree? I I I’ve paid for university. What do you mean there’s a masters? Why am I No, because there’s a next level. It’s right for some people. It’s not right for others.” And at the end of the day, team, there’s always a next level in life. Okay. Yes, we have mentorship programs. We have multiple different levels depending on A what you want, B, you know, what’s going to be right for you. C what your goals are. There’s so many different variables. But the fact of the matter is team, you are here for 3 days of training. Okay? Yes, we have mentorship programs. I can guarantee you this. Some of you it’s going to be perfect. You are going to come and want to work with myself and Chris moving forward. I’m going to love you for that. Some of you, you’re going to say, “Do you know what? It’s not for me. I’m enjoying the three doz. You’re not going to want to work with us moving forward.” And you know what team? I’m going to love you for that. Okay? At the end of the day, you’re all adults. You can make your own decisions here. Okay? One thing I will promise every single one of you is no one is ever going to be kicked, pushed, pressured, shoved into something that isn’t right for them. That’s not what we do. But I I hope you got a bit of a feel not just for who we are as a company, but also who we are as people. Okay? That’s not going to happen. All I ask from every single one of you team is just come and get the fact, the evidence, and the data. Come and get the fact, get the evidence, get the data. Look, have a listen. Have a conversation with our team. It’s completely no obligation. Whether you join us, I love you. You don’t join us, I love you. Either way, you are getting my Chris’s the entire team. You’re going to get our all over the entire three days. Come along. Get the fact, evidence, and data. Don’t make that BS decision. In fact, some of you already in your heads heard the word mentorship went, “Sounds great, but I can’t afford it.” Even me in the chat if that kind of popped in there, by the way. Sounds great, but I can’t afford team. You you don’t even know what the investment is. You don’t even know what the investment is. And look how quickly our money mindset is trying to go. No, no, no, no. You can’t do that team. We don’t know what it is. Just come and get the fact, the evidence, the data. Okay, we are going to do a working lunchtime session. Okay, we’ll do a working lunchtime session. Meaning, we got session one, session two, we have a quick break, a working lunchtime session. Get there, eat your food, come along, get the fact, evidence, and data. Have a conversation with our team. It’s completely an obligation. If it’s right, great. If it’s not, great. Don’t make that BS decision. Just come along, get the fact, the evidence, and the data. Give me a yes in the chat, by the way, if that’s fair. Give me a yes in the chat if that’s fair.
Beautiful. So, now we’ve got that elephant out the way. We we will speak more about the mentorship on our lunchtime session. Again, I can see people in the chat saying they’re excited about it. That’s amazing. Cannot wait to be able to share it with you. Trust me team, it’s a gamecher. But let’s dive into session one today where what we’re going to be diving into it is our outreach. Okay, we’re going to look into our outreach team. This is where we’re going to start building out this system. We know what our niche is. We now know the power of AI. By the way, just give me me in the chat if the AI session blew you away. Absolutely incredible. Right. Absolutely incredible. Now, we’re going to go our next step and go, great. How do we then start finding these people? And more importantly, team, how do we build a system that finds them on autopilot so we manually don’t have to do it? And that is what we’re diving into with LinkedIn Sales Navigator and Dripify. Ultimately, it’s your profile, your search, and your outreach. And we’re going to literally go through this team step by step live. Don’t worry though, you can take a breath. You don’t need to remember any of this team. Just watch it. Watch me build it. Watch me go through it. Then you build your own. One step behind me at your own pace. Everything is in your workbook which by the way the link for the workbook would have been posted in the chat. Go ahead if you missed it yesterday. You can go ahead and download that as well cuz look it’s three simple builds team. Three simple there’s no technical ability needed here. You’re going to see live. It’s click a couple of buttons. It’s your profile LinkedIn your search which is our LinkedIn sales navigator and our outreach which is dripify. sending real messages to real business owners on complete autopilot. Now, before we dive into the outreach team, we’ve got to have a look at our profile. Okay? You’ve got to look at your profile team. The best way that I could describe this is when we’re reaching out to people on LinkedIn. And remember, firstly, in fact, let’s go back one step. Why LinkedIn team? There’s a 100 million businesses on the planet. I guarantee 99 million of them are on LinkedIn. Business owners with a problem. Business owners looking for a solution. They are looking for it on LinkedIn. They’re not looking for it on Instagram, on Tik Tok, on X. They are looking for it on LinkedIn. meaning it has got every single business owner in your chosen niche that you could ever want to work with. Meaning that you don’t need to go out leafitting. You don’t need to go to networking events, which by the way are one of the worst things in the world. Give me a little yes in the chat if you also hate networking events. They’re so awkward. Just stood there. I better pretend I’m on my phone right now while you’re sat playing a game. You don’t have to spend tens of thousands of dollars. To put this into perspective, team, when I started my agency a decade ago that this wasn’t available.
I had to quite literally out of my own pocket, my own pocket on a credit card. I had to spend thousands of dollars every single month on Facebook and Instagram adverts to get the same result you can. It would take me 2 months and $5,000 out of my own pocket spent on Facebook and Instagram adverts and you can get the exact same results for literally a hundred bucks and 5 days. Give me a wow in the chat by the way if that’s insane the difference a decade makes. Yeah, team. They’ve got every single person you could ever want on there. But we also, by the way, just need to remind ourselves, team, when it comes to LinkedIn, it’s a business platform. It’s a business platform. Meaning, we’ve got to have a bit more of a business approach to it, don’t we? Got to have a bit of a business approach. When you reach out to a stranger, a business owner on LinkedIn in your chosen niche, if they click onto your profile, you got to ask yourself a question. What is my profile saying about me? What’s my profile saying about me? Is it saying that I’m a trusted, safe pair of hands? I’m going to do a good job. you can trust me. I I’m professional. Or is it saying, “Wow, he looks like he had a really good trip in Cancun two years ago. It’s a great photo of him.” Does that make sense, by the way, team? And the very first step we have to do is called our LinkedIn profile optimization. Our LinkedIn profile optimization. And it’s a very, very simple five-step process. Number one is we’ve got to have a professional photo. You do not need it professionally taken. The phone in your pocket, by the way, the phone in your pocket has a better camera than the massive studio cameras that Steven Spielberg filmed Jaws on. The the camera in your phone is better than the camera Jaws was filmed on. What I need you to do, team, dress for business. Okay? I see this too many times, more more times than I care to admit where I look at someone’s profile picture and I go, “That’s a really great profile picture of you. You look amazing.” Probably more relevant for like a Tinder profile or like a Plenty of Fish as opposed to a LinkedIn business profile. Does that make sense, team? Okay. Look, as they say, you never get a second chance at a first impression. Very, very simple. Make sure it’s well lit. Make sure you look professional. That’s it. Don’t overthink it, team. Also, please don’t go out and hire like a $1,000 professional photographer. You don’t need it. Your phone is enough, team. Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense.
Beautiful. Now, the second one here, team, this is the biggest difference, the biggest difference that you can make when it comes to your LinkedIn profile. It is your headline where it says your name, the little headline underneath it. Now, 99% of people
on their headline have their job title written underneath it. In fact, give me a little me in the chat. Who’s got their their job title? Like Sam Duce, owner and founder of Explosive Growth Academy.
Yeah. Here’s the thing, team.
And again, I mean this in a loving way. No one cares who we are. No one cares who we are. You don’t really care who I am. And don’t worry, team. I’m a big boy. I can take it. You don’t care who I am. This could be someone else running this entire 3 days. It wouldn’t matter to you. What you care about is what every human being on this planet cares about. And it’s very simply this. What’s in it for me? What’s in it for me? Does that make sense, by the way, team? Give me a W in the chat if that makes sense. And let’s use the example, by the way, team, of um of a networking event. Let’s just say that we met each other at a networking event. You walked up and you said, “Oh, hi. It’s nice to meet you. What’s your name?” Now, imagine if I turn on and said, “Oh, well, lovely to meet you. My name is Sam Duce. I’m the owner, founder of Explosive Growth Academy, Property Abundance, and also SGD digital and DBSS Digital.” Um, I am a multi-awwardwinning entrepreneur, international speaker, Amazon bestseller, and also I have multiple seven and six figure businesses.
At what point would you just switch off? probably after the second accolade, you’d be like, “Oh my god, this guy. Wow, he loves himself, doesn’t he?” Of course you would. Of course you would. Give me number one in the chat if you’d be like instantly, I need to get out of this conversation. I hate it. Of course you would.
Boom. If that is how you would react in the real world at a networking event, why is it any different if I went to your LinkedIn profile and saw your name and it just said, “I’m this. I’m that. Look at me. This is what I’ve done. Here’s my qualific.” Does that make sense? By the way, team, give me number six. And there’s a six in the chat below if that makes sense. It’s the same thing, isn’t it? And I understand the mentality and the logic behind it. Well, we do it because we want to look good. It might be our next job. No team. This is our business. Now, every single time someone comes to your page, it shouldn’t be about me. If they if you come to my page, it shouldn’t be about me. Team, who should it be about?
Who should it be about?
should be about them. If not Sam Drew, founder and owner of Globe Exposure of Growth. No, that’s about me. Sam Drew. I help
Listen the difference here. Ready? I help chiropra chiropractors get more clients with AI powered content.
Can you see the slight difference there? rather than coming to my page and it’s all me me I I I I you’ll come to my page you go huh I’m a chiropractor I want more clients that’s actually really good can you see the difference there team very subtle little difference but that one thing is going to separate you literally from 99% of people on LinkedIn and it really is as simple as that I help ex get more clients with AI powered content and look remember team Not sure what’s right. What do we do? Ask AI. Ask AI. Same with the about section. Yes, what do we do? But more importantly, who is it for? What results do they get? So many people on the about section that when it comes to the about section, people normally do one of two things. They either talk about themselves in third person like Sam Duce grew up in the Chilton valleys in High Wickham in southeast England. Like don’t please don’t talk about yourself in third person. It’s weird. Look, unless Morgan Freeman is narrating it, never speak about yourself in third person or we do the I I I me me I I I I me me me me me me me me me me me me me me me me me me me me me. The about section should be how do I help them? Who’s it for? What results can they get? And there’s a little bit there that says a feature as well. Team get your audit link pinned there. If I’m taking the time to click through, look at your page. I see your photo, your headline, your about section. Wow, this is for me. Give me something to do. Now, I appreciate we’ve not gone through the audit funnel. We’re going through that today. Put it there, team. Put it there. It’s the first thing anyone sees. Give them the opportunity to fill in the audit team. That is free business. It’s free business. Give me an F in the chat if that makes sense. And then also some of us might need to go through and check our settings. All right, go and check your visibility settings. Make sure you got your connection settings. I get it. You might be a private person. You go, “No one can even see my profile.” Well, now we need to. Okay, now we need to make sure you’ve checked your settings. Make sure that people can find you. Make sure they can connect with you. Make sure that they can see you. Make sure they can click through on your profile. very very simple five-step process team to optimize our LinkedIn profile. Give me number five in the chat if that makes sense. Step number one, optimize your LinkedIn profile. Now, from there, it’s step number two, team. This is our LinkedIn sales navigator. I’m going to share my screen in a moment and we’re going to dive in to sales navigator. I’m going to break all of these down for you so you got absolute clarity. But here’s the kicker as well, team. I’ve even gone one step further. I know. So, I know what you’re thinking, Sam. You keep overd delivering. This is too much. I know. I’m sorry. You’re like, rather than you have to try and keep up with me, all I’m going to do is share my screen, go through LinkedIn Sales Navigator in a bit more detail so you understand it. And myself and Chris, we have built the LinkedIn searches for all of the five niches for you. You do not need to worry about it. All of those searches across the geography, industry, job title, seniority level, and headcount. Every single part of that team is in your workbooks for you. So when you go and choose and you start building your LinkedIn sales navigator search for your chosen niche, it’s copy and paste. Copy and paste. We have taken that work from you. No worries. I can see a couple people saying thank you in the chat you are very welcome. So team really just to break it down your geography the it’s just the city the region where are you targeting what country if you’re in a country are you going to go for a specific city the industry look it’s your validated niche it’s not business owners small business it’s chiropractor HVAC home services dentist we want to inch wide mile deep remember team the job title keywords making sure we’ve got the right person who can say yes the seniority level so we skip past those gatekeepers and speak to the decision maker and then the headcount so it’s small enough to decide f fast but it’s big enough to afford your services give me number five in the chat if that makes sense team beautiful so let me go ahead and share my screen let me pull up LinkedIn sales navigator let me just swap screens one second
okay awesome So we are now on LinkedIn Sales Navigator. Now for those that have never used LinkedIn Sales Navigator before that the easiest way to describe this is that it just opens up your ability to contact every single person on LinkedIn. Trust me team it is worth its weight in gold. Now if you do not have a LinkedIn Sales Navigator account, you’ve never used one, first things first, don’t worry. I’m going to go through this step by step, show how this works. And all of this, remember, is in your workbook. Every single search for all five niches is in your workbook. Give me number five in the chat if that’s pretty awesome. By the way, team,
beautiful. Now, if you’ve never used LinkedIn Sales Navigator as well, sometimes, not always, don’t take it verbatim. Sometimes they give you a free 30day trial. We love a free 30-day trial. All you got to do, go to Google, type in LinkedIn Sales Navigator. It will show you the link. It’s just logged into your LinkedIn. It attaches to your LinkedIn profile. And look, if you get a free 30-day trial team, hit the ground running. use that 30 days, get your first client. That $5,000 pays for all of your softwares quite literally for the next like five years, whatever it is. So, LinkedIn Sales Navigator, I’m going to go through these step by step here. In fact, let me zoom in one more so we can see better. There we go. So, the first thing we need to realize here, team, is look on the left hand side. This is where all of our search criteria is. We can see there’s lots on there. current company, company headgout, function, current job title, seniority level, geography, industry, connection, recent updates. There’s lots on here, team. And if I click on see all filters, well, now it gets a little bit confusing. Well, what do I click? Team, you don’t need to know what most of these are. Now, yes, of course, if you’re trying to find a specific person, great. First name, last name, very helpful. All I’m going to go through team are the ones that you need to know about to start building this business. So the first one is company headcount. Now look, this is the search I’ve got here for the home services. Okay, so for those you that picked home services, this is your search. Um, all the others are in your workbook as a reminder. Now I’m going a company headcap between 1 and 50. Now if I wanted to add or remove, all I do is I click the button. I could have self-employed. If you look at the number up here from 370, it’s going to change to see what it changes to a lot more. 410. Super simple. If I wanted to remove self-employed, I just click the X and off it goes. Now, we could go all the way up to 10,000 plus employees. We don’t want that, though. We don’t really want to go over 50 employees. Why is that, team? Well, we want to deal with companies between 1 and 10 and 11 to 50 employees. Why is that team? It’s very simple. They don’t have the red tape to cut through. They are the ones that can get on a call and go, “Yeah, I’m in.” They don’t have If you want to deal with a company that’s like 10,000 plus employees, you got to speak to HR. They’re going to say things like, “What does your company stand for?” Like making making you money, getting new clients. Okay, great. If your company were an animal, what would it be? You get weird HR questions like that. We don’t want to deal with that. Yeah, you might earn a lot of money. It’s going to take you 5 years to even have an opportunity. So, we want to do one to 50. Now, the current job title, what we’ve got here is what’s called a boolean search. So you can see owner or founder or president or CEO or principal or co-founder or managing partner. Now all you have to do team is you’ve just got to click the plus button and paste in here the exact search. All I’m looking to do team is I’m looking to find the right person to speak to. I don’t want to speak to someone lower. I want to speak to the apprentice. I want to speak to the owner of the company. Y team. What can they make? They can make a what team? Let me know in the chat.
Exactly. These people here can make a decision. They’re the people I want to speak to team. And we double that with checking the seniority level. They’ve got to be director, owner, or CXO of the partner. meaning they’ve actually got to be the owner of the company team. So all we want to do in the current job title and seniority level all we are doing is we are just making sure we are speaking to the right person from there geography as you can see team I I picked the United States of America why it’s where the money is we discussed this we discussed this when we went through the niches it’s where the money is if we wanted to add others we click the plus button here and we can quite literally select any location North America Europe, California, uh, Florida. So, give me some very strange ones here. Africa, we can do regions. We could even break it down by postal codes, zip codes, if you will. But I don’t want to do that, team. I want to keep it to countries where I know the economy means I can earn more money. I know that they’re going to make a decision quicker, and I know for a fact that it matches with my niches. Now look, I recommend the United States of America. You can go wherever you want, team. It’s your business. But let’s say for instance, I wanted to add in England. All I do is I click here. I click include. And there we go. Now we’ve got England in there as well. So for the sake of it, let’s say we’ve got United States and England. Now the next one here is the industry. This is the big one that’s going to change team. Okay. So far, company headcount, regardless of the niche, stays the same. Job title, seniority level stays the same regardless of the niche. Geography stays the same regardless of the niche. The industry, this is where we start to refine it down. Now, if I’m looking for a dentist, I don’t use construction, specialty trade, contractors, utilities, and facility services. So depending on the niche, this is how we make sure we’re finding the right person in the right niche. Give me a little yes in the chat by the way team if that makes sense. The right person in the right niche.
Beautiful. So again, the geography stays the same. The only one that varies niche per niche is our industry. And as we scroll down here, as you see, we’ve got 380,000 results at the moment. 380,000. That’s a lot of people to go after. But here’s the thing, team. It’s about the quality. It’s about the quality. Nonnegotiable team. This little button here, posted on LinkedIn. So, if I hover over here and just highlight this, identify leads who have changed jobs in the last 90 days. We don’t want that one. Or who have posted on LinkedIn in the last 30 days. Why do I want to be contacting people that have posted on LinkedIn in the last 30 days, team? It’s very simple. They’re using LinkedIn. And look, this is 13,000 people from 360,000 people. That means that nearly 360,000 people team haven’t logged into their LinkedIn in the last 30 days. They haven’t posted. They might not even logged into their LinkedIn in the last 10 years, which means we’re going to go to all this time, energy, and effort to send them a message. They’re never going to see it. So, we go from 380,000. We toggle this one on. Now we have a highly targeted list of a companies between 1 and 50 employees owner founder seniority level making sure they’re the owner of the company the geography in the United States and England at this one here just for the sake of this in the niche that we want and they have posted in the last 30 days. And look at this team. President, founder, president, director of operations. This is how we start to find the right people team. So, so simple. It really isn’t over complicated. Don’t over complicate it. Company headcount stays the same. Current job title stays the same. Seniority level stays the same. Geography stays the same. Industry changes for our niche. non-negotiable posted on LinkedIn in the last 30 days. And team, it’s as simple as that. Give it a little me in the chat, by the way. If that’s blown your mind, the finding 13,000 people of the exact ideal client, it is that simple. On me in the chat if that’s blown your mind. Yeah. Step number two, team. Step number one, LinkedIn profile optimization. Step number two, finding the right people on LinkedIn in Sales Navigator. Now, I’m going to go very quickly flick back to my screen where we got a slide uh before we move into the final step, which is our outreach. One second.
Super simple, right team? So simple. No technical ability needed there. Click, click, click, click, click, and then boom. There are literally tens of thousands of exact ideal clients that we want to work with. Give me number five in the chat by the way if that is so simple, so powerful. And again, LinkedIn Sales Navigator, the best social media tool on the planet at the moment. Why? Because look, yes, there’s an investment. Oh my god, Sam, there’s an investment. Yeah, it’s $97 a month. I think it might be a little bit more, might be a little less. It kind of fluctuates from kind of month to month sometimes. It’s got it 100 bucks. 100 bucks a month team to be able to find every single exact ideal client you want team. You are small. This cost me $5 grand of my own money. Five grand of my own money. Give me number one in the chat if you prefer $97 as opposed to $5,000 a month. And again, look, if you haven’t got one already, super simple. I believe you still get a 30-day free trial. Just double check that. Use that 30 days, get your first client, pays for your LinkedIn sales navigator quite literally for the next like 5 years, whatever it is. So now we know where the search is. We’ve got tens of thousands of people. How do we reach out? Now, full disclaimer on this one here, team, before we go into this session. Okay, the software that we use, it is a software called Dripify. Full on disclaimer here, team, make sure you’re paying attention. Using AI softwares on LinkedIn is a little bit frowned upon from LinkedIn. They don’t like it. Okay, they don’t like it. Now, there is a risk, a minute risk that if you do use an AI powered outreach tool like Dripify, they might shut your account down. Now, I have never seen this happen myself personally. Never seen this happen. Chris has never seen this happen. In fact, even Chris just using this software, Drop Dripy, in his agency has generated over $5 million US with nearly a dozen team members using it every single day. Never been an issue. So, look, yes, there is a risk to it. It’s a risk I am personally willing to take because it literally saves me team hundreds of hours a week. Now, if you are super super worried and you go, well, I don’t want any risk. Well, first things first team that there’s always risk in everything. There’s risk when you drive a car. There’s risk when you eat food. You can do all of this manually. It’s completely up to yourself. I am just telling you right now, it’s what we use. We’ve never seen any issue and it is absolutely incredible. But we’ve never seen an issue because of one key element which I’m about to share with you in a moment when I go into it and actually show you the software itself. And if it does happen, team, there’s always a way around that. Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense with the disclaimer there, team. Give me a little yes in the chat if that makes sense. Beautiful. So, there’s four messages. We build it once. It sends automatically forever. We got a connection request. We make it short, human, no pitch. Okay. The reason to connect, nothing more. That is it. We have our value message. We send that once they accept the free audit link in there framed as a gift. It’s not a sale. It’s a gift. It’s a tool that they can use. After that, then we move into our manual process. The first two messages are all done automatically with Dripify. As soon as they reply back, this is when we move into our manual messages here, team. But remember, copy paste, copy, paste. You use the LinkedIn objection handler. It’s a LinkedIn sales objection handler. You copy their message. You paste it in. You get the response. You copy paste. Final touch point. Hey, you got a bit quiet. We try multiple times. Just because someone goes a little bit quiet doesn’t mean team doesn’t mean they’re not interested, does it? Doesn’t mean they’re not interested. Maybe they’re busy. Maybe they’re just busy. So, I’m going to go ahead share my screen again. Let’s dive into Dripify. One second.
So, you should never be able to see my screen. Just give me a number five in the chat if you can see my screen here. Beautiful. Fantastic. So, team that this is inside of Dripy. Okay. I know it looks a bit confusing. There’s colors everywhere. There’s lots on screen. It It really is very simple team. Okay. I’m going to walk you through step by step and I’m going to quite literally build a campaign live for you to show you how simple this is to have AI doing outreach every single day for you team. Every single day for you. Now, before you ask, what do you need in terms of what level? You need to get the advanced monthly. It’s got to be the advanced account. And I’ll explain why in a moment. my personal recommendation team. Start on the monthly account, okay? But you can get the yearly, you might save a hundred bucks. Start on the monthly. Get your first client in. Once you got your first client, great. Upgrade. Pay the year off in full. Get the saving. But when you’re first starting out, monthly, $97 is absolutely nothing. Especially when you see what we can do with this team. This is the software that gives us 24/7 365 if we want outreach on autopilot. Meaning you never have to send an outreach message. Give me a yes in the chat if you like the sound of that. By the way, team beautiful. So when you first log in here, team all you’ve got to do little bit of a best practice here. Number one, you’ve got to click this little arrow here and then we need to go to my account here. All you’ve got to do, team, is you’ve got to make sure that your LinkedIn profile is connected. It’s two clicks of a button. You click a little button just here, log into your LinkedIn, you connect it, and then you log into your LinkedIn sales navigator. Again, it’s click, click. Easy, easy to do. Once you’ve done those two steps, now the next step, we move over here to settings. Now, as you can see here, this shows the maximum number of actions per day. So you can see mine at the moment is 19 connection requests, seven messages, 30 emails, uh 33 profile views, five endorsements, 58 likes, following 17 that I can send 12 emails. Now, why is this important? Well, over here, let me move my head out the way. There we are. Is what’s called activity control here, team. Activity control. Now this turned on is absolutely nonnegotiable team. Non-negotiable. The activity control as you can see here. Listen to this team. advanced safety feature that ensures gradual growth of your performance and may adjust your daily connecting messaging email limits to prevent both your LinkedIn and email accounts from being flagged for excessive activity team. It is a guard rail to protect your LinkedIn profile. If you turn this off, you you’re rolling a dice hoping it never comes up six. Always leave this turned on. Now, the maximum we can send a day is 75 connection requests, but you know what? Sometimes it says 19. Tomorrow it might say 52. The day after it might say three. It randomizes it team to ensure that you fly under that radar. Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. Must leave this turned on. And again, if you want, you can go through, you can update your working hours as well. So, how do we build a campaign? It’s so simple. Watch this. Ready? I click on campaigns. Just here. I come over. I click on new campaign. Now, the first thing it’s going to ask us to do, team, is add leads. All I do is I click the add leads button and then I just highlight here LinkedIn Sales Navigator search. There’s multiple different options here. We’re going to choose LinkedIn Sales Navigator search. Transfer profiles from the search panel of your sales navigator. So, I go ahead, I click that button, and then I click on next. Now, step two of four. Super simple, by the way. By the way, give me a number one in the chat. Who can do everything I’ve done so far? So simple. What you’ll notice here, team, is we’ve got a little empty bar here. So all we have to do is we’re going to come back up here to our LinkedIn sales navigator. This is our search that we did earlier in this session here team. This is our search that we did for our home services. You are going to just click up here, highlight the entire URL. You are going to copy the entire thing. We are then going to come back to Dripify. We are going to paste this in. and it is now going to pull all of that search that we did on LinkedIn Sales Navigator and it’s going to pull in people straight away. Now, you can see here, here’s the link. It has pulled in the first 2,475 people. Now, you can see our search is 13,000 people. It pulls in 2,00 how many do we have? 2,475. Now, the great thing about this is team, we’re not going to reach the same people. The 2,475 people I pull in are going to be different to yours. You haven’t got to worry about that. We want to add the maximum profiles. Now, once we’ve reached all 2,475, we just do the same process. We add the leads. It adds in the next 2 and a half thousand. The next 2 and a half thousand. Does that make sense? See, give me a nine in the chat if that makes sense.
We go ahead, we click next. Now, from here, there’s a couple things we want to check here. Choose lead filtering rules for this lead list. We want to make sure we remove same leads from other campaigns. Always leave that on because we might be forgetting we’ve done it. And again, this one here, if you want, you can say if they don’t have a photo, well, do you know what? I’d like to remove them as well cuz if they don’t have a photo, they’re probably not even going to do it. But you can remove that if you want as well. It’s completely up to you. We go ahead. We click next. And we name this. Make sure you name this something you will remember. So you want to say like home services. Oh, if I can type search. And then you’re going to put in the date of when you did this. Please don’t forget. And you’re going to type in um as an example AI agency audit offer or you can just put AI audit offer. So always type in here team the niche. Type in the date you added it and then type in what this is for. What this is this is exposure growth academy. This is your AI agency. I’m giving that free audit. And then all we do team, we go ahead, we create that list and off it goes. Naturally, I’ve got a bit of a network error here. Let me just go ahead and sort this. But we’ll come back to this in a second. But you just click create a list team and it would create the list. No worries. So once we’ve done that team, our next step here, uh, I’m going to save this. I’m going to save this. We’re going to then come in here and I’m just going to show you an example post here team. Show you an example post here. So the sequence we’re going to build here is so simple. This looks really confusing. And again, I want to show you a very a finished sequence so you can see it in full access. But it’s so so simple for us to build. It looks really confusing, doesn’t it? You look at this and go, “Wow, Sam, there’s just so much on this. so much. It is really isn’t. Okay. All we’re going to do, we’re going to zoom in. All you do here, team, is you click a plus button. See this little plus button here? You click that and look what shows up here. It shows, well, do you want to send an invite? Do you want to maybe send a message? Do you want to do a view profile? Endorse skills. All we’re going to do here, team, you’re going to click the little plus button here, and you’re going to click send invite. That’s it. You’re going to click send invite. Now, once we have that, we’re going to go ahead and click on this. And immediately here, you can see there’s a message popping up. Now, this is a profile we built up for another one of our clients. And you can actually quite literally see it here. is actually one of our clients who um uh became a bit of a business partner with myself and Chris. By the way, give a little me in the chat. Who don’t mind being business partners with us, having us basically do everything for you. We run everything. We manage everything. Yeah, quite a few people. Stay tuned. I’ll let you know how we could do this. And what we do here, team, is we just type in our connection message. Type in our connection message here. Now, what do we type? Well, let there’s so many ways we can do this. As an example, if I come down here, I can click on first name and we can just go ahead. Let’s just remove that one for the moment. I could go ahead click first name. What this will then do, if I click first name, it will pull someone’s first name from LinkedIn and it will say, “Hi, Sam.” Really powerful. I could do the position, their job title. I could do their company, their country. I could even have so many of more these in here. Team, this is how we can make an AI outreach message to everyone start to seem personal as if we have taken the time to type it out. Give me a five in the chat. That’s pretty awesome there, by the way, team. Pretty awesome, right? So uh I’m not going to change this as it’s another person’s one there as well. Got to love a live event, right? You got to love a network issue. Um so here all we do is we then click save. What we then do team is we have an opportunity if they accept our request or if they don’t accept our request. So let’s say if they don’t accept our request, we then click on a delay timer. We then say, “I would like you to wait one day.” Now, we could click 1 hour, but we’re going to wait a day. We’re going to apply that. If they if someone doesn’t accept it, we send it out. They don’t accept, we wait one day, and automatically without us doing anything, we can then go and view their profile. We click the plus button, we say, “Go and view their profile.” Just gives them a little notification. Hey, Sam Drew viewed your profile. It pushes them back to the message. We wait a day, follow them. We wait a day, like one of their posts. We wait a day, view their profile again, like a post, wait 3 days, wait 7 days, and then we say, “Hey, do you know what? If after all of that, they still haven’t responded, we we’ll drop them out. We’ll end the sequence.” All it is team is literally clicking a plus button. Simple as that team. We click plus add like a post. Unfollow view profile. It really is. Click click click click click. Give me a C in the chat if you can click.
So simple right now. If they do accept, we want to wait 3 hours. We click on that. We add it in team. Wait 3 hours. Don’t put it like immediately or 1 hour. Give it a bit of time. 3 4 hours. It needs to look real, doesn’t it? If you send a message and immediately you get one back, yeah, that’s not real. It’s not a real person. We want it to look real there, team. And then from there, we go ahead and we have our message. This is our call to action. This is our message, by the way, saying, “Hey, first name. Thanks so much for reaching out. Hey, look, as promised, we’ve got a free social media audit. What this is going to do for you is ABC. Here’s the link for it. You can go ahead, you can view it. And look, you can type in any links you want here. Any link you put, if I click on this now, nothing happens. But if I put the link in there, when it posts to them on LinkedIn, it becomes a clickable link. So so powerful there team. And that is it. We have this message sending out. We can even if we want we can send an email out to them. If they view my message, they haven’t viewed a message, view their profile. if they have viewed their profile and again simple as click add click add click and add and team this is the absolute beating heart that is running in the background it is click click copy paste if you’re not too sure team what to write in here we ask AI we’re not too sure what to write in here we ask AI give me a wow in the chat box. By the way, if that is amazing how simple that is. It is literally just click click click click copy paste click copy paste. Give me a wow in the chat if that is absolutely gamechanging. Beautiful. And it really is team that simple. In fact, let me go back to my screen. I want to give you a bit of an understanding of some average results. Give me one sec.
There we go. I’m back on this one. So team, by the way, just give me a little me in the chat if that has absolutely blown your mind and you just sat and you’ve had a bit of a realization. I I can do this. I I could set that up. There is nothing technical in there. All I’ve got to do is click a couple of buttons, make sure the safety is on, and I can set my working hours. And this can run in the background while I do what I want, when I want with who I want. team. You could literally be sat having your morning cup of coffee, your morning cup of tea. You could be taking the kids to school on the school run. You could be sat You could be still sleeping. You could be on holiday on a beach with your toes in the warm sand, the sun beating down, hearing the lapping of the sea with a cold drink in your hand. or that works in the background for you. 247365.
Give me a yes in the chat if you want that. Fantastic.
Brilliant. Cuz ultimately team that’s the system. That is it. That’s the system. That is the outreach system. We build it once. It runs forever. Now what kind of average numbers can we look at team? For every 500 messages you send, you should probably get around about 10% of people replying, that’s 50 replies.
When those 50 people remember sending that audit, the copy paste LinkedIn sales objection handler about 20% of those should be booking in a call. 10 calls booked in and team even just for starting out you should be hitting a minimum 20% of those calls that you have should be saying yes I’m in when you if you’ve got experience in sales or maybe if you outsource this to a a commission only sales team which we’re going to talk about don’t worry you can expect that 30 40 50 60%. So, just think of it this way, team. For every 500 messages you send, that could be $10,000 in your bank account and $1,000 a month. Every single month, that is a $22,000
payriseise.
Give me a wow in the chat, by the way, if that’s pretty damn amazing. Yeah, that’s pretty awesome. And again, really just to drive this home to finish off the session team. Look, before you activate, before you build this, whether it be on the break, whether it be on the after the lunch or whether it be after the session, when you build this team, have this realization. I want you to recognize what’s happening. That campaign is going to reach out to real business owners on your behalf without you lifting a finger. Not practice business owners, real business owners. Meaning, by the way, team, you are now a real business owner. This is not a hobby. Recognize this. The moment you click go on that campaign, you are a business owner. That is who you are now. Give me number five in the chat. That’s pretty awesome. Fantastic. So team, we are going to go ahead and we’re going to take a let me just double check. We’re going to take a 10 minute leg stretch now. A little 10-minute leg stretch. We’re going to come back for a game changer of a session in that next one. 10-minute leg stretch. And I will see you very soon. Thank you so much, team.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat up here.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
So, welcome back everyone. Welcome back. A huge welcome back. Go ahead, give me a number five in the chat. Who is back? Give me a number five in the chat. Who is back there, team? And also, while you’re there, give me a little me in the chat if that last session was amazing. Quite literally, such a simple process, right? Optimize our LinkedIn, get our sales navigator search, make sure we’ve got our AI outreach working for us 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Meaning, look, team, there is no manual outreach. Now, I know what you’re thinking. Yeah, but Sam, what happens if someone replies? We’re going to cover that off a little bit later today as well. Now this session here team this session is is one of those sessions that we almost kind of don’t want to have we don’t want to address we don’t want to talk about but it’s probably the most important session of this entire event because today in this session it’s all about making sure you get results after this event by addressing up here these limiting beliefs that we all have. And look, you’ve all got them. I’ve got them. I still have them. We all have them. Oh, well, I can’t do it because enter a reason. Too old, too young, too educated, not educated enough, too busy, no money, too much money, too much freedom, not enough freedom, no time. See, we have all got a million reasons locked and loaded in our head, ready to go that hold us back. Give me a two in the chat if we can all agree on that. By the way, team, in fact, you’ve probably been saying this, saying them to yourselves over the event so far. Now, just imagine as an example, imagine a world where you said to yourself, “Hey, I’m going to go ahead and I’m going to set up an AI agency and it’s going to be absolutely incredible.” Imagine if your brain immediately went, “Yeah, you are. You You can do it. Let’s go.”
How much easier would that make a business team? How much easier, by the way, would that make life? Because look, the reality is we’ve all got these limiting beliefs on our head. I’m no different. You I’m further down the line, team. That’s all it is. And in this session, I’m going to quite literally show you how our brain works, why these limiting beliefs come up, and more importantly, team, how to overcome them. Because ultimately, look, knowing how to do something doesn’t mean you go and do it. I’m sure we all know we should get up at 5:00 in the morning, go on a five mile run in a gym session, and have a kale smoothie for breakfast. doesn’t mean you do it though and if we can understand up here team the rest of this falls into place like I said when I started my business I was my biggest problem and if we can get this on our side team the rest of it is easy cuz ultimately look if you can control your thoughts then you can control your emotions if you can control your emotions then you can control your actions and if you can control your actions team, then you can control the outcome. Now, for my science people here, don’t worry. We’re not going to go woo woo on this, okay? We’re not going to go woo woo. Give me a give me a W in the chat. Who are my kind of woo woo people here? You know, you love the law of attraction, intuition, universal forces. Yeah, give me a W in the chat. And uh who are my science people here that quite literally just heard me say universal forces, intuition, law of attraction, and you almost throw up in your mouth. Give me an S in the chat here, team. I’m kind of in the middle. Okay. I like the woowoo stuff, but I like stuff that’s backed up with science. And everything we’re going through here, team, it’s all back backed up with science. Cuz look, there’s three kind of phases, if you will, three stages of our brain. We’ve got our conscious mind, our subconscious mind, and our unconscious mind. We are not diving in to our unconscious mind. Team, that’s like a twoe Freudian trip. But what we’re going to look at here, team, it is the conscious mind versus the subconscious mind. The conscious mind is what we call the goal setter. As part of your homework, you were to sit down and write out right, well, I want this, I want this team. You had to consciously think, what do I want? You know, you didn’t put your pen down on a paper like a Ouija board and it’s moving. I’m not doing this. It is moving. What does it say? It says five bedroomedroom house. No, you consciously when what do I want? Now, the funny thing about this is team, you don’t need to work on your conscious mind. Would you like to see a live demonstration of me working on my conscious mind? You ready? Here we go. Here’s a live demonstration. I’m sad. No, I’m not. I’m happy. There you go. I just changed my conscious mind. I’m really scared. No, I’m not. I’m confident. I changed my conscious mind. That doesn’t mean I’m confident, though, does it? The subconscious mind, team, that is the goal getter. That’s the part of our brain that does things on autopilot every single moment of every single day. Just think about it, team. Think about every single action, every single word out of your mouth. If you had to consciously instruct it, it doesn’t work, does it? We are all slaves to the subconscious team. I wake up in the morning, the first thing I do is I pick up my daughter. Second thing I do without even thinking about it is walk out, turn the kettle on, and get ready to make a coffee. I don’t consciously go, hm, I’m going to have a coffee today. We just go and do it. And we do this all day long, team. It isn’t just our thinking, it’s our actions. Ready? Someone walks up to you. Fingers on the keyboard. Finish my sentence here, team. You ready? Someone walks up to you and goes, “Hey, how are you?” What do you say back? Oh, I’m good, thanks. You team, when’s the last time someone said, “How are you?” and you went, “How am I? Let me have a think right now.” No, you just automatically say it back. Another great example here, team. You’re in a clothes shop. The very keen 18-year-old sales assistant comes skipping over. Hi, is there anything I can help you with today? No thanks. I’m just just looking, just browsing. A team that we do this look, my favorite one though, think of a journey that’s like really really familiar to you. Maybe it’s like home from work, home from the school run. Have you ever like, you know, put the kids in the back seat, shut the door, turn the ignition on, and you’ve gone, I’m home. I don’t remember that drive. Give me a little me in the chat if you’ve ever remember, you’ve ever had that experience where you don’t remember the drive team. Yeah, you didn’t teleport team, but what happened was it’s such a familiar behavior for you and you do it so often that our conscious brain just turns off. And on autopilot, we get to an end destination. Now, team, like I said, I’m not a preacher. I’m not here to preach at you. Fact, evidence, and data, right? Am I fair to say if you can drive a one to three ton metal box with a combustible engine underneath it through busy streets with your children in the back seat, and you don’t realize you’re doing it? Am I also fair to say maybe you are taking actions in your life that are in complete contradiction to the goals you consciously set. Yes or no team? Let me know in the chat. What do we think?
100%. 100% team. Now where the really scary part comes in team is the split between the two. On average, conscious mind about 5% of what we do 95% of what we do on a dayto-day basis team is just gone complete autopilot. Think about it. When’s the last time you consciously went left foot stop, lift right foot, right foot stop. We consciously think of about 5%. Now look, some are higher, some are lower. But it means that 95% of all of our actions and behaviors on a day-to-day basis are on autopilot. Meaning team, if our subconscious, i.e. our limiting beliefs isn’t on our side, how are we going to win? 5% versus 95%. How are we going to win? Team, this is another reason why I want you to have a realization. It’s not your fault you haven’t got the results up until now. You did everything within your power, right? That 5%, you set your goal. You put a plan in place. But unless we get that 95% subconscious on our side by addressing these limiting beliefs, it doesn’t matter how much you want it to team, that 95% over here will swoop back in and bring you back to what is normal for us, i.e. your life right now. Give you an example, team. Three words to prove my point. New Year’s resolutions. Everyone always sets a New Year’s resolution, right? And if you ever noticed that most New Year’s resolutions are to get fit and healthy, you get in the best shape of my life. Which is ironic because what do we do all of December, you spend the entire month eating and drinking everything you physically can. And then December 31st, after a couple of beers, maybe a couple of glass of wine, you go, I’m I’m doing it. This is the year, best shape of my life. So consciously we make the decision to get in to set a goal. Then what happens is January 1st, we probably wake up with a hangover. First week of January, we join a gym. We consciously do everything right. We download My Fitness Pal. We get a gym routine. We’re there running like, you know, the old cross trainer. We’re doing we got the measurement, you know, measuring out grains of rice to make sure it’s the exact grams we need. But we don’t address anything up here about our behavior, do we? And how we think, our limiting beliefs. And then what always happens around about February or March time? Well, we fall off the wagon. Fall off the wagon. And we don’t even realize we’re doing it. You’ll have a really bad day. You come home, you sit down, and you look down, you go, “Oh, I just ate a whole pack of biscuits and had four beers was because we didn’t address these limiting beliefs, team, that are holding us back.” And there’s another word for our conscious mind, by the way, team. It’s called willpower. Willpower will only last on average around about 6 to 8 weeks.
So, you do everything right, trying to get in shape for six to eight weeks, and then what happens is your subconscious swoops back in and goes, “No, no, no. We’re back to eating cakes and biscuit.” Does that make sense, by the way? Give me a seven in the chat if you’ve had a realization. That’s happened to you in the past, by the way, team. Yeah. And the same thing probably happened with your business. All we need to do, team, is we just need to reprogram this subconscious to make sure it’s on our side. And the great news is team, it’s actually pretty easy to do. And in fact, we’re going to do it in this session. But what we need to do beforehand is we need to start out where these mixed messagings are. And we’re going to do an exercise team. It’s on, I believe, around about page 13 of your books. It’s called mixed messages messing things up. I can’t remember the exact page of it as well. But what are we to do here, team? We’re going to do a bit of an exercise because we need to see where these mixed messages are because what you’re probably finding at the moment is you’re going to set a goal over here. I want to earn $10,000 a month. Okay? That’s your conscious. That’s your goal setter. That’s what you think. Your subconscious team, these limiting beliefs is what do you feel? Does that make sense? I think, oh, I’m going to hit $10,000 a month. What do you feel? What is that gut feeling inside of it? What’s that voice in the back of our heads saying? I’m going to hit $10,000 a month. Yeah, someone like you can’t do this. Who do you think you are? Why can’t you be happy with what you’ve got? And look, there’s nothing wrong with this. By the way, team, if you’ve got that little voice over here, good. We all have it. But we want to do a bit of an exercise. It’s around about page 13. Consciously, what I want you to do, team, is consciously, I want you to write down a goal that you want to hit with business. I want to get my first client in the first 30 days. Immediately write that down. And immediately after, team on the other side of the paper, write down what you feel. I would have hit $10,000 a month. Immediately after, yeah, but someone like me can’t do that. I already get my first client in the first 30 days. I haven’t got a hope in hell in doing that. I don’t know how to sell. I I you know I’m just I should go back to my full-time job. Does that make sense so far? Give me a two in the chat if that makes sense. We’re going to go goal conscious feeling what you feel which is our subconscious limiting beliefs that are potentially holding us back. And team be honest with yourself. There’s no right or wrong answer here. All we’re trying to do is see consciously is that actually in line with our limiting beliefs? Because if we think we want this, but our limiting belief is here, it it doesn’t work out, team, does it? It doesn’t work out. So, we’re going to take about four minutes on this here, team. About 4 minutes on this. I’m going to go ahead turn my camera off so I’m not distracting. 4 minutes, team. Conscious, subconscious, conscious, subconscious. And off we go.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat
up here.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Okay, team finishing up and stop right there. Fantastic. So, give a little bit of a a me in the chat if you’ve just had a bit of a realization that your brain isn’t on your side. Yeah, you pro cuz the first time I did this exercise, I went, “Hold on a second here. Hold on a second. I I thought we were friends.” What? Consciously, every goal that I set, my swap conscious was in complete contradiction. Give me a one in the chat if that happened to you. And yeah team look this is the reason why this is the number one thing that if we don’t address this you’d have just gone out there into the real world knowing what to do had start to take action and then what happens is we just self sabotage team does that make sense give me a two in the chat if that makes sense we starting to see how valuable of this is and for me this is the reason why myself Chris Georgie we have all spent tens of thousands of dollars just addressing up here because if this isn’t on your side, it doesn’t matter how much information you have, you’re never going to implement team. And look, my subconscious I is is so damn programmed. I selling is the best thing in the world. I deserve everything. I am worth it. And it isn’t because I grew up like that. No, I’ve reprogrammed my subconscious cuz you’re always going to have these feelings, team. I still have these feelings. What’s going to happen is look, you’ve got a bit of a barrier here right now. We’re going to overcome that barrier. And then guess what team? It’s going to be a whole new set of limiting beliefs that come up. You’re going to overcome them. A whole new set, a whole new set. People like Richard Branson, Lord Alan Sugar, Oprah Winfrey, Tony Robbins, they still have them. There’s always a next level in life and new issues to overcome. The way that this is team, the best analogy I can give you, it’s like a garden. It’s like a garden, right? I can’t go out into my back garden, mow the lawn once, put a load of plants, water it, and then go, “Yeah, that’s me done. I’ll be back in 5 years.” It’s going to get overgrown. It takes a little bit of maintenance team because we’ve always going to have limiting beliefs when we get to that next level in life. Give me a six in the chat if that makes sense, by the way. Now, so look, now we know we’ve got these mixed messages here, team. We need to start addressing how our subconscious works because our subconscious by the way team gets all of its ideas from its beliefs. Now want to make something very very clear. I forgot to say this at the beginning of the session team want to make something clear. Full disclaimer here. Anytime in this session or the entire event if I ever say the word beliefs please pay attention here. I am not talking about anything to do with religion, anything to do with spirituality. All I am talking about is the beliefs we have about ourselves, money, our business, and what we can achieve. Give me a six in the chat if that makes sense. By the way, team, beautiful. Now, the beliefs we all have, team, that they aren’t something we choose. They just happen, don’t they? Money doesn’t grow on trees. Money is a root of all evil. We went through this. Look, think about all of the limiting beliefs that you have right now. The ones we just went through. If you could actively choose them, you wouldn’t choose anything negative, would you? That’s psychotic. You’d only choose things that are going to help you. And we just randomly absorb beliefs, team, as human beings until now, of course, because beliefs are absorbed, team, and we don’t have any control over this. It’s completely unconscious. Beliefs are absorbed when we hear something from an authority figure. Repetition and we hear it with impact. As an example, team, let me know in the chat some authority figures that you may have absorbed beliefs from in the past.
Parents. Yeah, huge one. Parents. We absorb beliefs from parents, siblings, teachers at school. Yeah. Religious leaders. Yeah. Not all beliefs we absorb are negative, right? When you go to religion, you absorb fantastic positive beliefs. The government. Yeah. The government. Team. The government. Well, if the government said it, it must be true. Team, there’s another word for that, by the way. It’s called propaganda. Team. Before the invention of the internet, countries would use propaganda as a weapon. It’s that powerful. Yeah, mentors. Another great one. Mentors. Yeah, you can absorb beliefs from your mentor as well. Friends, definitely repetition over and over and over again. And if we hear something with impacting, we are so much more likely to absorb it. And when you hear something from an authority figure with repetition and they say it’s so impactful, we start to believe ourselves. Give you an example of this team. Have you ever been in a position where maybe um let’s say for instance, you know, you’re just chatting to maybe an authority figure in your life, someone you love, respect, and you know, you say a fact and they go and sorry, they say a fact and you go that’s not true. And you know 100% in your brain it is not true. but because they’re an authority figure that maybe you love and respect and they keep repeating the wrong fact and they’re saying it with so much impact. Have you ever noticed you start to doubt yourself? You go, “Well, maybe they are. Maybe I’m wrong.” Give me a one in the chat if that’s ever happened to you by the way team. Yeah. Authority, repetition, and impact. And these beliefs that we absorb, team, they are driving our income. They are driving our behavior as adults. Cuz ultimately, team, we’re just not taught how this works. All of the beliefs that we absorb, our beliefs drive our feelings. Our feelings then drive our thoughts. Our thoughts drive our actions. Our actions give us a result. Our result gives us an experience. And the experience you’ve had reinforces a belief.
Let me give you an example about this a little bit more kind of personal to myself team so we all understand it. Look, when I was younger team, my dad was a business owner. He was an auto electrician. For those you don’t know what that is, it’s working on electrics on big lries. And you know, he worked six sometimes seven days a week. Now, when he worked less and I saw my dad more, money was a bit tight. There was a lot more stress. When he worked long hours, well, things were okay. So, team, when I was younger, did I absorb a belief that you could work short hours or you had to work long hours? Let me know in the chat, team. Short hours or long hours?
Yeah, long hours. So there I was team set up my first business and it was my very first agency. I went from being on minimum wage nearly $20,000 in debt and now I’m earning 2030 $40,000 a month and I’m working like 2 hours a day. Now my belief is I need to work long hours. What do you think my feelings were around earning that much money only working two two hours a day? Do you reckon they were positive or negative team? Let me know in the chat. Yeah, they should have been positive. They were negative. I felt guilty. I felt like I was almost like cheating the system. So, my thoughts were I don’t like this. This feels really bad. Okay. So, what actions did I take? Did I continue to work 2 hours or did I make myself busy? I made myself busy. What result did I get? Well, I’m working long hours now. What’s my experience? When I work short hours, I feel guilty. I don’t like it. When I work long hours, I feel better about myself. Which then reinforces my belief that to be successful in business, you have to work long hours.
A belief that I absorbed as a child was dictating my life and my business as an adult. Give me a wow in the chat by the way if that’s pretty unbelievable. Yeah. Another great one here team. The rich get richer, the poor get poorer. Let’s go through this here. You ready? You got someone who maybe grew up in a house where money was everywhere. very abundant. What are their feelings around money? Well, money is everywhere. Money feels great. What’s their feelings when it comes to investing in themselves, investing in their business? Investing in mentorships help support what’s really positive. Well, money is everywhere. What’s their thought? I’m going to do this. What actions do they take? They invest in themselves. Mentorship support their business adverts. What results do they get? They earn more money back. What’s their experience? Well, if I invest in myself, I earn more money cuz money is everywhere. And so the cycle continues. The poor get poorer. Someone grew up maybe with not a very comfortable, shall we say, background. Maybe they didn’t even know where their next meal was coming from. What’s their belief around money? Money is scarce. Money isn’t everywhere. So what’s their feelings when it comes to investing themselves in their business? Well, very negative. What are their thoughts? I can’t afford it. What actions do they take? None. What results do they take? None. What’s their experience? Well, you need money to be able to invest the money. Money is really scarce, which then reinforces their belief that money is scarce. Team, this is happening 24 hours a day inside of here. Just give me a little me in the chat if this is blowing you away. By the way, now the great thing about this is the only thing we need to change right here team is our belief. This doesn’t happen overnight. You’re not going to all of a sudden after this session go wow yeah I have no negative beliefs. No team, what we need to do is we need to replace that damaging limiting belief with a new positive belief that then gives us the new feelings, new thoughts, new actions, new results, new experiences. And those new experiences reinforce that positive belief over time. Does that make sense? Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. By the way, team,
and again, for my realists out there, welcome on here. I hope you are enjoying your half empty glass of water. T, you’ve got to stop being realistic. Being realistic is literally the most commonly traveled road to mediocrity. We’ve got to draw a line in the sand and stop being realistic here, team. Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense.
So, how does our brain actually work? How does our brain work? How are we filtering? And how can we use it to our advantage? Because team, we are quite literally filtering our reality every single day. Your version of real and my version of real are very, very different, team. And I’m not about to turn around and say we live in the matrix. No team, you are the only person on the planet that can see literally through your own eyes, with your own brain. No one else on this planet can see the world the same way you have because you’re filtering it through your entire existence on this planet. It’s why when you turn around to why can’t you just see it from my side? They literally can’t. They literally can’t. Give you an example. Am I fair to say team that two people can stand in front of the same painting but get a different message from it? Yes or no team?
100% right. So we need to understand how our brain is filtering our reality because every single second team, every single second your brain is being bombarded with 400 billion bits of information. Think about that. 400 billion bits of information. Just what can you see? What can you hear? What can you smell? What can you touch? All of our senses team just bombarded with information. Our brain literally cannot handle all of that. What our brain only really processes is around about 2,000 bits of information. about 2,000 bits of information. Meaning it is 0.0 0 0 0.1% of all of the information in there we actually only see and process.
Why am I telling you this team? I’m telling you this because the opportunities are there. We’re just not processing them. Our brain is filtering out our reality quite literally. I give you an example here team. Just hold your finger like this. Ready? And look, stare at the tip of your finger as hard as you can and then move your finger in slowly only staring at your finger. And then your nose appears. team. Your brain literally filters out a part of your body because it gets in the way of seeing the ground. If your brain is filtering out a part of your body, am I fair to say they are probably filtering out opportunities, team? Yes or no? Yes or no?
Cuz look, your brain only only lets you see what you believe in. Your brain doesn’t want to disagree with you. So all of the information comes in here and just around about here, it’s like there’s a little filter and it says, “Does Sam believe this?” If you believe there is no opportunity to, you know, there’s no there’s no businesses in the world that need this. If you believe that, your brain isn’t going to go, “Hey, you idiot. Here’s 50 of them.” It’s just going to kick them out. Comes down here. What does Sam believe? Does he believe in it? Yes. Okay, we’ll show him that. If he doesn’t, we kick it out. There’s opportunities everywhere. The only difference is is our brain is kicking them out and we’re not seeing them. Couple of great example this team. I do this all the time. I’m cooking my meal and I’m like, “Right, where’s the where’s the salt?” I look and go, “It’s not in the cupboard. Why is the salt not in the cupboard? The salt is I the salt should be here.” I’m like, “Baby, where’s the salt?” She goes, “It’s in a cupboard.” I go, “I I’m looking in the cupboard. It is not in the cupboard. She goes, “It’s in the cupboard.” I said, “Baby, I am looking in the cupboard. It is not in the cupboard. Where is the salt?” She walks over and she just goes,
“It was in the cupboard the entire time. Give me a one in the chat. Ever happened to you?” Yeah. Because guess what, team? To my very core, I believed the salt was not in the cupboard. So, guess what happened? My brain deleted the salt from the cupboard. Give you a great story here as well team. Bit of an example here. Now imagine you got two sales people. Okay, two salespeople and they both work for a popular running shoe company. Salesperson number one super down on their luck. They’re struggling. They’re close to getting fired. They just can’t get a sale over the line. Do you think team they’ve got positive or negative beliefs around sales? Give me a P or an N in the chat, by the way. Yeah. Negative, right?
Salesperson number two, they got the mightest touch. They’re on fire. They’ve earned the most money they’ve ever earn in their life. And they’re on track to break the company record. positive beliefs around sales. So salesperson number one, the person with the negative beliefs, jumps on a plane, goes out to a village in the middle of nowhere trying to sell running shoes, gets out the plane, gets in a taxi, gets to this village and walks around and just goes, “Ah, it’s not going to work.” Pulls out their phone, phones their boss, and says, “Bos, I’m coming home. It’s a waste of time. We’re trying to sell them running shoes. Everyone’s walking around barefoot. No one even wears shoes. I can’t sell shoes to people that don’t own shoes. Hops in their car, drives back, off they go. Salesperson number two gets in a plane, goes to that same village, looks around, picks up the phone, and says, “Hey boss, we made a mistake. No one’s wearing any shoes. I can sell shoes to everyone. Send me more shoes.
Same village, same opportunity. The only difference is one of the salespeople couldn’t see the opportunity of their life purely because of their beliefs. Their brain kicked it out.
Give me a five in the chat if that makes sense by the way because we only see what we believe is real, not what is real. And we are trying to find a needle in the haststack of the information we want. But more damaging than that team is if we see the opportunity and don’t take action. Saying stuff like in a minute, it’s on my list. I’ll do it later. I’ll do it next week. I need to check with someone team. This is where our overthinking comes in. Give me an O in the chat. Who are my overthinkers here, team?
Yeah, should be all of you. I love the fact that some of you just went, am I an overinker? I don’t really think I’m an overinker. I mean, sometimes I’m an overinker, but how do you classify an overinker? I mean, like I mean, I’d say some team, you’re overthinking about overthinking. This is the difference team between thinking and overthinking. It’s very simple this team. When you make a decision to do something, that first thought is the correct thought. I’m going to do that. I should do this. That is the correct thought. Everything else after five seconds, team is your brain desperately trying to drag you into your comfort zone and keep you safe. You know what? Yeah, I’m going to build this business.
Then what happens is the yeah buts and the whatifs take over. Yeah, but what if it doesn’t work? Yeah, but what if I try this and I fail? Yeah, but what if people find out what I’m doing and I embarrass myself? Yeah, but what if I do this and I end up homeless? Team, the first thought is always the correct thought. All your brain is trying to do after that five seconds is come up with a million reasons why you shouldn’t do it to try and keep you safe in your comfort zone. Give me a five in the chat if that sounds all too familiar.
That first thought is the correct. Always remember that first thought. It’s the correct thought team. So, we’re going to do a bit of an exercise here. The 5-second rule. Uh I believe it’s on a page 14. It should be the page straight after for you team. What we’re going to do team is you’re going to go through and you’re going to say to yourself that how are we going to use the 5-second rule in your life and or business remembering that first thought is always a correct thought. Has hesitating stopped you before and when? And what difference will it make using this moving forward? So team, we’re going to take around about a minute on this. Going to go ahead remove my screen, my camera so I don’t distract you. One minute on this team. Off we go. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
and finishing up their team. Awesome. So now let’s continue looking at our beliefs. Team, look, most of these beliefs we have are normally formed between the age of 0 and seven. Look, here’s the thing, team. You weren’t born with these beliefs. No one’s born with these beliefs. No one, by the way, is born racist. No one is born homophobic, xenophobic. No one is born a member of a certain government party. No one’s born believing they can’t achieve in life. These are all learned behaviors, team. They’re learned beliefs. Absorbed beliefs. And if we can absorb a belief and learn a belief, team, we can unlearn a belief. You weren’t You weren’t delivered with your doctor going, “Okay, come on. Push. Push. One more push.” Oh, congratulations. It’s a little baby girl who believes they’re never going to be able to earn more than $10,000 a month. It’s learned behavior team. These beliefs are nothing more than a strong feeling of certainty. They are emotionally driven and it is your choice to either blindly believe it or to challenge it and truly take control. Give me a yes in the chat by the way. Who is ready to challenge these beliefs? take control finally today. So, we’re going to do an exercise here, team. We’re going to do an exercise on page I think it’s page 15. We’ve got a list of limiting beliefs all in there, team. And what I want you to do in a minute, not right now, team, but in a minute, I want you to read every single one of those limiting beliefs. Now, as you’re reading them, team, I just want you to put a little check mark next to one that maybe you feel has a bit of an impact. Read it and ask yourself, is this something that’s holding me back? But I want you to put a check mark immediately, team, do you feel there’s something there?
Now the reason why we to put a check mark immediately team is because as an example if you read the first one I’m not good enough to be successful. Do you feel anything like o yeah I I kind of feel something there. Do a check mark immediately because remember team this is our subconscious beliefs our limiting beliefs. just put a check mark immediately because if you don’t put a check mark after a couple of seconds, what’s going to happen is your conscious mind is going to swoop in and you’re going to go, “Oh, actually, no, no, I don’t think that affects us.” All it is, team is our conscious mind trying to protect us. We don’t want that. We want to understand which limiting beliefs are holding us back. Give me a one in the chat if that makes sense so far. By the way, team
Now, a couple things on this. First things first, it does not matter how many you go yet on. I’m not going to ask you. I’m not going to do this exercise and at the end of it go, “Right, who’s the most messed up here?” No, no, team. This is a personal exercise. Secondly, however many you check on it, it doesn’t make you bad. It doesn’t make you weak. It makes you human. And thirdly, team just just watch your behavior here. Watch your behavior because it’s amazing how many times when I run this event now all of a sudden you suddenly have to go to the toilet. Coincidentally, right now when I’m asking you to maybe do a bit of a more difficult exercise to introspectively look, you got to make a quick phone call. Oh, I’m thirsty. Let me get some water. Team, I can’t make you do this exercise.
can’t make you do this exercise. All I’m going to tell you right now, team is if you do this exercise, I can promise you is that it is extremely freeing. Extremely freeing. So, you’re going to go through, listen, read every single one. Which one feels like it could be holding you back from their team? All you’re going to do is you’re going to look at the ones you put a check mark on and you’re going to pick the one that maybe has the biggest impact, the one that’s holding you back the most and you’re going to bring that limiting belief team into an exercise on the next page where we’re going to start challenging these old beliefs because look, it’s nothing more than an emotional feeling of certainty. Now the easiest way team to overcome these deep emotional feelings of certainty is very simply just to shine a light of logic on it. So with that belief team, you’re just going to ask yourself a couple of questions. Number one, where did that belief come from? Who did it come from? And how long have you believed it? team. If it come maybe came from maybe your parent or a friend, it doesn’t make them bad. It’s just a handme-down. You got it from them. Guess what? They got it from someone else as well. Then ask yourself a simple question, team. Does that limiting belief does it actually serve you? Is there a chance it might not be it might not be true? From there, ask yourself, how would your life change if right now you chose to stop believing it? Think about it. 6 months, a year from now, how would your life change if you stopped believing that limiting belief right now, team? And then lastly, what new belief can you replace the old damaging one that’s going to help you move forward in life? And you’re not going to believe it right away. It’s going to be reinforced over time, team. So, I’m actually going to give you maybe a little bit longer. I might give you eight minutes on this. I’m going to give you three minutes, team. 3 minutes to go through the list of limiting beliefs. Remember, not think what do you feel? And then five minutes to go through those four questions, team. So, eight minutes, team. Off we go.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat
up
here.
Heat up
here.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat
up
here.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
a
heat. Hey
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
and finishing up team. So, let me ask you a a a quick question. Let me know in the chat how do you feel right now by the way? Let me know in the chat how how do you feel? Because I remember the very first time I did this exercise team. It was like a weight off of my shoulders. Give me a me in the chat if it kind of felt like that. And by the way, it might have got a little bit emotional. There’s nothing wrong with that. Allow it to happen team. There’s nothing wrong with inwardly looking and saying, “Hey, you know what? Yeah, I’m not perfect. There’s things I need to change.” And generally, I just want to say a massive, massive thank you to every single one of you for doing that exercise. And also team, reminding you that you don’t have to go through this all on your own.
We are okay to get help and support. Team, give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. by the way cuz ultimately the last thing we need to do is upgrade our I ams. We need to reinforce your beliefs. Team when we’re saying things like I’m never going to be successful. I’m a failure. I’m a scared team. Remember it’s exactly what we’re going to see evidence around us. What if we upgraded your I ams? I am successful but my wildest dreams. I’m insanely confident. I’m fearless. I’m happy. And the reason why we get worried about upgrading our I ams is because we’re worried about being perceived as arrogant team. There is a fine line between arrogance and confidence. And that line is intent. If your intent is to show off, yeah, you’ll come across as arrogant. If your intent is to be confident in yourself, it will come across as confident. Give me an eight in the chat if that makes sense, by the way. Beautiful. And what I want to finish this session off team is looking at what is your purpose. What’s your purpose? Why are you here team? Cuz I know it’s not about you. Yes, you will be rewarded but it’s not about you team is it? It’s about your friends, your family, your loved one. Every single one of us in life team is being called to play a bigger game. How many of you are answering that phone? And how many of you right now are considering sending it to voicemail? Because look, if you want to have an incredible live team, you must invest in yourself. But don’t hear the word invest and only think money. You must invest team in the big four. Time, effort, energy, and money team. You have to invest time. There is no substitute for time in a business. Whether that be your time or AI running in the background team, if you do one hour a week, you will get the results of one hour a week. If you do 1 hour a month, you’ll get the results of 1 hour a month. If you do 1 hour a year, you’ll get the results of one hour a year. You have to invest time in our business team. We’ve got to invest effort into our business, energy into our business, and we’ve got to invest money, not just in ourselves. team, if you want to build a business that costs absolutely zero dollars into it, your business is this. Go and pick pennies up off the street. We’ve got to invest money in ourselves, in systems, in processes, in softwares, stuff like LinkedIn Sales Navigator, Dripify, support, mentorship, guidance, but it is the best investment you will ever make. Team relationships will come and go.
Money will come and go. But when you invest time, energy, effort, and money into yourself, it is the best investment you will ever have because it means when you invest those 14, you shorten the time frame and you get results quickly. Give me a me in the chat if you want results quickly. Yeah, team. That is why people like myself, Chris, Georgie, we invest in mentors. We have a strong community of peers for accountability. Give you an example team. Imagine if I wasn’t here speaking to you from stage right now. You weren’t at an event knowing other people were going through the same thing as you. Imagine this was just a video at home that you could watch whenever you wanted. Yes or no? Would you have done that last exercise on limiting beliefs? Yes or no? Let me know in the chat team and be honest with yourselves cuz I can tell you right now team 95% of you would have went. I’m not doing that. But why did you do it? Well, you’ve got your mentor here, your safe pair of hands making sure you’re going through it. And you’ve got an accountability of peers that you know are going through the same thing as you right now, team. And it means you get to cheat and copy, i.e. model someone who’s already done it. The easiest way to get results, team, find someone who’s got what you want, tell them to show you what they did, and go and ask them questions when you’re stuck. And it means you get to borrow someone else’s 10,000 hours team. And the reason why team, we need to understand this is because of what we call the time versus money paradox. Everyone thinks they value their time. But the reality is most people on this planet value their money more than their time. Give you a great example. I always hear this. People say I value my time. I asked them one simple question. Do you have someone that comes and cleans your house? No. Well, hold on a second here. I I thought you value your time. Yeah, but it’s going to cost me money. I just clean my house on my own. Ah, so you don’t value your time. You value your money more. And let me explain that team. Up until now, that’s fine. By the way, you clean your house on your own. Up until now, that’s fine. So, let’s say for instance, round numbers, it’s $20 an hour for someone to come to clean your house and you get them for 2 hours a week. That’s $40 a week. Now, if you clean your house on your own, you’ve saved $40. But guess what? You’ve still spent a currency. You spent two hours of your time. Now, up until this event, that’s fine. But look at the results that you could do with two hours. If you took that time that you spent cleaning your house and you put it in this business team, you could reply back to 20 people on LinkedIn and you could have two calls. You could have two conversations with people that are interested. You could sell to one of them, get $5,000 upfront, and make $6,000 in the next 12 months. But don’t worry because instead of earning $11,000, you’ve saved $40. Does that make sense, by the way, team? Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. Team, time is the only thing on this planet you cannot have more of. Money is not your most valuable asset. Time is you can earn more money. You cannot earn more time. Look, successful people use their money to buy time. Shortcuts, getting results quicker, hiring members of staff, hiring systems and processes to buy their time back. People creating mediocre results in the world trade their time for money. It’s called a job. On my deathbed, I can earn money. I can sell the shirt off my back team. I cannot buy another second. Start using your money to invest in shortcuts, to get results quicker, to hire people, to invest in systems and processes.
The biggest killer of success team,
biggest killer of success for every single one of us is very simply not investing in oursel and our business because we’re worried about money. Team, money replenishes. Money replenishes. You can always earn more money, the year it takes of struggling is gone forever.
And look, the reality is until we start taking oursel and our business seriously, team, no one else will. And again, a great quote here. If you treat it like a hobby, it will cost you like one. If you treat it like a business, it will pay you like one. And you’ve got to be serious. And team, you’ve got to be allin. And I want you to learn from my mistakes. Look, the reason why you’re here, team, is to be able to learn from my mistakes, right? I’ve made all of the mistakes. Learn from my mistakes, team. Because the old me team, I’m not I’m not ashamed to say I’ve learned from my mistakes. I was egotistical. I thought I knew better than everyone. I wanted to do it alone. Don’t know why, but there was just something in me that wanted to become a millionaire, have a million-dollar business, and say, “Nobody helped me.” Teen, that’s just ego talking. It’s pride talking. I was too proud to admit I was struggling and it was arrogance and insecurity masked as confidence and ultimately completely unfulfilled, unsuccessful, and depressed. And if I’d have carried on like that team, I wouldn’t be the person I am today. And I’m not a finished product by any stretch of the imagination. I’m still working on me. But yeah, I invest team in myself and my business in every single moment. I know I don’t know everything. I’m not a finished product. I am always getting new mentors, guidance, support in every single thing I do team. I’ve dropped the ego and dropped the pride. Since then, I’ve written three books. I’m an Amazon bestselling author, international seven international speaker, seven and multiple six-figure business owner team. And look, there’s nothing special about me. I’m a kid from High Wickham, small place in like a small city in in England in between London and Oxford. I didn’t grow up with a silver spoon in my mouth team. I grew up with sharing a room with my brother until I was 18 years old with bunk beds. Do you have any idea how much it cramps your style when you’re 18 years old, your girlfriend comes over to watch a movie in your room, and your 13-year-old brother’s playing Mario Kart on his Nintendo DS above you? Team, there’s nothing special about me. There’s something special about the system. And you’ve got to be all in. Ask yourself the question, team, if your life were a movie, what would the hero do? What would the hero of the movie do? Think about your life right now. Are you the hero of your own story? Are you even a main character of your story? Or are we a background extra? And it doesn’t matter what’s happened until now. Team, forget the past failures. They don’t define you. You should be looking back at every single mistake you’ve ever made and thanking it because it led you here today to this person right here, right now. And I get it. Maybe you don’t believe enough in yourself to invest in yourself. Team, don’t do it for them. Do it for your family. Do it for the people who need the help. And do it for your future. Cuz when you go all in, team, you inspire others around you. And this is your chance to change the cycle. And more importantly, team, this is your chance to be the role model to someone else you wish you’d had. Now, some of you, by the way, are going to want to work with us moving forward. I’m going to love you for that. Some of you aren’t going to want to work with us moving forward. I’m going to love you for that team. You’re an adult. You can make your own decision. For those of you that decide, look, I don’t need the help. I’m the exception. I can do everything on my own. Even though I’ve never achieved anything of greatness on my own, team, there’s going to be pitfalls. There’s going to be things you need to be aware of. The first things first is team. There’s no shortcuts. It’s going to take you longer. Be prepared for that. There is no accountability team. You are going to have to parent yourself and keep yourself accountable, which is the hardest thing on this planet to do cuz ultimately we don’t know what we don’t know. And we need to be aware team. It can be a lonely journey. You’re going to need to get new friends. Your friends around you aren’t going to get it. They’re not going to support you. We’re going to cover this tomorrow. But also just be very aware team of that shiny penny syndrome because look, every single one of you, you’ve got a bit of a countdown timer. When this event finishes, you’ve got a 60 to 90day countdown timer. Statistically speaking, if you don’t get results in the next 60 to 90 days, you start going, well, I’ll look, you get itchy feet, you start looking elsewhere. We’ve been through this, right? We know this is going to happen. Don’t mistake multitasking for shiny penny syndrome team. The word focus stands for follow one course until successful because ultimately sometimes we want to grow, step up to that next level, but our friends and family just don’t get it. That’s okay. You need people around you that are there to lift you up, support you, and get it cuz knowing what to do is more secure than any job or pot of cash. We know team, if you got a pot of cash, it’s impossible to become wealthy. Inflation is stealing your money. But we’ve got to get out of the biggest lie we are taught, and that is, I’m in a safe job, team. There is no such thing as a safe job. If you think you are in a safe and secure full-time job working for someone else, pull out your employment contract and look at the notice period they need to give you. In the UK, standard notice period is 30 days. Now, you’re not in a safe and secure job team. You are 30 days away from someone taking away your income from something you maybe didn’t do wrong. Don’t tell me that’s safe
team. You look at two lions. There’s a lion in a zoo. Well, they get free medical, free food, free healthcare.
But here’s the thing, team. The lion out in the Serengeti has no asurances. Everything about their life is their own responsibility.
You’ve got to be very, very careful what you wish for. Team
and I need you to be what we call a nism person. Meaning that nothing will stop me. Cuz real talk team, there are consequences. There are consequences to you doing nothing
and it’s what we call opportunity costs. After this event team, you will know how to build this business. But here’s the thing. If you don’t, it costs you money. Let’s say a month from now team on on average working with myself and Chris if you’re putting in a work team you could close a client every one to two months meaning if you have done nothing a month from now two months from now you are missing out on $500 a month and $5,000 upfront that you could have had but you chose not to by procrastinating, overthinking, letting fear control us. A year from now, team, that could be $75,000 of missed income.
What difference would that make to your life right now? By the way, team, ask yourself a question. A year from now, what difference would $75,000 additional income make? Because that’s what we’re potentially leaving on the table. Cuz team, there are consequences to not doing anything to letting this be a good idea. If not now, when? Tomorrow. Team, yesterday you said tomorrow, and tomorrow never comes.
So, what’s next, team? Look, I can’t answer that. You’ve got to answer it yourself. The only thing you need to ask is, look, are you going to slip back into your old ways? How long is it going to take? How much time, energy, effort, money will it cost you by not taking action? Ask yourself a question. When did you want to start an online business? Because there’s a difference between knowing the path and walking the path. So, how can you stay plugged in? How can you work with myself, Chris, Georgie, the entire Explosive Growth Academy team moving forward? Now, first things first, team, you already know who you are, okay? You already know who you are. I don’t have to tell you. You’ve maybe been sat here over the last day and a half. You got a bit of a feeling kind of like these guys. They’re nice. I can see how they can help me. I know I need the help and support. I’ve tried this. It’s worked. It It hasn’t worked before. I need that support. Fantastic. team, we’re going to take a little break right now, a little 10-minute leg stretch break, and we’re going to come back for our lunchtime bonus session where I’m just going to walk you through, team, what it is we do here at the Explosive Growth Academy and how myself and Chris can help you. Now, first things first, team, take a deep breath in and then out. Relax. Okay, relax. Look, I can promise you right now, team, this is going to be perfect for some of you. You’re going to want to work with us. I’m going to love you for that. It’s not going to be right for some of you. You’re not going to work for us. Work with us team. I’m going to love you for that. Regardless of the outcome, team, I am going to give you Chris, Georgie. We’re going to give you our 100% over the entire event. The only thing I ask of you team is come along to get the fact, evidence, and data. Get the information. and get the fact, evidence, and data to make an informed business decision. And the reason I say that is team, listen to our money mindset, that BS decision. Some of you have already said, “Yeah, but I can’t afford it.” You don’t know what the investment is yet, team. Just come along, get the fact, evidence, and data. If you’ve got your credit card in hand, put your credit card away, team. It’s an application process. We know it works. We need to speak to you to check it’s going to work for you as well. Now, I also want to let you know team, it’s not about hidden information. It’s about the support, the handhold, the guidance, and ensuring you’re going to be successful. And more importantly, team, myself, Chris, and Explosive Growth Academy guaranteeing your success. Give me a little me in the chat if you’re intrigued to see how we can guarantee your success. By the way, there team. Beautiful. Well, look, all I’m going to say, team, come along. Get the fact, evidence, and data. If it’s right, great. I love you. If it isn’t right, great. I love you. Come along. Find out what we can do. We’ve got multiple different levels depending on what it is you need, what your goals are. Have a conversation with the team. Make an informed business decision. So, with that in mind, team, we’re going to take a quick 10-minute leg stretch. We’re going to be back for our bonus session in 10 minutes time. I will see you then. Thank you so much, team. Heat.
Heat.
Heat up
here.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat up
here.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat. N.
Ah,
a
heat.
Ah,
heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Hey.
Hey. Hey. Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
So, welcome back everyone. Welcome back. We know the drill by now team. Go ahead, give me a number five in the chat if you are back. Give me number five in the chat. and welcome back to finding out a little bit more about what myself, Chris, and the entire Explosive Growth Academy team can do to help you grow this business. Now, before we get going, a couple things. First things first, genuinely team, a massive, massive thank you to every single one of you for being here as well. Okay, look the fact of the matter is even for some of you just being here listening to what the options are for some of you that’s a big step maybe before this event when this came up you’d have gone I’m not even listening and you’d have walked off in fact give it on me and the charity if even just being here it is quite a big step for you yeah and here’s the thing team recognize that a massive congratulations from myself Chris and the entire team and a huge huge congratulations here Now the next thing here team just take a deep breath in and out team. Ju just relax. Just relax. Okay, sit back. All we’re going to do here team is I’m just going to walk you through what options we have. Okay, you’re just here to get fact, evidence, and data. If you’ve got your credit card in hand waiting to make a payment, put it away. Okay, we’re not going to do that cheesy, well, there’s only 11 spots. The first go. Here’s the No, we’re not doing that, team. Okay, we’re not doing that. This is an application process team. Okay, we know this works. All I want you to do is just sit back, get the fact, get the evidence, get the data. You can speak to one of our team members in the business development team. Ask them any questions you have. Just sit back and relax. Give me a yes in the chat if that’s okay. Beautiful. And again, as a reminder team, look, the mentorship programs on any level. It’s not about hidden knowledge. That’s all covered. Okay? It’s about the handholding, the support, the guidance, and ensuring you’re going to be successful and also guaranteeing your success, which I will let you know how that works in just a moment. Because look, this is an application process team, okay? We know this works. Okay, we know this works. We need to check are you going to work for the system? Look, the reality is team never forget that mentorship I is a two-way investment, isn’t it? Yes, you are investing time, energy, effort, and an investment into join a level of the mentorship program financially, but never forget that we’re investing in you as well, team. We’re investing time, energy, effort, and our reputation. So, look, yes, we know this works. We need to make sure you’re going to work for the system team. We need to have a conversation with you. We need to make sure you’ve got all your questions answered. I don’t want someone being half in cuz if you’re half in, you’re also half out team. That’s why it’s an application process. Listen here. Get the fact, evidence, and data. See the different levels we have. Have a no obligation conversation with our business development team. If it’s right for you, great. I love you. If it isn’t right for you, great. I love you. You are just here to get the fact, evidence, and data. Give me a seven in the chat if that makes sense, by the way, team.
Cuz look, ultimately, look, you you’ve seen a lot a good chunk of the system being built. We’re going to round off the entire system. You’re going to leave this event. You’ve got the knowledge, but it’s still the whatifs that are there, right? What if this happens? What if this happens? What if I don’t know what to do here? And the mentorship programs about walking out of here knowing you’re going to be successful, not hoping. They remove the doubt, the worry, the fear, and they remove the whatifs when things don’t go your way. Now, few things to be aware of, team. Your money mindset is going to go crazy in this session. In fact, it not it might. It will. In fact, maybe it already is. Look, just relax. Okay, just relax into this. Have a little listen. Okay, look team, it is absolutely no obligation. By being here, by speaking to one of our team, it is no obligation. Just remind yourself all that’s happening is you’re about to step up to that next level in life. It’s okay. Cuz look, the reality is team, our brains, it doesn’t know the difference between I can’t do this and I’ve just not done this before. Cuz even maybe as we’ve been going through the event, even maybe now you’re sat going, “Yeah, but I can’t do this.” Is it that you can’t do this or or is it that you just haven’t done it before? Does that make sense? Give me a one in the chat if that makes sense. It’s a big difference. You can do this. It’s just that you haven’t done this before. And again, you’ve just got to replace the what will it cost with how much will it make me team. And all I want you to do, team, just sit, listen to all the information. You don’t need to decide anything in this session. I don’t want you to listen to the information, speak to our team, get all of the fact, all of the evidence, all of the data, make an informed business decision from there. Cuz ultimately, look, there is a massive, massive difference between a training event like this and a mentorship program. And look for me personally team I believe in every ounce of my body. I believe in mentorship programs. I have dedicated my entire business career to mentorship programs. That’s what I’m doing here right now. And the reason being is team I personally tried on my own thinking I knew better. Too proud to admit I needed help. wanting to be able to turn around and say, “I did it all on my own. No one helped me.” And I wasted nine years of my life. Nine years of trying, coming up, not knowing what to do, stopping, going back to my life, I hated, trying, stopping, trying, stopping, trying, stopping. And when I look back, team, not just at the amount of money I spent making those mistakes, but the amount of time I wasted. And the crazy thing is is team the amount of money I wasted thinking I didn’t need help thinking I knew better would have paid for my mentorship programs 10 times over and I would have saved nine years of my life. Does that make sense by the way? Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. Because for me personally, mentorship it is all about stepping up to that next level in life and creating a new sense of normal. And look, we’ve got to know each other a little bit over a day and a half. And I just want to very quickly let you know my journey from where I was to stepping up to that next level and creating my new sense of normal. And it starts by the way team the story starts with the worst day of my life. You see going back team over a decade ago I was living out in Bali. Has anyone been to Bali by the way? Give me a little B in the chat if you’ve been to Bali. Anyone been to Bali? If you haven’t, team, it’s genuinely one of the most beautiful places I’ve ever seen. Everywhere you look is a screen saver. It’s just stunning. And I didn’t go on holiday there, team. I moved my entire life. I sold all of my worldly possessions and I moved to Bali to set up a business with the time my business partner. You see, if you got a barley now team, it’s eco this, eco that. Everything is eco-friendly. If you sneeze, it better be into an eco-friendly tissue. It better have been an eco-friendly sneeze and it better go in an eco-friendly recycling bin. But back then team, that there was nothing like that. And myself, my business partner at the time, we saw a bit of a gap in the market. and we both moved our entire lives to Bali to set up an eco friendly chain of host. You see, we’d done the research. We’d spoken to hundreds, if not thousands of travelers. We’ done the market research. We said, “Hey, would you pay maybe just a couple bucks to know that it’s more eco-friendly?” It was an overwhelming yes. We wanted to move out to Bali as our very first flagship. And look, we didn’t have the money at the time, but again, I can’t afford it is never an excuse. So, we found an angel investor who loved the idea and team. We were in the final negotiations for a $30 million investment. $30 million investment. Just think about that team. Imagine that. You’re in your you’re in your mid20s, 26 years old. You are living in paradise, riding around on your motorbike all day, viewing plots of land, meeting with builders, and you’re about to be valued at 15 million with enough cash to launch globally within the first 3 to 5 years. How do you think I felt team? Absolutely on top of the world. And I still remember team I woke up one morning. morning. Do you ever have those mornings where you wake up and you you’re just filled with gratitude? You ever had those mornings, team just flooded with gratitude? I open my front door, me and my business parent at the time, we had two one bit apartments next to each other and we were kind of like off the beaten track a bit. That’s what I wanted. Bit quiet. who opened my front door and all that was seemed there was just a dirt track that led down to the main road as a drop down and there were just these rolling rice patty fields right in front of our apartment. I looked out the window, the sun was just creeping over the top, kissing off the water, the sky was on fire and I just went, “How is this my life?” You know what? I’m going to make a morning coffee. Make it for my business partner. We’re going to have this moment together. So, I made two coffees, went down, put the coffees down, just knocked on his door. And on the last knock, the door just went just ever so slightly. I was like, it’s a bit weird. Normally locks his door. So, I just pushed the door open, looked inside, and I was like, where’s this stuff? I was like, “Ah, of course.” Look, team, when you’re out there, if you’ve never done this, you’ve got to go on visa runs. You know, you can only stay x amount of days in Bali. You go up to Singapore for the day. It’ll be about later. I thought nothing of it, team. I went about my daily life. I went down to the beach. I was in Changangu near Semeniac. I went down, met up with some friends, had some breakfast on the beach, and a couple hours later, I went to an ATM to pull out some cash.
And that’s when I realized to him what had happened. You see, my business partner at the time had been watching me go to an ATM, had been watching me use my online banking over the last few days. overnight had snuck into my apartment, taken all of my cards, drained every single one of my bank accounts, and had put the cards back. So, it took longer for me to realize.
And I could still remember standing at that ATM. If I shut my eyes, I can literally still remember standing at that ATM, putting the card in, typing in my PIN, just seeing negative. Next card, negative balance, next card, negative balance. And I was like, there’s something wrong. There must be a mistake. And it’s almost like I just tuned the entire world out. And that only got broken by the sound of a motorbike skidding and stopping and I kind of jolted out of it. And it was one of my local friends. You see, wherever I am, team, I don’t go out to Bali to hang out with English people. I want to make friends with the locals. And it was one of my local Balines friends. And he said, “Sam, what are you doing?” I was like, “There’s I think there’s an issue with like the ATM. It’s like a negative I think about to call my bank and it’s like like a fraud thing.” He went, “No, Sam, what are you doing? I went the my my back what what do you mean? He went you don’t know do you? And you see it was at that moment there team that he decided to fill me in on the rest of the story that I hadn’t quite found out yet. You see, my business partner at the time had borrowed money from the Balines mafia and rather than paying them back, had been seen at the airport that morning jumping on a plane to who knows where. You see, the funny thing to him about the Balines Mafrey is they don’t care who pays them. They pay they care they get paid. And I just spent the entire six weeks before that telling the entire island I was his business partner. And the debt got passed to me. And he turned around to me and he said, “Go to the airport now. You are not safe.” And see, I have never felt fear like that in my life. I rushed home. I drove my motorbike. I packed up everything I could. I went to Deasar Airport. I sat in the corner. I literally called my mom in floods of tears saying, “Just please just get me home. I need to leave today.”
My flight wasn’t for I think like 14 or 15 hours. I hid in the corner, literally not a single penny to my name. Thank God they had a water fountain, just terrified someone might see me. And I remember sitting on that plane not feeling safe until the wheels finally took off. But the funny thing was it was a bit of a mixed feeling cuz I felt safe. But it also felt like every single shred of pride, dignity, and selfrespect stayed back there. And I came home absolutely broken. I told my entire friends and family I was going to reshape the world
and I came home and I had to do what we’d all do in that situation, right? I had to go and get a job. See, here’s the funny thing, team. I’m not qualified for anything. I have no qualifications. I have no trade skills. See, the only job I could get was a minimum wage job. And I can still remember every single Sunday evening getting that feeling in my stomach. Do you know that feeling I’m on about, team? Give me a little me in the chat if you know that feeling I’m on about. It’s just like a a twisting knot in my stomach every Sunday knowing I’m about to go and spend 5 days, 40, 50, 60 hours a week for what? to to just maybe get by. And the funny thing was team in that moment there I I was telling myself a story and I was telling myself a story that I deserved that I deserved to be miserable. I didn’t deserve happiness.
And maybe you’re telling yourself a story at the moment as well.
And the amazing thing team about stories is they can be rewritten.
And it was only when I decided to take myself and my business seriously cuz look, I knew I was worth more on this planet. I knew I had a bigger purpose to play on this planet. And I think you do too, which is why you’re here. In fact, give me a mi in the chat if you know you are here for a bigger reason than maybe you’re playing in the world at the moment.
So, I look back at all of my failings over the previous nine years, the amount of money I’d spent, and I realized, team, there was a common denominator. It was finally time for me to take myself and my business seriously. So, I did the one thing I’d never done. I invested in a mentor. I got the help and the support that I desperately had needed. And I stopped looking at asking for help as a sign of weakness and started looking at it as a sign of strength. And thank God I did
because if I hadn’t have done that, I never would have become the person I am today. the person that I absolutely love, the person I look in the mirror and I love to see back and team. It is no coincidence after nine years of struggling within 30 days I replaced my income. Within six months, I made my first $100,000 and within two years I’d made my first million dollars online. From there, I’ve gone on to become a three time three-time author. My last book was an Amazon best-selling author, international speaker, seven of multiple six-figure business owner. And team, I’m not telling this to impress you. Like I said, team, I’m a kid from High Wickham. I didn’t grow up with a silver spoon in my my mouth. I have no qualifications. There is nothing special about me. I’m not telling this to impress you, team. I’m telling this to impress upon you. If I can do it, every single one of you can do it, too. I can promise you one thing right now, team. You are already good enough. You just need the help, the guidance and the support. Because ultimately team, I invest myself, Chris, we invest in everything we do. We have spent over $300,000 just on mentorship programs combined. And the insane thing about this is team, you now get to use AI to ensure you get the results in a tenth of the time and a tenth of the investment. It’s not about learning these skills. Team, we spent $300,000 learning these skills. Learning slows you down. Now, it’s not about learning new skills. It’s about sharpening that axe. It’s about making sure when things aren’t going your way, you have someone to talk to. It’s about knowing what your next moves are. AI does the heavy lifting for us. The only thing you need that separates where you are now from where you want to be is the help, the support, and the guidance. Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. By the way, team also thank you for the wonderful comments in the chat. I can see a couple coming in here. Genuinely really appreciate it.
Cuz look, ultimately team, you know who you are. Okay, you know who you are. All I’m going to do is I’m just going to go through the details because look, the reality is 90% of the work it’s already done for you. We’ve laid out the system. You just have to follow it. There’s no guesswork here. You just have to follow it. And all of this is tailored to you. It cannot be a one-sizefits-all. Your own personal AI coach. And ultimately, we only teach what we’ve done and what we know works. Meaning you don’t have to worry about any changes. Sam, what if AI changes in 3 months? Yeah, that’s our job. That’s what you’re investing into. You don’t need to worry about that anymore, team. My job, Chris’s job, Georgie’s job is to find out the new system, spend our money, time, energy, and effort updating it, checking it works. We just feed it back to you. Meaning in the ever ever everchanging team world of AI, you are never left behind. That is my job. Give me a yes in the chat if you love the fact that you’re never left behind. By the way, we also don’t let you off the hook, team. That accountability is so so important. Every single coach that you will ever speak to has been through that same process cuz ultimately team, we give you everything you possibly need. If you need something, we don’t have it. Let me know. I’ll create it. That’s my job. And it means you get to walk out of here knowing you’re going to be safe. It is team. The handhold, the support, the guidance to ensure you get the results you want removes the guesswork. It’s gone. And you have the luxury of replacing the word if I’m successful with when I am successful. Now, I want to make this a no-brainer team for you. I want to make it a no-brainer. Who here, by the way, likes 100% risk-f free? Give me a me in the chat. Who likes 100% riskfree?
Cuz here’s the thing, team. We don’t offer a money back guarantee. Do you know why? A money back guarantee presupposes this isn’t going to work. We know this is going to work as long as you do the work. We go one step better, team. We give you a success guarantee. the Explosive Growth Academy success guarantee on any level team on any level. If at the end of your mentorship time, if you haven’t a made your investment back or B signed the clients that will make your investment back for you, you stay on for free with additional support until you do. No one leaves our mentorship program without making a profit team. It is a guarantee of the success. You haven’t got your investment back. Great. How do we help? How do we support? No, it’s free of charge. What can we do to help you? Which means for every single one of you team, you will be successful and make a profit. That’s it. Full stop. Give me a wow in the chat. By the way, if that’s blown you away the fact that we are so confident team, look, if we you step up and put some skin in the game, we will step up and we will put skin in the game. We will say, “Look, you you’ll be profit. You will make a profit. If you don’t, we will back ourselves. We will make sure you do.”
Amazing. So, how can we help guarantee your success? Look, we’ve got multiple different levels of mentorship programs and support. Remember, all of these come with a success guarantee and you don’t need to know which level is right for you. At the moment, all I’m going to do is I’m just going to go through the details. Team, I’m just going to go through the levels, let you know what they are, let you know when and why you should join them and for what purpose, and I’m just going to let you know, team, if you’re not sure which level to join, fantastic. When you speak to our team, have a conversation with them. have a conversation with them. Now, first and foremost, want to make something clear. Remember, team, we are not your friends. We are your best friends. Okay? If let’s say for instance, you say, “Well, I’d like to go for this level, but the way you’re talking, your goals, you actually should be on this level.” We’ll let you know. We’ll say, “Well, actually, based on what you’re telling us, you should be going for this level. You don’t have to take that level. Our job is to advise you team.” And vice versa. If you are going to say I want to go for this level here team, if that is going to put you under unnecessary financial strain and burden, if it’s going to mean that you might not be able to put food on your table for your family, we will say no. Come on this level here. Yes, we are a business. First and foremost, we have a duty of care to every single one of you team. Give me a five in the chat if that makes sense. By the way, team, beautiful. Now, just sit back, have a listen. Do not worry about trying to scribble down what’s included in each level or take a quick take a quick photo. There is going to be a mentorship brochure that you can download at the end of this session team which is going to recap every single level for you. Just sit back and listen team. So all of them with the success guarantee. Our first level of mentorship team is the AI agency blueprint. Now all three levels are a full calendar month, a full calendar year. Sorry. They are all 12 months. We have intakes starting at every single month. And we do limit them team. We do limit them. We do not want 400 people starting next month. We cannot deal with 400 people. The level of support you need, it it doesn’t work. that every single level, whether it’s the AI agency blueprint, the AI agency accelerator or the AI agency partnership is a full 12 months working very closely with myself, Chris, Georgie, and the entire team. Give me a 12 in the chat if that makes sense. By the way,
beautiful. So, our AI agency blueprint, who is this 40? Well, look, for those of you that are very confident that you can build this business, you just feel you need a bit of guidance along the way as and when you need it, not necessarily the touch points. You know, I think I’ve got it. You know, I might be touching base with a random question here, a random question there. For those of you that feel that you’ve pretty much got it, but you need that safety blanket, that fall back to be able to make sure that we can get your questions answered as and when you need them to be able to run your AI social media agency to literally post on every single social media for these clients and have it fully online without that human touch point. Just the ability to be able to ask questions and get that answer back for you. Team, the AI agency blueprint is perfect for you. It is fully online accessible 24/7 365 when you need it. It is the full curriculum access. Every single element that we have gone into is broken down across all seven modules. All of the templates, every single thing that you need in there, every element painstakingly laid out for you in excruciating detail. team to be able to make sure that you can set this up, get it running as quickly as possible. Remember team, look, we want you to get up and moving as quickly as you can. And the way that this works fully online, team, is you get access to our 24/7 mentorship Q&A bot. We have created the explosive growth academy mentorship Q&A bot team. I have downloaded my brain. I have downloaded Georgie’s brain. I have downloaded Chris’s brain. Every single thing that we have here, all of the knowledge in our heads is in this mentorship Q&A bot. You have 247 access to it. Any time of date, you go on there in your members area, you type a question, and it is like myself, Chris or Georgie personally answering it for you. T give me a nine in the chat if that is amazing. By the way, it is quite literally like dropping me a WhatsApp message and me personally responding. The only difference is I’m asleep at 3:00 in the morning. And it gives you access to get any questions you have answered when you need them answered to. Remember, you’ve got access to that LinkedIn objection handler, all of the go highle audit funnel. All of that is there in there for you. recordings of every single training session, the niche compliance training and the monthly maintenance habit training. Making sure team that we are keeping you on track. Making sure that you are where you are now to where you want to be. We are following that blueprint and it is exactly that team. It is the blueprint. Right? I’ve got this. I’m 95% confident I can do this. The other 5% are I just need a check-in every now and then, but what I don’t want to do is go to Google or go to AI and get the wrong answer. I need Sam, you, Chris, or Georgie to answer it using that AI mentorship bot. And that team is our AI agency blueprint. It is quite literally there helping and supporting you any time you need it. Give me a five in the chat if that makes sense. By the way, team with the AI agency blueprint. Beautiful. Now, our next level here, team, which normally tends to be our most popular level to, you know, just to put it out there, this is normally our most popular level, is the AI agency accelerator. Now, not only do you get every single thing in that blueprint, this is for someone who maybe knows they need a little bit more hands-on support, a little bit more guidance. More importantly, you know, you feel that the AI bot is amazing. I can go and ask any question there, but I need to speak to a human. Maybe you want to flesh out some ideas. Have a proper conversation with someone. This is what the month uh sorry, what the weekly live group coaching calls with Georgie is. Every single week you jump on a group call, you can ask Georgie, our head coach, AI expert. You’re going to meet her tomorrow. She is amazing. She’s who I go to when I have an AI question. By the way, team, best in the world. She literally gets invited to events globally as a worldleading expert on AI. You’ve got the opportunity to speak to Georgie every single week. Once a week, you have that group coaching call, that check-in. Any questions you have, you say, “Geie, here’s where I am right now. Here’s where I want to be. Here’s the problem I’ve got.” Great. Share your screen. Let Georgie break it down. any issues you have, we are here to help and support every single week. Give me a W in the chat. If you love the idea of the ability to jump on a Zoom call and quite literally speak to one of the world’s leading experts in AI to be able to maybe kind of flesh out a little bit more of a complex idea and look, if you’ve got a question two days later, you go straight to the mentorship Q&A bot. Absolutely invaluable team. Invaluable every single week. Now, for those of you that can’t make those calls for any reason, they are always recorded. We upload those recordings into your membership site. So, if for any reason you cannot make a call, we are never going to punish you and turn around and go, “Well, you missed a call.” Send your question in advance. Georgie will answer it live on that call. you go and re-watch that recording that is automatically uploaded into your members area as and when you need it. Give me a number two in the chat if that makes sense. No one is going to be punished. Beautiful. Now, on top of that, you also get the AI sales coach. This is an AI bot that myself and Chris have personally trained there to be able to answer any questions on those conversations that make you money. If someone asks you an objection live on the call, you could type it in, enter it, and you could have it there ready to go. It is literally a tool like having myself or Chris sat next to you while you have these sales conversations. And imagine literally just typing in a question and I type an answer really quickly and I give you the perfect response team that is there ready for you to use. You have unlimited access to it 24/7 365. You can use it on your live calls. You can use it as practice. You can use it as a role play as feedback. You can upload a transcript of one of your calls into it and say, “Analyze my call. Tell me what I did wrong. How do I improve this moving forward?” Give me a seven in the chat. By the way, if you can see the power in literally almost having myself and Chris sat next to you, but having us available 24/7 in that AI bot team.
Beautiful. Now, not only that, for those of you that maybe don’t even want to ever make a sales call, you don’t have to. On the AI agency accelerator level team, you unlock the ability to use our inhouse trained sales team. We have a sales team that we are constantly growing a business development team. We are constantly growing team. You have access to use our sales team. They work off a commissiononly basis. A commissiononly basis. they you only pay them once you have been paid. Takes all of the risk away from you. Not only that team, it also gives you the peace of mind knowing that you never have to be the one to make these phone calls. Someone else can do it on your behalf. They know the business. They know how to sell this to other businesses. They will give you live updates, live tracking, and you only pay them when you have got paid. some of the world’s top sales teams available at your fingertips and you unlock the ability to literally use our in-house trained sales team. Meaning you never have to make a sales call if you’re in your life if you don’t want to in team. You can start that from call number one. Give me a one in the chat. Who’s going I’m using that from call number one by the way. Yeah, probably quite a few of you, right? And then again team, this third key differentiator is our ability to help you to have more things to sell to your clients on the agency blueprint. Great. We’re going to run the social media for them. Every single day is going to be posted on every single social media. When we move into the accelerator team, this is when we start being ability to sell packages. Well, we can run your social media for you, but you know what? We could also build your website for you. We can create lead magnets for you. We can run blog posts for you, a daily blog post so you start to rank within chat GPT and Claude and all of the other AIs for local suggestions. Do you know people do that, right? They go on to chat GPT. Um, I need to find a plumber near me. Enter team, you can help the client rank there. How they can also have a podcast having never recorded a podcast in their life. and also how they can start having a video presence with YouTube shorts. Ultimately team, it’s adding more tools into your tool belt so you can start to charge more for these clients, maybe more upfront, maybe a higher retainer. And the reason why we introduce this at the accelerator level is because that is when Georgie becomes absolutely essential team. The AI sales coach becomes absolutely essential or the done for you sales support becomes absolutely essential team. And that is the biggest differentiator between the blueprint and the AI agency accelerator. Give me an A in the chat if we know exactly what is clu included in the AI agency accelerator team.
Beautiful. Now our last level we have here team is our AI agency partnership. Our AI agency partnership. Let me go ahead and move myself uh in fact let me put myself over there. There we go. Let me move myself out the way so I’m not in your way here. So team, look, not only do you get every single element within the AI agency accelerator, but look, the reason why this is so powerful, team, it’s because the AI agency partnership is the ability to quite literally become business partners with us here at the Explosive Growth Academy. Give me a me in the chat below. Who would love to be my business partner? Give me a little me in the chat. Who would love to be my business partner? I hope we’re going to get a couple of us. It’ be really awkward otherwise, right? Now look, who is the AI agency partnership for team? If you’ve maybe got cash sitting around, you’ve had a realization leaving it in a savings account for a rainy day is the worst thing I can do. Rather than wanting to maybe just park your money into property and real estate that’s going to take up your time, you’re going to get phone calls from uh tenants saying, “Oh, that I need a light bulb changed.” tying up your money, knowing you’re only going to get a couple of hundred dollars a month coming in if the boiler breaks while your year’s cash flow is wiped out, leaving it tied up, hoping it’s going to grow. This is for people that go, “Hey, do you know what? I want to park it in a business. I want to put my money, I want to invest my money into a business, not leave it in something that might get knocked down by a freaking hurricane.” And the reason why this is so powerful team is because the AI agency partnership team, we are becoming business partners. We sell out the business together. We go 5050 split on all of the costs. We build everything. Our team builds all of this for you inhouse. We build your outreach system. We build your responses. We build the sales team to take these calls. We build your onboarding processes and we manage the clients for you.
What do you do? You invest into this business. You invest into our expertise. We run it from your LinkedIn, from your Dripify account. We split the profit 5050. Why would we do this? S. Well, why not do it yourself, Sam, Chris? Keep 100% team. We are limited. We are limited ourselves with the number of people we can reach out to. My LinkedIn can only go out to so many people. Chris’s LinkedIn can only go out to so many people. We’re limited to the businesses that we can speak to. Now, I know what you’re thinking. Address the elephant room. Why don’t you just hire members of staff to do this? Team, first things first. Money is not my most valuable asset. Time is. team. If I want to have 50 business partners, that’s very easy to do. You might be sat on this event right now. If I want to hire 50 members of staff team, that’s 500 interviews. That’s also hiring 50 members of staff, I’m probably firing 20 of them within the first two months cuz they’re not a right fit. Then there’s more interviews. But also team, who’s going to have more skin in the game knowing that we can run this and you have invested your money, your time, your energy, your effort into this to become business partners with us or or an employee who who’s maybe just there to collect a paycheck every single day.
This is the ultimate way team that we can earn money together and more importantly after this event team I know I can trust you and you know you can trust me does that make sense by the way team give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense we set up on all of your outreach we use our in-house team and we earn money together and not only that team you have direct direct access to myself and Chris. You got a question, reach out to us. You have direct access to us, unrestricted, unlimited. And also team, the quarterly performance review with myself and Chris where we will dive through, see every single aspect of this, analyze it and ensure that you know exactly what is going on in your business. Go ahead, by the way, and give me a me in the chat if we know exactly what is included in the AI agency partnership. Those that want to quite literally become business partners with myself and Chris, use our in-house team that we have built for everything and just to grow a business that doesn’t take your time and finally be a true business owner. Beautiful. whichever level’s right for you. I don’t know. Maybe one of them is calling out to you right now. But what is the investment team? I hear what’s the investment team. If you were to phone up our office, phone up our office next week and say, “Right, what is the investment?” The AI agency blueprint is $24997. The AI accelerator is $3997 and the AI partners agency partnership is $199,997. Why? because you are buying into our team. You are buying into our expertise. Now, first things first, team listen to your money mindset. How many of you just said, “I can’t afford that team.” You’ve taken yourself out the game before you’ve even spoken to our team. You’ve taken yourself out the game before you’ve even spoken to our team. The question isn’t I can’t afford it team. The question is, how can I afford not to do this team on the AI agency blueprint? Two and a half clients. Two and a half clients. Let’s round up and call it three. Three clients. If you get three clients in the next 12 months, you have made profit back team. Yes or no? Can you find three businesses with everything that we’ve gone through so far? Can you find three businesses out of the 100 million on the planet to work with? Yes or no? Five on the agency accelerator team. That’s not even one every two months. Speaking to Georgie every single week with absolutely everything you need team. You need to get one every 2.1 months and you will make your money back. And when it comes to the AI agency partnership team, how long would it take you to grow that business or you just step into a business that you know already works? Cuz here’s the thing team. Even at 24997 3997 and $1997 team, that is an absolute nobrainer. It’s an absolute no-brainer. You’re not walking out of here team with an idea. You are not walking out of here having to build a product, set up a membership area team. You are walking out of here building a business that is going to pay you for the rest of your life. And this isn’t like a property or a real estate deal that might go up in value, down in value. What happens if the market crashes? You didn’t do anything wrong. It is the greatest investment you will ever make. investing into you and investing into a business that is going to pay you forever. Does that make sense? By the way, team, give me a two in the chat if that makes sense. Now, here’s the thing, team. Of course,
of course, we have something very special for you today.
Of course, we do. But the reality is, team, the event offer is exactly that. It’s for the event team. If I give you 6 months to make a decision, guess how long it takes you to make a decision? It takes you 5 months, 30 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 57 seconds. We’ve got to remind ourselves, team, there are consequences to not taking action.
So, I’m going to give you a a bit of a nudge to make a decision on this event team because it isn’t going to be $24.99, $39.99 or $1997
to join us over this event team. There is a significant discount, an absolute nobrainer of a discount team. You can join us on the AI agency blueprint or the accelerator or the partnership on six monthly installments of 1 1997 on the blueprint to 997 on the accelerator or 1999 accelerate 997 on the agency partnership team. All of which coming with a success guarantee. Now, if you are able to clear your balance, if you are able to clear your balance, there is an even more of a significant discount team. The AI agency blueprint for every single element that you see on screen right now is just $9997.
The accelerator is $14.99. A weekly call with Georgie, our expert AI coach team. If you wanted a weekly call with Georgie and you reach out to her, it would be more than that a year. the done for you sales team with access to them, the sales coach and the ability to start selling packages and then the AI agency partnership a huge 50% discount just $99,997
and team every single level whether the blueprint the accelerator or the partnership coming with a success guarantee. There is a reason why by the way team when we have presented this num every single time we have presented this team there’s a reason why 71% of people in this room right now statistically there’s a reason why 71% of you will take this with both hands and say this is the nobrainer of the century even in countries where the economy isn’t that good. Why? Because every single level comes with a success guarantee team. It is a no-brainer. You will make profit. That is that. Now, as you can see, team, the application link has been posted in the chat. All you’ve got to do, go ahead, put in an application, speak to the business development team. If you think you can’t afford it, put an application in. And one thing I can promise you right now team, regardless of what level you join us on, whenever you need help, we will be there. You just have to ask. Now, for those of you, by the way, for those of you with an existing business partner or relationship partner, bring myself back down here. There we go. For those of you with an existing business partnership or an existing relationship partner, if you want them involved, team, the second person can join at 50% off as well. All you need to do speak to the team about that on there. And look, team, every single level, every single level is 12 months. If you pay in full, if you are able to clear your balance on this event, not only do you get a significant discount, but every single level of mentorship runs for an additional 6 months, meaning it is 18 months, team. 18 months. And ask yourself, team, look, if all this did was help you quit your job and go full-time into your business, would it be worth it? If all it did was help you lift the weight off your financial shoulders, team, would it be worth it? And if all it did was finally let you live life on your terms, would it be worth it? Cuz remember team, there is a success guarantee on every single level. Will you slip back in ways? I don’t know. Only you can answer that team. And like I said, if you step up and get some skin in the game team, we will match you and give you skin in the game because you have a success guarantee. Just one client and your investment on the on the blueprint levels covered. Two clients in the next 12 or 18 months and the accelerator is covered and just 20 clients and your partnership is covered. Cuz look, if you’re sat thinking right now, team, I can’t afford it. Listen to your money mindset. We have options available to help. If we feel you’re right for you, team, put in an application. We will always find a way to help you. But you’ve got to put in an application to see what it is we can do. Cuz ultimately, team,
the blueprint, the accelerator, or the partnership team, broken down, it’s only $32.88 a day, $49.32 a day, and 328.77 a day. team. $49.32. What do we spend $49 on at the moment? What is that? A a large pizza from Domino’s, couple chicken sides, two coffees throughout the day. Team or you invest it into yourself and a business and the guidance that you finally need to live life on your terms.
So, next steps, like I said, team, it’s an application. It’s an application. I can see that a lot of you have already clicked on the application link. We’re getting notifications saying you’re currently filling them in. Go ahead, team. Click that application link in the chat right now. Should take you about five, maybe 10 minutes to fill out. Don’t try and make this perfect team. It’s a jumping off point. Now, full disclosure, team, not everyone will be accepted. Okay? Firstly, we cannot take every single member of every every single person on it. We just don’t have the numbers. But also team, if we don’t feel this is a fit for you, we will let you know. We are the first to tell you if this is not right for you. Why? It’s our reputation on the line team. Please don’t take it personally. I promise you, we will always explain reasons why if we don’t accept you into it. And again, you can download that brochure. We will post that brochure at the end of it. Any questions you have team ask the business development they are there to help. Now team the applications by the way start now. As soon as that first application comes in our team will start giving you a call. Do not worry you will not miss anything though. You will not miss anything. You are going to get a full recording of this session. You’re going to get a full recording. It is going to be part of there. You are not going to miss anything. Do not miss that phone call team. If your phone rings, make sure you answer it. Okay? Make sure you answer it. Our team are there to answer any questions you have. Now, on this, if your phone rings and it’s from a different country, don’t worry, it is us, okay? We have people all over the world, team. We are a global business. We are a global opportunity. Make sure you answer that call. So bit of a recap here team. Existing business partner or relationship partner. The second person joins at a 50% discount. If you are able to pay in full on this event is not just 12 months. It is 18 months with a significant discount. You have a success guarantee on every single level. And again team if you’re not sure whether to apply maybe you think you can’t afford it team put an application in. The conversations are no obligation. The only obligation you are giving yourself is to have a polite conversation with someone who’s very friendly, who’s there to help and support you. Whether you join, I love you. If you don’t join, I love you. But until you put an application in, you don’t have the fact, evidence, or data. Look team, if you put an application, worst case scenario is you walk away. It’s not right for you. You treated this like a business. and our business development team can give you clear clarity on what your next steps are. Best case is you get the support you finally need and you walk out this event with a guarantee. You have nothing to lose. If it’s right for you, great. If it isn’t, great. At least we will know. So, team, go ahead, get those applications in. Let me move myself across to the side here. Get those applications in. If you’re not sure what level you should go for, don’t worry about it. Speak to the team. The application link is in the chat. Go ahead, click on that team. Get your applications in. Keep your phone next to you. Do not miss that call team. They’re going to go through in the order they come in. If you missed the call, they’re going to skip through it. But also, team, do not worry. We are checking your time zone. We will not be calling you at 2:00 in the morning. We will make sure we call you at an appropriate time for yourself. Go ahead, team, get those applications in. You can click on the link in the chat. You can also now go ahead and download that mentorship brochure. And look, before we go on a quick little 10-minute leg stretch and come back for our final session, genuinely team, look, from the bottom of my heart, I just want to say a massive, massive thank you to every single one of you for being here and listening to this, okay? It it genuinely is uh a very humbling and almost a bit a little bit of an emotional experience when people even want to hear how I can help them even hear how I can be their mentor. You’ve seen the journey I’ve been through and just from my side team on a personal level I just want to say a massive massive thank you for being here. So every single one of you team click the link get your application in have a conversation. If it’s right, great. If it isn’t, great. We’re going to take a 10 minute break now. Get that application. You can download the brochure in there as well. Massive, massive thank you team. Have a 10 minute leg stretch. And we’re going to come back for an amazing session next. A massive, massive thank you team. Get that application in. Good luck when you speak to our business development team. And I’m looking forward to seeing you on either the blueprint, the accelerator, or the partnership team. 10 minute leg stretch. See you very soon. Thank you so much.
Yeah.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat up here.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat
up here.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
So, welcome back team. Welcome back. A huge, huge welcome back. Come on, look. We know the drill by now team. Go ahead, locate that chat box. Give me a number five in the chat. Who is back? Give me a number five in the chat. Who is back? And look before we do dive into our next session genuinely team look I just want to say uh a massive massive thank you but also congratulations because look the reality is regardless of the outcome regardless whether you join us on the mentorship or you don’t the fact of the matter is team you came along you got the fact the evidence and the data that alone in fact just give me a little me in the chat by the way if even just being there for that session was like a big step for you. Give me a little me in the track if that was kind of a big step. Yeah, maybe before this event immediately you would have let the BS in your head talk you out of it before you even know anything about it. So, even the fact you were there and listening and putting in an application, I just want to say a massive massive congratulations to every single one of you and also a huge congratulations to the massive amount of number of you that have put those applications in. member team, every single one of you should be put in an application. Whether you think you can, you can’t, whatever the reason, it is just a conversation. But well done for those of you that were very quick on those fingers and have already got those applications in, keep an eye out. Our team will be reaching out to you very, very soon. They’re going to be going through the order that they came in. So, if you don’t get your we don’t contact you straight away, don’t worry. We’re going to be working through them, team. And good luck on that call. Now look, regardless of what happened just then in that last session, regardless what you feel about the mentorship, all I’m going to ask you to do is to just park that for the moment. Okay? Park that for the moment. You can speak that with our team on that call today in this session. Let’s build. Let’s go ahead and build because what we are dealing with in this session here team is what we call our autoresponder. We’re using go high level, our audit funnel. The thing that does 90% of the selling for us are calendars and responses. And ultimately team, this is how we start to automate your business outreach. Remember, look, you’re only working 3 to 5 hours a week in your business. That doesn’t mean the business is only working 3 to 5 hours. That’s just your time. And this is where we start to get processes and automation in place. Basically, look, just imagine, by the way, team, imagine every single time someone was interested in the audit funnel, you had to ask for their name, ask for their email address. You then had to go and register that somewhere. Then and only then, you could manually send out the audit to them. From there, you then have to manually email, log on. Hi Sam, please, as a reminder, your audit is here. Go ahead and click on it. send. Then what you had to do is you then had to message them and email them like half hour later being like, “Hi, you saw the audit. Would you like to book in a call?” They go, “Yeah, I’m interested.” Then you go, “Okay, when are you free?” They say, “Well, I’m free Thursday.” You go, “Well, I can’t make Thursday. What about Friday?” And you’re going back and forth, back and forth trying to get a call booked in team. That’s a nightmare. And the crazy thing is that’s what it used to be like. You used to have to run it like that. This is where we start to build in automations team. So all of that we just spoke about works behind the scenes 247 365. We build it once it works forever. Give me a little me in the chat by the way. If they build it once it works forever. Sounds absolutely amazing. Beautiful. Because look, ultimately the team, there’s five stages to this, okay? Five stages to this. And this is what’s happening in their head at each one. The moment they become what’s called a new lead, they say, “Do you know what? I’m interested.” They put their name, their email address, maybe even just on that first initial LinkedIn conversation, they’re going to ask, “Who is this? Why are they messaging me?” Because at that point there, team, you are a perfect stranger. From there, it’s a case of, “Well, we’ve delivered the audit. You’ve gone through the audit. Well, wow. I’ve seen exactly where all of my income is missed inside their head. Now, it’s like, oh, huh. This is actually about my business. This is not a generic one. This is actually about my roofing company in Austin, Texas. Huh? It’s specific to me. And we start to build on that curiosity from their team. Step number three is them get that call booked in either with yourself or maybe with like a commissiononly salesperson from their side. Now this is a part part where they’re starting to say look this person clearly looked at my stuff meaning look they have enough to want to be able to talk to you there is enough trust there now from them sending the proposal they’re thinking okay what’s it actually going to cost me the moment they’re saying to themselves team what’s it actually going to cost me this is when they are seriously considering coming to join you and again don’t worry team in our next session we’re going through everything and how we start to bring these people in with the conversations that earn you money and then from their team it’s very simple. Is the client won, is the client lost? It’s either yes Sam, let’s do this or it’s a clean, respectful note. And the reason why it’s a clean, respectful no team is because this entire process is a business. It’s a business. Regardless whether this is your very first time or you’ve signed a 100 clients team, it is all about how you treat people. how they are treated is exactly what they think of you. And by treating this like a business team, it works straight away. And ultimately team, everything we’ve built out here, it’s one template. One template, you can customize it per niche. And we have three automatic touch points. Meaning the moment someone fills in their details and says, “I want the audit.” There’s the audit straight away. It’s not. And I’m going to share this with you so you can see it all in a moment. I’m going to share my screen, walk through all of this here, team. But it’s not, oh, you sent me the order. Okay, cool. What is that in 20 minutes, 30 minutes? Are you going to send it tomorrow? No, it is immediately there, team. From there, 24 hours later, without us needing to do anything. We build it once it works forever. They are going to get an email from you saying, “Hey Sam, did you get a chance to look at your audit? If not, here’s the link again for you.” Remember, this is personalized to you. Remember team, don’t just assume. If someone says, “Yes, I’m interested in the audit,” you send them the link. Don’t assume they’re immediately going to click. Team, people are busy. People are busy. We have the best of intentions, but you know what? Something gets in the way. Maybe they clicked on it. They filled in their name, their email address, they went through to the next page, they’re about to fill in the audit, and their phone rang. It’s an important call. Those of you with kids know this. I’ve got a got a young daughter. You turn around and go younger. Oh, what are they doing? What are they doing? Oh, maybe they got busy. We’ve got to just remind them, hey, by the way, you you wanted this free audit personalized to your business yesterday. Are you still interest? Oh, yeah. That’s what I was thinking of earlier. We’ve got to give them that reminder team. And then 5 days later, hey, just wanted to check in. Low pressure. Is this still something you’re interested in? And if they don’t reply, they don’t open it, we don’t chase them after that. We don’t want to harass them. But again, it’s about giving them enough checkpoints in there, enough touch points in there that we are mattering and bringing ourselves to the forefront of their brain, but not too many touch points. It becomes disrespectful team. Does that make sense? Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. Beautiful. And ultimately, and we’re going to dive into this in a moment, team. When we are getting people booked on a call, okay, look, the one thing, and we’re going to cover this in the next session, don’t worry team. But the one thing that scares people the most out of this entire business is very simply this. You ready? Bringing.
Please don’t answer. Please don’t answer. Bringing Oh god. What if they answer? What if they answer? We freak out, don’t we? Team, look, the system. By the way, give me a little yes in the chat if that sounds pretty familiar. By the way, the the idea of picking up a phone and speaking to someone scares the living hell out of you. Well, it shouldn’t team because the way this system is built for you, it’s beginner friendly. You’re not picking up the phone and trying to cold call businesses. This business owner said, “Yes, I want an audit.” They filled in the details. the audit did most of the selling for them. We’re going to dive into the audit funnel just as a refresher in a moment. From there, it’s okay. Yeah, I’ll book in a call. We don’t just say book in a call. We ask four very simple questions. Why is that team? Well, we want them starting to think about the answers, about what their problem is. Cuz remember, we don’t earn money, we earn money as a byproduct. We find their problem. We offer them a solution. We earn money as a byproduct. We want them thinking about it before their call. So when they go in booking their call, first things first, what is your name? What’s your LinkedIn? We need to know who they are team. We need to reconfirm who they are. The second one, team, are you the decision maker? Are you the decision maker? You’d be surprised how many times people say no or there’s two of us. Great. Bring them on here. There’s nothing worse than spending 30 minutes on a call with someone. They say, “I’m in.” And you go, “Wow, I’m so excited. I just need to check with my partner first. It’s actually their decision.” And you’re like, “Then why have we been talking for 30 minutes without your partner?” Ask them up the front. Ask them up front. Look, are you the person that can make the decision? Yes or no? The third one, what is your biggest challenge right now? This makes them sit and think, “What is my biggest challenge?” Huh? What is my biggest challenge? It gets them thinking. It gets them going through it. Team, they are already coming onto this call having seen how much money they’re missing out on from the audit. They’re now coming on this call knowing what their biggest challenge is. And then the last one here, Tim, is what made you book this call? What made you book the call with me? Now what we’re trying to do team is that we’re giving them to start to sell to us. They’re giving us the reasons. It also gives us an indication of hey are they super interested? Are they a bit skeptical? It really gives us that information there. Give me a number four in the chat by the way team if you can see how those four questions before they book that call mean all the difference here team. Give me a number four in the chat if that makes all the difference.
Beautiful. So the easiest way for me to teach this team, look, I’m going to go ahead. I’m going to jump on my other the screen and I’m going to quite literally walk you through that entire system we gone through step by step. Just give me one moment. Let me switch my screens.
Okay, you should be able to see my screen now. Just give me a little seven in the chat if you can see my screen. By the way, team, give me a number seven in the chat if you can see my screen just here. Beautiful. So team this is inside what is called our CRM system. It sounds like customer relationship manager, client relationship manager, whatever you want to call it. Ultimately team inside of here is quite literally a onestop shop to automate genuinely like 90% of your business. Okay? Yes, there is a monthly investment. Yes, it is a business expense. bucks. When you see team, the level of detail this can go into is going to blow you away. Now, again, the link for this team, you haven’t got to worry about it. The link for this and all of the funnels, everything I’m going to go through here, team, don’t worry. It’s all in your workbook. All I want you to do here, just pay attention and just see exactly how easy this can be. And more importantly, team, the power in this system. Give me a two in the chat if that makes sense. By the way, team Beautiful.
Now, you can see here that there’s not much in here, team. This is our training account. Don’t worry. Um, of course, we can’t be sharing all of our information, but this is our training account here. Now, all you’ve got to do here, team, there’s loads of different options. And again, it looks super scary, right? It doesn’t need to be. There’s only a few things that we need to know in here to be able to effectively run this business. Could you dive deeper into this? Absolutely. Do you need to not to start? This is all stuff. Look, we can get better at this. We can refine this. We can expand this later. But to get up and going, there’s only a few things we need to do. Now, the first one here is we click on this one just here, sites this here, team, and we’re going to go into our EGA audit funnel. This here team is where we have the audit funnel. Now look, the great news is team, you don’t need to change anything. It’s built for you. You don’t need to change anything. But I want to show you how simple this is. In fact, let me zoom in a little bit better. There we go. So, if I go ahead and click this edit button here. Okay, look how look how much technical ability I need to be able to do this. It opens up. This is my free edit. It’s the editor. All I’ve got to do here, team, this is all built out for you. This is exactly, by the way, how it’s going to look inside of your own funnel. But here’s the thing. You see? Well, ah, this isn’t my logo. Yeah, not a problem at all. Look how easy it is to change. You go click. And then we come over here. There’s a little button here. We go ahead. We click on this one here. And you can upload any image you want. You can upload any image you want. You upload your logo. Oh, Sam, I don’t have a logo. Go and get AI to create you a logo. You can create any logo, upload anything. Look, you can see, look, we’ve got a load of client projects in here. Let’s say, for instance, I don’t know, we want to have, let’s have a a good picture of me at an event I spoke at. Let’s have a look.
Insert. There you go. Look, look how easy that is to change. If I want to change it again, I come here, I click anything here. I can change this to absolutely anything. If I want to change these words, rather than business owners, maybe we want to make it niche specific for home service business owners in the US. That that’s it. Look, ready? That’s now done. That’s now done. I can change here. I can add in anything. Let’s say, for instance, just under here, maybe you wanted to add in an extra picture of yourself. If you go ahead, you click this plus button here, we can add in more a headline, some text, we can add a button, a form, we can have our social media. You might want to turn around and go, you know what? You can follow me on social media. Look how easy that is. Look at this. We want to get rid of mail. We want to add the mail in. We want to get rid of Facebook. Add Facebook. We can add or remove absolutely any of these with one click of a button. If we don’t want it anymore, all we do is we hover over here, we click the little delete button, but we can also drag it. We can move it around. Let’s say we want to get rid of it. Delete. Off it goes. So, so simple, team. So, so simple. Click of a button, in we go. We can go scroll down through any of our logos. Let’s go ahead. Oh, look at that. There’s a picture of me and Chris there. You’re going to meet Chris tomorrow. Don’t worry. Give me a little meet me in the chat. Who’s excited to meet Chris tomorrow? You’ve heard me talk about him a lot, right? You’ve heard me talk about him a lot. So, let’s say we want to add in our logo. Look, one more click of a button. And all we would have to do here, team, is click the little save button here. That’s it. That would now be published to the internet. No hiring a web developer. No going on people per hour upwork.com. Literally drag and drop, drag and drop. Click click. Done. Anything you want to add in here, team. Just give me a little me in the chat if you can actually do everything I’ve showed you just there. By the way, team, just going to make sure I don’t save those changes because of course you want access to this one here. So, so simple. And all we do is we send them the link. We can view this page. Here it is. And look, this is live on the internet, team. Now, of course, you’re going to change your logo up here. People going to come down on this. They’re going to be able to click on I think. There we go. I’ve already got one loaded up. And this is what we send team. Zoom in so we can see it better. This is what we’re sending out to the people from LinkedIn. Would you like your free audit? For business owners who know they should be on social media but never seemed to have the time, get a free social media audit now. Take 60 seconds. So the client that you’ve spoke to on LinkedIn, they come here, they fill in their name, their email address, they click show me that miss revenue. Now the name and email address, very important. I’m going to show you what happens with that in a moment. You click on show me my miss revenue. Oh, let me just get rid of the space in them. It’s going to make me do the plus 44, isn’t it? Oh my goodness. What happened there?
There we go. The moment they fill in their details, now they’re coming through to that next page here, team. This is where they’re getting their free personalized social media audit. Remember, you don’t have to build any of this out, team. This is all built out for them. Look, completely free. No obligation. 100% confidential. They’re then going to come on here. They’re going to pick what niches they are. Let’s say we are a high high ticket home services. What is your personal their business? Let’s say it’s $7,500 average per customer. Are they local or they a global opportunity? What country are they in? Where do they? Let’s say they are in Austin, Texas. If it is local, how many followers? I’ve got 300 followers. How many posts per week? I do four posts per week. I would probably close if I spoke to 10 people. I’d have one of them would join because, you know, it’s quite expensive. And I’m on Facebook, Instagram, Tik Tok, and LinkedIn at the moment. We then click give me my miss revenue. And team, look at this just here. H how long did that take? H how long did that take? All of this is done for you, team. That took what? 5 seconds. Your social media audit. Look, team, it goes through. It shows how much they’re missing. It shows what their monthly income is. It gives them look, hey, here’s the good things, here’s the bad things. It breaks it down platform by platform. Wow. By me not being on LinkedIn, I’m really missing out on 6,000 views reach out a month. Wow. W I I didn’t even think about running a podcast. Here’s the opportunity. Here’s my missed revenue from a podcast. Oh, so I’m missing out on $67,000 a month. Nine inquiries you’re not getting this month at your 10% close rate. It’s even telling me specific to my business how many I’d be getting to 108 projects. Now look, this is where the audit funnel does most of the selling for you team. Why most businesses never fix this. No time, no content ideas, no consistency, wrong format, algorithm changes, the quality drops. It even shows that most social media managers are going to charge you between5 to $10,000 a month. Well, most businesses try it. Burnout. But there is a complete solution for this. A donefor you AI system that handles every piece of content every day completely handsoff team. It shows exactly what you can do for them. They are coming onto this call knowing how much they missed, knowing why they aren’t fixing it, exactly what you can do for them. It even shows them, look, you’re going to make your money back in less than one month. What do you get on your free strategy call? Goes through all of that. Holds the strategy call for 30 15 minute with a countdown timer. They go ahead, they click that button. This then goes through to your calendar where they can book in a call team. Again, just give me a wow in the chat if that is so amazing that process there. The moment they go from LinkedIn step by step by step, look how professional that is. Look how clean that is. Remember team experience isn’t what it used to be. The system is your credibility now, not your experience. The system is your credibility. All of this done within your optin funnel. Now from there, what do we need to do? Well, how do we get our calendar? So simple team inside of the CRM system. We have got built in here calendars. We have calendars built in. You don’t need an extra bit of software. It’s as simple as this. You ready? You click on new calendar. It’s your personal booking.
client um client call. You name it something. You can then call this whatever you want. Let’s call it client call with Sam. And then all we do here team, we just click confirm. Here we go. This link here, we’re going to copy that. If I open this in a new tab, paste. There’s my call that there team. That is the calendar we just created connected to my calendar. You can see exactly all of my times when I’m free. Absolutely every single element of it. It’s so so simple. And you ready? Here it comes. We just refresh that page. That one will load in.
There it is. Client call. It’s that simple. All you then need to do is you click on your availability. You you connect your calendar to it. It could be your Gmail, your Hotmail, your Outlook, whatever it’s called. You connect your calendar. You get your availability Monday 2:00 p.m. to 5:00 p.m. Tuesday 9:00 a.m. till 11:00 a.m. And it automatically updates for you. Team, give me a nine in the chat if that makes your life so much easier. By the way, team, give me a nine in the chat if that makes your life so much easier. They just immediately book into your calendar. There’s no messaging them getting on your phone. Hey, um, when are you free for a call? No, they select a time that’s good for them and a time that is already available in your calendar. So, so simple. And then the final step here team is we click on automations here. The moment someone fills in their details here, their name, their email address, their phone number. The moment they click this button here, team, all of this information, their first name, their last name, their phone, their email is all stored inside of yours. Here you click on contacts. It will show every single person that has ever said, “I want a free order.” It’s all stored in here, team. Now, for those of you that are Eurobbased, it is all GDPR compliant. You just need to make sure you’ve got your check box on there, which we’ve already got. As you can see, we’ve got your checkbox on there to make sure it’s GDPR compliant. For those of you that have never heard of GDPR that aren’t in Europe, don’t worry about it. Doesn’t affect you. You’re all good. So the moment someone fills in their details, team, we want to get an email out to them straight away. We want to get an email out to them 24 hours later, 5 days later. You don’t want to have to go to your Google calendar, mark in there exactly when you need to do it. So watch this. Ready? We click build using AI. We click one button and it’s going to ask us what do you want to automate? What do you want to automate? Team, you don’t even need to be technical anymore. We used to have to teach this how to do this. And I’ll show you what it actually looks like here, team. Ready? Let me just show you what it used to look like. Create a workflow. Start from scratch. This is what you had to do. You had to go a trigger. Look at all of this team. Look how confusing this is. Look at it. All of this. You don’t need to do any of this anymore. You literally click here, build using AI, and then we tell it what we want it to do. So, we might want to say after a client gets their free audit, if they haven’t booked a call, send them an email reminder 24 hours and 5 days afterwards to push them to book a call. Make the emails fun yet authoritative. We go ahead, we click submit. And now what this will do team is it will automatically start to build this out. So if anyone takes your free audit immediately after that they are then going to get into a position where they get an email straight away, an email reminder 24 hours later and an email reminder 5 days later. It is as simple as that. We get AI to build it for us. It just walks us through step by step. How should the workflow look when the free audit’s been delivered after a form has been submitted? Perfect. Boom. We click on that and it just asks us questions. Team, it’s just we’re not going to go through back and forth right now cuz it’s it might take a while. But c can you see team how easy this could be? It’s actually building my workflow at the moment while while I’m talking to you live. It’s building all of the technical stuff out for me. It’s unbelievable. Team, this is just taking away so much of the manual work. In fact, are you starting to realize now team why we keep saying it’s only three to five hours a week manually that you are personally doing in your business but over 160 hours a week with AI. Just give me a little me in the chat if you’re having that realization. Right? This is how I only work 3 to 5 hours a week because the the the system is just completely built around me the entire time. Yeah. The entire time team. And then the last thing here to show you just while this is building of course which all of you have access to is your LinkedIn objection handler. Again, link is in your work, but don’t worry. This is your LinkedIn objection handler. All you have to do here, team, is you open this up. It’s literally the URL is in there. Explosive growthacademy.co.uk/aobjection
handler-1. Anytime you get a response, team, whether it be on LinkedIn, whether someone sends you an email, anytime you get a response from a potential client and you don’t know what to say, you don’t have to. Team, remember, I don’t want you to go off and spend $50,000 on mentorship programs, on sales, on marketing. I don’t want you to learn. Team, remember, we’ve got to stop learning and start what? Let me know in the chat, team. We got to stop learning and start what? Stop learning, start earning. You don’t need to, team. I genuinely spent like over $50,000 learning. If someone gives me a message, how do I respond? What’s the best way to do it? You have got the LinkedIn objection handler as part of this event. And by the way, team, you are welcome. You’re welcome. I know. So let’s say for instance team someone comes back to you on maybe LinkedIn maybe they come back to you on um an email and they say something like thanks for this I have tried an agency before and it didn’t work out and cost me a lot of money so no thank you now Immediately team, ask yourself a question. If someone came back to you via LinkedIn or maybe even via an email and said this to you, yes or no in the chat, by the way, would you just let this one go? Would you let it go? You’d be like, “Yeah, they’re not going to they’re not interested.” But probably, right? And it isn’t because they’re not interested, team. If they have taken the time to respond to me, they’re showing some level of interest, aren’t they? What they are really saying here is, “I don’t trust you. I don’t trust you.” Now, what would you respond back to this saying?
Can you immediately see right there, team? You’re almost kind of like panicking like, I don’t know what I would say. What would I say to this? What What would I say to this? I I I don’t even know. Yeah, team. You don’t have to know because we fill this in. We then say it is a roofing company. Oops. If I can spell in Texas, America. This is the first response from LinkedIn or could be an email that they sent me after I offered them a free social media audit. And we click generate best response. One click of a button. and we need to stop learning and start earning. And here we go. Look at this. Here is your response to send. That’s completely fair. Bad agency experience are frustratingly common, especially in trades like roofing. I’m not asking you to spend a penny or commit to anything. The audit is generally just me taking a look at what’s working and what isn’t in your current social media and telling you honestly what I see. No pitch, no invoice. Would it be worth 10 minutes just to get a second opinion?
Team, give me a wow in the chat if that’s a better response than you could have come up with. And there’s nothing wrong with that. Look at that. We’ve even copied the message. Literally, I’ve even put in here for you, team, a copy message. Click. And it even shows why this works. Reframe with zero risk. This prospect has been burned financially before, so any hint of selling will trigger immediate rejection. Acknowledging their pain validates them while ruthlessly stripping away every risk element, cost commitment time, disarms their defense mechanism, and repositions the order as a safe, low stakes favor rather than a sales step. Avoid this. A beginner would try to defend agencies. Ah, some of you are thinking, “Yeah, I would have done that. Damn it.” or explain why their service is different. This sounds defensive and self-s serving and will instantly confirm the prospect’s worst fears about being sold to again. Team copy back to LinkedIn. Paste. You get their response. Copy. You bring it in here. Paste. Copy. Paste. Copy. Paste. Copy. Paste.
This is the business team. This is our outreach. So actually bit of a recap here for you. Just let’s go through the steps and put them together. We the three-step process on our outreach. Number one, we optimize our LinkedIn profile. Number two, we use LinkedIn sales navigator to find the exact people. I’ve already given you your niche searches inside of there. Number three, we set up our AI outreach. It automatically sends messages every single day. The moment someone’s come back to us, that’s when our manual process comes in. The moment someone shows an interest, they respond back to us on LinkedIn. We go to LinkedIn. We copy their message. We paste it into the LinkedIn objection handler. It gives us the perfect response. We copy, we paste, we copy, we paste. We do that until they get their free audit booked in. We then send them the free audit funnel, which you have access to. You just rebrand it yourself. Drag and drop. Click a couple of buttons. They fill in all of their details. They then come through. Come back here. They then come back through to this page here that goes through where it’s specific to all of their details, exactly what is right for them. We then run the social media audit automatically done for them. It shows exactly what they’re missing out on. All of the selling is done for them. They reserve a free strategy call on your calendar which is inside of one system. They click on that. They go ahead and book a calendar and then from there every single email which as you can see now is already built out a team while I’ve been talking to you. It it’s built this out. It’s built this out. Just give me a wow in the chat if that’s blown your mind. By the way, team, while I’ve been showing you the LinkedIn LinkedIn objection handler, it’s built it. Someone fills in a form, checked if they booked a call. If they haven’t, it waits 24 hours, sends them the first reminder email, waits 5 days, sends them a second reminder email, and there we go. It ends the sequence. Look at this team. Look how technical this looks. It took me what? 45 seconds building it using AI. One, two, two questions. I gave it two questions. Are you starting to have a realization, team? Hey, I I think I can do this business. Give me a yes in the chat, by the way, if you’re having a bit of a realization. I can do this business. Fantastic. So, let me go ahead and switch back to my next screen. Give me one moment. Let’s go back to my slides. One second.
Okay, there we are. We are back on my slides. So, team again, just give me a little me in the chat if this is blowing your mind. By the way, it’s blowing your mind. Look, all of this that I’m going through, everything I just showed you team five, 10 years ago, you had to do that yourself. We built it once, it now works forever. It works forever. Now the last thing I want to cover in this session here team is about the responses having those conversations whether it be on LinkedIn whether it be on email if someone comes back to us team speed is part of the service speed is of the essence if someone responds back to you on LinkedIn asking you like hey can I have a little bit more information now of course this isn’t perfect if someone responds back to you at 3:00 in the morning and you’re asleep great I get it but as a best practice team going back to them within one hour. That is where we need to be. Why is that team? We are constantly fighting for attention in the world that we live in, right? We’re constantly battling for attention. People won’t remember who you are 5 days from now. In fact, let me ask you a question, team. 5 days ago from now, what did you have for lunch?
You’ve got to sit and go, “What did I have for lunch 5 days ago? What day is it?” Well, team, you cannot remember the food you put in your body to keep you alive 5 days ago. They are not going to remember someone that sent them a LinkedIn message. You’ve got to have that speed. Look, two hours is fine. 4 hours absolute maximum because look this is what a professional agency looks like. And to sum this up for you team to drive this home right now a business owner could find your LinkedIn profile they could receive your connection request tonight get a follow-up message click your audit link. receive a professional personalized report about their own business. Book a call in your calendar, receive an automated reminder the night before, all without you touching a single thing because you’ve built it once and it works forever. And team, that is a professional agency regardless of technical ability, regardless of experience operating from day one. Give me a mi in the chat, by the way, if you’re now starting to see, hey, do you know what? Yeah, I’m going to run a professional agency from day one because you can. Experience doesn’t matter anymore. The system is your credibility team. And remember, stop learning, start earning. Don’t go and learn how to do all of this. Don’t go and learn how to write the best LinkedIn responses. I don’t want you doing that. It’s a waste of your time. The system is here ready for you team. All you have to do is take that step, get the help, get the support, get the guidance when things go wrong and it goes from day one. Give me a yes in the chat if that’s pretty awesome. By the way, team, yes in the chat if that is pretty awesome. So, um, look, I hope you enjoyed this session, team. I hope you’re starting to see the puzzle pieces coming together, seeing the method to our madness, if you will, as well. Team, look, if you haven’t already, team, go ahead, get your application in. Have a chat with the team. It’s completely no obligation. The only thing you are obligating towards is having a conversation. Look, whether you join us or you don’t, either way, team, there’s no pressure, okay? But get the fact, get the evidence, get the data without having a call. You might, well, I think I I I don’t think I can do. You don’t know yet. It’s that BS decision. Team, have a chat. Fact, evidence, and data. Go ahead, get those applications in. Team, we are going to go ahead and take a quick little Let’s do a 10 minute leg stretch here. Little 10-minute leg stretch, and we’re going to come back for our final session, which is the conversations that get you paid. an amazing session which links so perfectly to this one cuz now you’ve seen 90% of all of the selling is done before you even speak to the client. So team go ahead get those applications in. Link is in the chat for you. It should be posted in front of you now. See you back here in 10 minutes team. See you back here in 10.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat up here.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat
up here.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat
up
here.
Heat.
Heat. Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat. N.
Heat. Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Yeah.
Heat.
Hey,
heat. Hey.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat. Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Heat.
Welcome back everyone. Welcome back. Come on, team. We’ve had nearly two full days together. You know the drill. Give me that number five in the chat. who is here. Give me that number five in the chat. Who is here? And team, I am so excited for this session cuz you know what? Let’s have a bit of a a backtrack here. Look, three sessions ago, we we went through LinkedIn, we went through the outreach, the sales navigator, the AI system, dripify campaign, how easy that can be. Click, click, click, click, click, 24/7 outreach without you doing anything. Two sessions ago, we dealt with that story inside your head that kept telling you and has told you for years, you can’t do this. You’re not good enough. These limiting beliefs that hold us back. One session ago, we went through the funnel, the audit funnel, the pipeline, and the booking system. And in this session here, we’re going to be going through the conversation. One conversation team. You are all one conversation away from $5,000 in your bank account and $500 every single month. There’s the moment that someone sits on a call with you, an exact stranger, a curious stranger who didn’t know who you were and how we turn them into a paying client. Because here’s the thing, this is the session that scares people the most. It shouldn’t team the audit has done most of the selling for you. The audit fund has done most of the selling. You saw it there. I was saying black and white, but there’s also golden gray. You know what I mean? When I say in black and white, the audit does all the selling for them. The moment someone jumps on a call, they’re already convinced. Your job is to have the conversation, which is the conclusion. They’ve already seen what you can do for their specific business. They’ve already said yes to giving you their time. Your job isn’t to try and quote unquote sell them. Your job is not to persuade them. Your job is to confirm to them what they already know. Otherwise, they wouldn’t be on the call with you. Remember, they have asked for this call after the audit funnel. Your job is just to confirm what they already know. Give me a yes in the chat if you can do that. By the way, team, you can confirm what someone already knows.
Now, we need to address the thing that makes most people who’ve never sold anything, maybe a beginner, hesitate, and that is the moment they say the number, i.e. $5,000 upfront. Because it normally comes with a bit of a wse and an upward inflection. Someone says, “Great, what’s the investment?” It’s $5,000 upfront and then $500
team. The hesitation isn’t because that number’s high. High for what? Is $5,000 a lot of money? Yes or no? Yes or no? Let me know in the chat. Is $5,000 upfront a lot of money? Tim the answer is it depends, isn’t it? It depends. $5,000 might be a lot of money for one person. For another person, it’s nothing. It’s all the BS we tell ourselves. Team, that belief system. Remember, like, oh, well, I can’t do this. Team, how many times have you tried fact, evidence, and data? We’ve got to stop making these BS decisions. Give me an FE in the chat. if you caught yourself again making that BS decision, that story telling you something without any fact, any evidence, or any data, cuz ultimately team, when you break this down, what you’re charging them is an absolute steal. $5,000 onetime setup fee, $500 a month, that’s $11,000 a year team. A traditional agency is around $3,000 a month minimum. How do I know that? That’s what I used to charge. I would charge a minimum $7,500 a month. And I tell you what, I would do a hell of a lot less than you’re going to do for them. Why? Well, going out the skill set, I had to be the expert. I had to go and learn everything, didn’t I? You don’t have to learn that anymore, team. You just get to go and earn. And when we position it that way to a client team, that $5,000 even in your own head is a no-brainer. Which would you prefer, team? Would you prefer option number one to invest $11,000 with a hell of a lot more? Every single social media, a blog post, running their adverts, building their website for them, having that help desk. Or number two, would you prefer to invest $36,000 a year for one service? Let me know in the chat team. Number one or number two,
it’s less team. It’s less of an investment. And when you position it in the right way to the client, they get it too. They might think it’s, oh, it’s expensive. Well, compared to what? And the way we frame this, well, Mr. or Mrs. Client. As you probably know, a traditional agency only offering you one service is normally around about $3,000 a month. Whereas what we do here at 123 the business is we offer you multiple services. We post on every single social media for you. We do this, we do that, we do this, we do that. And it is at a fraction of the investment. It’s just a $5,000 onetime setup fee. And after that, only $500 a month, making it around about 60% less with quite literally 10 times the installments that you get on the back and 10 times the services. Yes or no, team? Does that sound like a no-brainer? Now, let me know in the chat. Yes or no? Is that a no-brainer? And it’s all about the delivery. It’s all about that delivery team. Does that make sense? We’ve got to get that that number out of our head. Oh, I can’t charge $5,000 a month. BS. How many times have you tried? How many times have you tried, team? Now, every single person you speak to, no matter what team, yes, the audit has done so much selling for you, but every single client will arrive with the three biggest questions they’re silently asking themselves. And guess what? The audit has answered all free for you. This is why this is such a game changer for you team. I don’t want you to become an expert in sales. You don’t need to be you don’t need to be the three questions. Number one, will the business will this actually worth my business? Can I trust this person? And is it worth my money team? Let’s look at number one. The audit showed them already. Showed them what’s missing from their online presence for their specific business, for their specific close rate. The answer’s already there. They have the answer. Is it going to work? Well, yeah, it’s going to work. I have the answer. Can I trust this person? Team, as long as you’ve optimized your LinkedIn profile, as long as your messages are clear, professional, they’ve gone through the audit, all of that team, everything, the entire system is your trust. It’s not your 20 years of experience. That doesn’t matter anymore. It doesn’t matter anymore. The system is what has built that trust. And is it worth the money team? Remember when we ask questions like look what do you currently spend on marketing that doesn’t work? What is one customer per month cost them to acquire? What is the of what’s one lost customer worth? We know that from the audit. They know it’s worth the money. The audit has done most of the selling for us. Your job is just to confirm what they already know. Give me a wow in the chat. By the way, if you love the fact that what we built here, the Explosive Growth Academy has done most of the selling for you. Absolute gamecher. Now, the actual phone call itself, team, it’s a simple fivestep framework. That’s it. Five steps. Even if you’ve never even if you’ve never had a phone call in your life where you’ve sold something, if you’re an expert salesperson, it’s a simple fivestep framework. That’s all we need to do here, team. This is your reference card. This is your your bible, if you will. Five stages. Every single call follows the same structure. Now look, not every call will have the same amount of time in each structure. Some will move faster, some might need to be a little bit slower in the discovery, but the sequence never changes. We build rapport. We ask our discovery questions. We look at the audit delivery. We go through the proposal with them. We close it off. And it’s that simple. So, let’s break this down step by step. Number one, rapport team. People buy from people they like. Okay? Build a human connection before you talk about business. Spend a minute, spend two minutes, ask them about their business. Ask them about their day. Make something real. Look, I always say to people in a world where you could be anything, be kind. People genuinely appreciate this. Look, if you jump straight in, some people don’t like it. And if someone genuinely wants to get to it, they they will tell you, “Do you mind if we get to it? I’m tight on time.” Yeah, of course. No problem. But spend a little bit of time team. Spend a bit of time building that report that goes a mile. Trust me. The ne next one there team is the most important part. It’s the discovery. It’s the questions we ask them. So tell me a little bit more about your situation. We’ve got to ask what’s called an open question here. Open question. I’m going to give you a very easy framework. There’s three qu If you start a question with three, one of these three, it will be an open question. If you say things like, “Do you need more clients?” Yes.
The conversation’s dead in the water, isn’t it? You ready for this team? Tell me. Explain to me. Describe to me. Write those down. I’m going to go through them again for you. Tell me, explain to me, describe to me. It’s called a TED. Tell me, explain to me, describe to me. If you ask a question starting one, one of those three, it’s an open question. Tell me a little bit more about your situation. So, describe to me your frustrations. Explain to me what hasn’t worked in the past. All we are looking to do here team is something very very simple. We are asking them to tell us about their problem because as a rule of thumb in life team
if someone tells you you have a problem you don’t listen. If you tell yourself you have a problem it means everything. It means everything. All I’m asking to do here is I want them to come to the discovery in their own brain. Wow, I’ve got a problem. I need to fix this. I can’t turn around to them and say, “Look, your business is going to go under in a year if I don’t fix this.” Cuz then they get defensive. Who are you? You don’t know my business. Conversation’s gone. Great example we can all relate to. Imagine you’ve got a friend who’s in a really bad relationship. They’re a bit, you know, mean to them. You turn around to your friend, you’re having a glass of wine, and you say, “You know what? You need to dump that loser.” What do they do? They start defending that loser. You go, “What the you? What is happen?” Because you told them, “We don’t like being told what to do.” Tell me, are you 100% happy in your relationship? I wouldn’t say I’m 100 100% happy. Well, what percentage would you say? I probably say like 60%. Huh? I mean, do you think that do you think you deserve to be 100% happy? Yeah, I do actually. Yeah, I think I do deserve to be 100% happy, but you’re 60% of the moment. Yeah. I mean, what do you think you need to do about it? I think I need to dump that loser. Ah, you see the difference here, team? You ask discovery questions so they find the problem the selves. Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. I love the fact as well there’s probably at least one person here going I’m going to try this on my buddy. Yeah, he needs to break up with that loser. She needs to break up with that loser. This I’m going to I’m going to try this when we finish. So we spend a bit of time questions. Tell me explain to me. Describe to me. We walk through the final results with them. But tell me a bit more about your final the audit results. What stood out to you? What surprised you? Find out where the gaps are. So what what was your biggest surprise with your missed revenue? What what are you posting on at the moment? Okay, so you already post on Instagram. Were you a bit shocked about the the missed revenue? Why do you think it’s not working for you at the moment then? I don’t think I’m posting every day. Right. So you really think you should be posting every day then? Yeah, I should. Yeah, you’re right. What we want to do, Tim, is we want to try and start to connect the dots in their head about the loss revenue. We want to ask them questions. Why is it they’re on this call? Start to connect those dots. From there, it’s simple. We have a transition. We state the solution. Well, Mr. and Mrs. client, this is exactly what we do here at 123 the company. This is what we can do for you. we can do this, this, this, this, and this. Here’s the investment. And then we stop talking. We give them the ability to let them decide. We transition into what we call the close. And it’s the most important in the close that the first one that speaks loses. First one that speaks loses team. Very, very simple process. Give me a five in the chat. That’s a really simple five-step process by the way because ultimately team how we pivot how we pivot from going through the audit into transitioning to the proposal. It’s really simple. We just ask a couple of questions.
It’s really simple. So, what is the biggest challenge getting new customers right now? What are you currently doing for content and social media? What is working and what is not?
We’re asking questions. They are telling us the answer. And then we pivot. Well, based on what you’ve told me and what we found in your audio audit, let me show you exactly what we’re looking at for your business. Can you see that bridge connecting across them team? It’s our bridge into our audit delivery. Sorry. We don’t just jump in and go, “Right, so you’re really you’re messing up a lot here, aren’t you? You’re rubbish.” No, no. We ask them these three discovery questions. What’s your biggest challenge getting new customers right now? Let them talk. What are you currently doing for content and social media? Let them talk. What is working and what is not? Let them talk. They are telling you the answers. And by the end of stage three team, they understand the problem and they believe that you can fix it. And this is when we transition into the proposal. It’s very simple. Well, Mr. or Mrs. client, based on everything we’ve covered today, I would like to be able to I’d like to propose setting up a full content automation system for your business. This is where we can list it off. Included in that, we’ll do this, we’ll do this, we’ll do this, we’ll do this, we’ll do this, we’ll do this. We will handle everything for you. And for that Mr. or Mrs. client, that is $5,000 to build and launch everything for you without you lifting a finger. Then $500 a month to keep it producing results for you. And then team, I mean this well and truly, shut up. All right? Shut up. The moment you say the price, you do not talk. The first person that talks after you say the price loses. It’s awkward. It’s going to be really awkward. There might be like 30 seconds of silence, team. 30 seconds after you say a price feels like 10 minutes. The longest I’ve had genuinely team was about 9 minutes of silence. 9 minutes of silence. I just sat there. And by the way, team, if you genuinely want to talk, grab a pen, put it in your mouth. Do not say a word because team, that silence isn’t empty. It’s not awkward. You’re letting them process it in their brain. If you interrupt them, we’ve lost the ability for them to be able to process this in their brain. You’ve got to be quiet, team. The person who speaks next loses now in that awkward silence. One of two things will happen. The first one, the best case scenario is they turn around and go, “You know what, Sam? I’m in. Let’s do this. Fantastic. We close them off. We get the payment. Off we go. Congratulations. You got $5,000 in your bank account. Another 500 every month hitting your account forever.
or scenario number two, they will come back with a reason why not to do this or a question. We call it an objection. Well, Sam, it sounds great. I’ve got a couple of questions here. Perfect. Mr. or Mrs. client, what are your questions? How can I answer them? And the five main objections you’re going to get team, what they mean, and also how we start to overcome them. The first one is it’s too expensive. H you know it’s just too expensive. Well, this is where we need to what’s called reframe it. Well, look, Mr. and Mrs. Client, I understand you feel it might be too expensive. Would you mind if I ask compared to what? Because traditional agencies charge $3,000 a month. That’s $36,000 a month. Oh, yeah. Suppose they do. Would you mind me asking what’s the cost of doing nothing? A year from now, if you don’t grow your business, where are you going to be? Ah, I mean, I can’t I I mean, a year from now, if I don’t grow my business, I’ll be bankrupt. Okay. Well, Mr. and Mrs. Client, what’s the value of one new client per month for you? Can you see what we’re doing, team? We’re not being combative. We’re not saying it’s not expensive. No, team, we’re just asking questions. We’re letting them sell to themselves. Does that make sense, team? Give me a seven in the chat if that makes sense.
Another great one. One of my favorites. Yeah, Sam, this is a great I need to think about it. Don’t just turn around and go, “Okay, ask a question.” Look, team, when someone says, “I need to think about it.” What they’re really telling you is you haven’t answered something I have in my head. You say, “Oh, this room is a client.” Of course. Now, what is it specifically you need to think about? Maybe I can answer it for you now live.
Well, now you mention it. I’m a little bit worried about this. That means you’re going to uncover the real reason underneath it. They don’t need to think about it. No one ever needs to think about it. What we’re doing, team, is we’re delaying. Ask the question. What is it specifically you need to think through? Find out what that root problem is there, team. Not a great one. Yeah, it sounds all great to me. I need to speak to my partner. Now, look, this is what’s called third party authority. Who are my parents out there? Give me a P in the chat. Who are my parents? Yeah, you’re experts at it. Dad, can I have a sweet? Mom said you can’t. Mom’s not here at the moment, is she? Cuz if I say no, he can argue with me. She can argue with me. If I say mom’s mom said no, mom’s not here. You can’t argue with mom who’s not here. You going a It’s the same thing. Well, I need to speak to my partner. Yeah, make makes absolute sense. Why don’t you Is your partner there? Get them on the call now. I’ll have a chat with them. Oh, they’re not actually here at the moment. Great. When are you both together? Let me give you a call back. I’ll speak to both of you at the same time.
Super simple. You might even be a little bit bold there. You might turn around and go, “Well, I completely understand you need to speak to your partner. Look, what’s your gut instinct telling you? Do you think that they’d be on board yet? Do you think they’re going to be happy to grow the business?” Yeah, I think they are as well. I think they will. I just need to check with them. Fantastic. Well, I’ll tell you what. Why don’t we get your deposit down now? It’s completely refundable for the next 14 days. It means that I can start my process. You know that your partner’s going to say yes. Have a chat with them afterwards. If everything’s great, I’ve I’ve got two days of work in my already. We can start getting things. And if they’re not 100% happy, we can jump on a call. I’ll go through with them together. How does that sound?
Again, it’s very, very tiny little details there, team. But you’ve earned the right to ask the question back. Team, they’re still on the call with you. They chose to take the audit funnel. They chose to go through it. They chose to book the call. They chose to stay on the call this long. You’ve earned the right to do that, team. Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense.
Beautiful. Well, I’m not sure. I’m not sure it’s going to work for me team or that’s just coming from a fearbased decision. It’s a fear-based. They’re just worried in that moment. They need a bit of reassurance. Well, look, Mr. and Mrs. Clan, I completely get that. Look, do would you like us to go back to your audit? Let’s go through the audit together. You like the gaps we worked on together. Can you see that one there? You know, you’re missing out on this, this, this. that the question you need to ask yourself is it do you want them fixed? I’m going to do everything within my power to make this work. They just need a little bit of reassurance there, team. Does that make sense? Little bit of reassurance. And then a a genuine one here, team that you’re going to come across probably more than you think. Look, Sam, this sounds great. I’ve been burned before. Team, that happens more than you’d expect. There’s a lot of people out there not doing a good job. You’ve got to acknowledge it. You got to validate it. You got to reframe it. Look, Mr. and Mr. Client, first things first. I’m sorry you had to go through that. All right, that must have sucked. It’s completely fair. Would you mind if I ask what happened when you got burnt? Find out what it was. Was it that maybe they didn’t get them results? Maybe they got results, but you know, they couldn’t ever speak to them. We don’t know what the issue is at the moment, so we need to find out what the issue is from them. And then we address that specific failure, that specific concern, not a full general one that doesn’t mean anything to anyone. Really simple. Those are the top five objections and how we overcome them. But I’m going to give you a framework now, team, that is going to make your life so much easier. It is called feel, felt, found. Feel, felt, found. Every single time team you get an objection. The natural instinct is like, “Oh, it’s too expensive.” No, it’s not. You’re missing out on 39 grand a month. Five 500 a month. It’s like pushing two North Pole magnets together. It’s not going to work. You’ve got to answer it in a specific way, team. And feel, felt, found answers all of these. You ready for this team? It’s too expensive, Sam. I understand how you feel. We acknowledge their feelings. I understand. I understand how you feel. It disarms them. It makes them go, “Okay, well, at least they’re listening to me.” Other people, you know what? Other people have felt the same way. It makes them feel more reassured. It makes them feel, I’m not the only one that’s ever felt that way. That’s brilliant. I’m not weird. Other people have felt the same way. But what they found was this. And then we overcome the objection.
You know what? I’ve been burned before. Well, do you mind if I specifically what it was, you know, that happened? Oh, you know what? Like they they they just didn’t deliver on what they promised. I paid money. They they just didn’t deliver. Hey, do you know what, Mr. MCL client? I completely understand how you feel. Honestly, look, you are not the only person I’ve spoken to that felt the exact same way. But what people have found is it’s not about the system. It’s about making sure you’re working with someone that you know you can trust. You know, you’ve been through my LinkedIn, you’ve been through the audit funnel, we’ve been on this call now for 27 minutes. And I hope you’ve got a bit of a feel that I’m going to do everything within my power to make sure you get those results and to prove to you there are good people in this business. Isn’t that really what you’re looking for?
Give me a wow in the chat. That’s pretty awesome, by the way. I understand how you feel. Other people felt the same way. What they found was this feel felt found on every single objection you ever get. And that really is it team. We don’t need to over complicate this. It’s a simple five stage framework. We build that rapport, that human connection. We ask the discovery questions. We let them tell us. We bridge it into our audit funnel. We find where the gaps are. We connect it to loss revenue. We state our proposal. We list off what they’re going to get. We shut up. We either close them off immediately. We got $5,000 in account. $500 a month every single month. or we go through their objections, feel, felt, found. Give me a five in the chat. By the way, if that’s a very, very simple process that you can go through yourself, by the way. Beautiful. Now, couple things on this as well. First things first, by the way, you now know more than 99% of people on the population. By the way, you now know more than 99% of people on the population. But a couple of things just before we round off for the day. Number one team, $5,000 a month, $500, sorry, $5,000 upfront, $500 a month. Just as a reminder, team, these are frameworks. If you don’t feel comfortable charging $5,000 up front, but you feel comfortable charging $1,000 up front, great. Start with that. If you don’t comfortable charging $500, but you’re comfortable charging 250, start with that. I would much prefer you to get $1,000 upfront and $250 a month than get nothing. Does that make sense? By the way, team, give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense. These are guidelines. All I ask of you is if you do lower it down so you feel more comfortable, when you start feeling more comfortable, bring them back up. Bring them back up here, team. Give me a yes in the chat if that makes sense, by the way. Beautiful. So, team, have you enjoyed today? Give me a give me a yes in all caps locks actually if you’ve enjoyed today team. Give me a yes in all caps locks if you have loved today. Yeah. Beautiful. Cuz here’s the thing. You’ve seen the system. We built the tools. We’ve seen the script. The only thing the only decision you’ve got to make team is how fast do you want to move? That’s a pretty amazing place to be in, isn’t it team? How fast do you want to move? And tomorrow we’re going to deal with the number one things, the three things that are holding you back. And we’re going to round off this system. It is going to be incredible. But before we do leave team, your homework for day two. Your homework for day two. Number one, either set up, if you don’t have a LinkedIn account, create one. Optimize your LinkedIn profile. Do it tonight. If you haven’t already done it, do it tonight. Step number two, get your 30-day free trial. if it’s available. If not, purchase your LinkedIn Sales Navigator. Get it ready. Get your searches. You’ve got the niche searches in your workbook. Number three, open your Dreify account. Set it up. The link is in the chat. We sent it to you earlier. The link is in your workbook. Get it set up. Step number four, build your first campaign. Build your first campaign in your chosen niche. Look, use AR. You get your messages. Get the system up ready to go and click launch. Click launch tonight. Come tomorrow with the system running. Come tomorrow with outreach happening. Come tomorrow with the fact that you are a business owner. punch more of the fact that you know in the next 24 hours you may get your first audit sent out your first discovery call booked. And then lastly team if you haven’t already fill in your applications look we’ve had an unbelievable quite frankly almost an overwhelming number of you have filled in those applications. team. Get in an application. Speak to the team. Okay? Let us help you to guarantee your success. I know some this might seem scary. Team, let us help you through this. No matter where you are, we can help. Get that application in. It is a no obligation application team. The only obligation you’re making is to have a conversation to get the fact, get the evidence, and get the data. That is it. It’s the only obligation you’re having team. Whether you join us, I love you. If you don’t join us, I love you. But get the fact, get the evidence team, get the data. As a reminder, even though the event is finishing, the our team are probably still going to be making calls. Keep your phone near you so you get a notification. Make sure you do not miss that call team. We want to make sure you are on there. And again, for those of you, by the way, that have already joined, um, I just want to remind this as well because, um, I I sometimes forget. I’ve had messages from the team saying we’ve had quite a few people join on on multiple different levels. Um, I forget that I don’t mind being center of attention. I forget sometimes people do mind being center. So, look, when you do join on any level team, don’t worry. I’m not going to call you out. Um, I’m not going to say like, “Oh, here’s Suzie, here’s John. Here’s Pash. Well done.” Look, I’m not going to call your names out. Don’t worry. I will respect your anonymity. But for those of you that have already joined, you know who you are. Congratulations, team. What an incredibly lifechanging decision you have made. I know we’ve got people that are also coming on quite literally to I think we’ve got one person that’s coming on as a business partner with myself and Chris which is absolutely amazing. Cannot wait to start working with you on that one and get our team building absolutely everything with you. But team a huge congratulations to every single one of you. Give them a congratulations in the chat by the way there team. Give them a congratulations in the chat. Beautiful. And again, if you do want to be able to go back through, remember you can download your workbook. Uh we’ll post a link for the workbook in the chat for you just so you’ve got that one there. You’ve got that workbook. And again, as a reminder, team, get that application in. It’s no obligation. Fact, evidence, and data. So team, want to say a massive, massive thank you for today. Get yourselves back here for tomorrow. Cannot wait to see you to finish off the day. Have an amazing rest of your evening and I’ll see all of you very soon. Thank you so much team all morning, afternoon, wherever on the world. Have an amazing time team.
-
09/03/2026 – Alliant Webinar – SAVVY IRA PLANNING FOR BOOMERS – Strategies to Help You Save Taxes and Get More Out of Your IRA
All right, we can go ahead and get started now. It’s two minutes after the hour and I’d like to just point out my voice is a little raspy today. Forgive me. I uh was blessed to be invited to my younger cousin’s bachelor party this weekend. So, I had to herd cats basically this entire past weekend. Um, all in all, a good time. But, let’s begin. If you can’t hear me, if I might have uh said something you didn’t understand, pop it into the chat or the Q&A section. I’ll try to catch it and go back. But I’ll do my best. I’ve been trying to save up my voice all week for today’s webinar. But anyway, good afternoon everyone. Hey, my name is Baptiste Brunner. I’m a Texas-based financial consultant with Allion. I cover the Gulf Coast in the southeastern parts of the country and just part of a team of with the credit union of financial professionals who give regular educational webinars. Again, I’d like to just start by thanking all of you for taking the time to learn about, you know, your IRA and retirement planning, how to get that maximum benefit from your IRA or your retirement accounts in general. Find ways to save you some money in taxes. avoid some potential costly mistakes that are common. You we’ll cover them today. You want to learn more, ask us questions. We’re here to help. Uh presentation be probably about 4550 minutes long. And as always, we’re going to reserve time at the end to answer any questions you might have. When that time comes, mentioned them already, but go ahead and identify the Q&A as well as the chat section. I’ll be sure to get to those questions. Little bit of housekeeping, though. Please don’t throw an AI notetaker in here. Not allowed to do that. Um, if you want to take photos, I can’t stop you from doing that, but we’re not allowed to have any AI note takers in here. Uh, my next webinar’s coming up. I love doing them on Saturdays. Our members seem to really like doing it on Saturdays, too. So, uh, this one will be on the tax planning changes, some other tax planning as well, but just, you know, four stages of retirement with tax planning. It’s going to be Saturday, September 19th at 10 a.m. Central, that’s a really important one. I’d say this is a top three webinar if I had to put that, you know, up there along with um couple other ones, but tax planning, very important. And also another one in estate planning, you know, principles of preserving your wealth, wanting to make sure all your ducks are in a row in case anything were to happen to you. You know that you can sleep well at night because you have your state matters taken care of. That’s going to be next month, Wednesday, October 7th, at 2 central, 3 Eastern. And of course, our team at Alliant Retirement Investment Services. We’re focused on helping you, our members, understand the ins and outs of investing, saving for retirement, and of course, much more than that. But go ahead and take a look at our website, Aerys AI.creditun.com.
Put a slashevents in there to find our webinar schedule. I’m not the only one that does webinars, but got plenty of other folks that do. Team of 10 guys that do. We also have our podcast, and we also have just a really good resource center. Go ahead and check it out. Feel free to take a photo of this slide, but these are some of the resources available to you just for being a member with the credit union.
All right, so again, today we’re going to talk about savvy IRA planning. And it’s not necessarily for baby boomers. Those who are really retiring aren’t necessarily in that generation anymore. But savvy IRA planning for retirees, let’s call it. And you know, a lot of people have a plan for accumulating money for retirement, but far too often that’s just where the planning stops. And that’s not good enough. And the reality is that a sound distribution strategy, in other words, a plan for taking money out of your retirement accounts is just as important, if not more so. And when it comes to your IAS and other retirement accounts, you probably have a lot of questions like, “How much are my withdrawals taxed? When do I need to begin taking withdrawals? How much will I have to take? What happens to my IRA when I pass away? And perhaps most importantly, how can I minimize my taxes so I can spend more of my hard-earned money?” And you know, years ago, life was simpler in many ways. Retirement was really no different. Many people went to work and then when they retired they collected a pension and social security benefits. There wasn’t as much needed in the way of planning and people weren’t all that concerned about running out of money since they had all this income from between their pension and their social security benefits. You those were generally guaranteed and for most people that along with whatever else they had managed to save along the road was enough. Today though things are different. companies and other organizations. They’ve abandoned pensions in mass numbers and instead they’ve turned to 401ks and similar plans. That’s shifting many of the risks they once shouldered onto the backs of employees and their families. Retirees are now responsible for making more of the critical decisions that will determine how successful they are in retirement. And that includes keeping up with changes to the law. You know, that just happens all the time. For instance, the law known as Secure Act 2.0 made nearly 100 changes to the rules for retirement accounts, some of which we’re going to cover today. But the bottom line of all this though is that today, more than ever, when it comes to retirement, you’re on your own. On top of that, your retirement savings may have to last you a lot longer than you think. You know, according to many studies, over 40% of retirees underestimate their life expectancy by five plus years. So, take a look at this chart to see what I mean. If you’re a man and you’re 65, you have a pretty good chance of living to at least 85. If you’re a woman and you’re 65, you have a really good chance of living past 85 than you do dying before it. And if you’re married, both you and your spouse are 65. There’s a very strong chance that at least one of you will live to be at least 90. In fact, there’s about a 33% chance that at least one of you will live to be 95. And that means your retirement savings could easily have to last you 20 to 30 years or even longer than you expected. And that’s probably much longer than a lot of you even considered. And put all of this together and makes having a plan all that much more important.
So with that in mind, one of the best things that you can do as you approach retirement, if you’re not already there, is to beef up your retirement savings by contributing as much as possible to tax favored retirement accounts. So although contributing at younger ages is more powerful because it gives your contributions more time to compound, you may have been unable to save as much as you wanted to because you were bogged down by mortgage payments. You know, maybe you were saving for a child’s education. you just had other expenses. Chances are you no longer have those expenses in retirement or you know they’ll be ending soon once you finally do retire. But as a result, you may have finally you might pardon me, you may finally have discretionary income that can be used to fund your retirement accounts. So just how much can you contribute? And that depends on the type of retirement account as well as a number of other factors like your age. But let’s begin with traditional IAS. traditional IRA or an individual retirement account is a personal retirement account that offers certain tax benefits and contributions may be taxdeductible and while your money is inside the IRA it grows tax deferred ultimately when you take money out of your IRA the amount you take out is generally then added to your income we’ll talk about that more later also but in 2026 the maximum that you can contribute to a traditional IRA is 7500 if you’re 50 or older by the end of that year. Uh then you have a catchup which brings you up to 8,600 a year. You can’t always make a traditional IRA contribution though. You know, for instance, to make a traditional IRA contribution, you must have what the tax code refers to as compensation. And for most people, compensation is just earned income. But it also includes a number of other types of income such as taxable alimony. does not however include things like interest payments, dividends, capital gains, social security, or unemployment compensation. So essentially, if you are fully retired and living off of your retirement plan and your social security, you can’t do an IRA contribution. You can move money into it. You can’t put new money into it, though, basically. But in the past, age was also a barrier that prevented some people from making traditional IRA contributions. That hasn’t been the case since 2019, though. And traditional IRA contributions are deductible unless you or your spouse are active participants in an employee sponsored retirement plan and your income exceeds an applicable threshold amount. And those limits depend on your filing status and who’s contributing to employer sponsored plan. And many of you probably know that there is another type of IRA. It’s called a Roth IRA. And Roths are similar to traditional IAS, but there’s some key differences. And I love Roths. Talk about them on many of my webinars. But one of those differences is that you don’t get a tax deduction when you make a Roth IRA contribution. But once your money is in there, it grows tax deferred and then you get to take out that money tax-free down the road. you paid the taxes off early, you take everything out including the gains tax-free generally speaking. So that’s the big benefit is that the Roth IRA distributions can be tax-free in retirement. So, if you’ve had any Roth IRA though for more than 5 years, aside from this, if you’ve had any Roth IRA for more than 5 years and you’re over 59 and a half, then all of your withdrawals from any of your Roth IAS will be tax and penalty-free as part of what’s known as a qualified distribution. So even if you need to take the withdrawal sooner though, you can always take out your Roth IRA contributions, not earnings, but you can always take out your Roth IRA contributions tax and penaltyree. And same some of the same contribution rules that apply to traditional IAS also apply to Roth IAS. For instance, that same contribution rate, $7,500 plus an additional $1,100 a year if you’re ow 50 and up. But those Roth IRA contributions are also subject to the same compensation rules as traditional IRA contributions. Now, if you have sufficient compensation, then the only thing that could prevent you from making a Roth IRA contribution is having too much income. And you can see the income limits up here on the screen. Just note that if you’re a single filer, as long as your income is under 168K, you can make a full Roth IRA contribution. uh if you’re married doing a joint return, it’s $252,000.
Now, while some while some of our future retirees and current retirees, you know, those couples, they like to retire at the same time. Often times though, one spouse retires before the other. And in such cases, you may be able to take advantage of spousal IRA and/or Roth IRA contributions. And these are special contributions that allow a spouse with compensation to make a contribution to the traditional IRA or the Roth IRA of the non-working spouse. So in essence, the non-working spouse can use the working spouse’s compensation as their own to declare that they’ve made an income allowing them to contribute to their IRA. And you might also be asking yourself, well, can $8,000 contribution really make a difference when it comes to my retirement? And the answer is absolutely. So, here’s just a quick example. Suppose you’re 55 now and you plan to retire at 65 in 10 years. Kids are out of the house. They’ve flown the coupe already. You finally have a chance to focus on saving for your retirement so you can make a full $8,000 Roth IRA contribution annually until you retire. And let’s just say for making consistencies with this argument, you you’re going to have a 6% earnings per year, which is conservative compared to the most recent times. Still good earnings. So 6% per year. By the time you retire in 10 years, you’d have come up with more than $10,000 or more than $100,000 that at that rate. But remember, we’re planning for you to live until you’re 90 95. So, let’s say that you leave that account alone and it continues to earn 6% per year. You’re using the funds from your 401k and the money that you started saving when you were 20 to 65. These are funds that we’re putting towards the back half of retirement. So, let’s say that you leave that account alone and it continues to earn 6% per year. By the time you reach 85, even if you never put another dollar in after the first 10 years, you’d then have earned up to and turned it into an account of more than $350,000. Plus, pardon me, since you made your contribution to a Roth, that entire amount would be taxree. Be nice to have 350K that’s 100% taxree, wouldn’t it?
still think just $8,000 a year can’t make a difference. If you’re still thinking that, I hope this changes your mind. So, just think if you’re married though and you’re able to make that $8,000 contribution to both yours and your spouse’s IRA, well, now you have twice as much. This example uses an $8,000 annual contribution just for simplicity. Remember, it’s 8,600 right now. That number is probably only going to go up as years go by. So, if you’re still working, you have access to one or more plans throughout your current employer, you might be able to do even better. While the limits on contributions can vary depending on the type of plan, you know, 401ks, 403bs, 457s, simple IAS, SE IAS, they allow you to contribute much, much more than just regular IAS. And that secure act that we mentioned earlier introduced a new special ketchup. Remember, you get a catch-up starting at 50, but from the years of 60 to 63. For these kind of plans, it’s an additional 11,250 as opposed to an additional $8,000. So, it’s 24,500 as your contribution limit. When you’re 49 and younger when you’re 50, it goes up to 325, but once you’re 60 and 63, there’s that special catchup down here at the bottom. Now, you can contribute 35750 a year. But again, depends on your plans provisions. you can be eligible to receive employer contributions such as a company match or profit sharing that’s separate from your contributions. The real number if you’re doing your contributions plus your matches somewhere around 74 $75,000 a year. Now, of course, at some point, you’re likely to retire, and when you do, you’ll be faced with one of your first major retirement decisions. And what to do with the money that you’ve accumulated in your employer sponsored retirement plan. You know, in many cases, people choose to roll those funds over to a traditional IRA or a Roth IRA because they tend to offer greater control over one’s retirement funds. They’re not the only options, though, and such rollovers are not always the best move. And believe it or not, you may have as much as six different options for your employer sponsored retirement plans funds for whenever you leave work. And you can see them here on the screen. Each of these potential alternatives, they offer unique benefits and drawbacks. So, it’s usually a good idea to discuss your options with a financial professional. That way, you can make those savvy decisions that are best for you and your family.
All right. So getting money into your retirement accounts is only the first half of the story. Coming up with an efficient way of taking those funds out and avoiding costly mistakes is the other half. And this is far easier said than done, particularly when it comes to your traditional IAS, 401ks, 403bs, etc. In general, withdrawals from these accounts are taxed at ordinary income rates. Just like interest, your withdrawals are added to your income and taxed at whatever tax bracket you happen to find yourself in. And if your overall income is relatively low, you might have a low tax rate for your withdrawal. On the other hand, if your overall income is higher than when you were working, your tax rate will be higher and more of your IRA withdrawal will end up in Uncle Sam’s hands. Nobody wants that. But here’s a quick look at the tax brackets for single and joint filers for 2026. These numbers change every year with inflation, but you can find these online as well. One of the troubling aspects of IRA planning is that the tax rate in your future distributions, it’s unknown. Even if you can project your income with relative confidence, there’s no guarantee that tax rates will remain the same. And while it’s hard to find someone who doesn’t think that they paid too much in taxes, now the reality is that the top tax rates today are pretty low in historical context. So, take a look at this chart. See what I mean? When the income tax was first introduced in 1913, something that should have been eradicated in 1914, but I digress. The top rate was only 7%. But within just a few years, top rate had already skyrocketed to over 70%. Dropped back down to as low as 25 after World War after World War I. Then that top rate jumped to 63% in 1932. And from there wasn’t until more than 50 years had passed where in 1987 top tax rate finally dropped back below 50%. But he knows in the top bracket keep more of their income and they were forced to give over to Uncle Sam. Now of course not everyone pays that top rate. In fact it’s only very small percentage of taxpayers that do but it still affected median households because the second highest third and fourth were also much higher than they are today. That said, though, with our national debt currently at an all-time high, a budget that hasn’t been balanced since, I think, the Clinton administration, and fiscal troubles for many of our entitlement programs like Social Security, Medicare, it’s possible that tax rates could go up across the board. That makes coming up with that right plan even more important. So, to make matters even worse, if I haven’t scared you already, your IRA withdrawals can cost you in a lot more ways than just adding to your income. They can also cause you to be phased out of itemized deductions, personal exemptions, and various tax credits as well. They can increase your exposure to that 3.8% net investment income tax. If you take an IRA withdrawal, you might have to include more of your social security benefits and income and then causing your social securityities now to be taxed and your Medicare Part B premiums can increase. And if you haven’t heard of Irma yet, IR Ma, that will be your Medicare cost one day. And those grow dependent on how much money you live off of in retirement essentially. That’s just the beginning. But if you want to try to avoid these issues, you need to make a plan. And one way to minimize the tax impact of retirement account withdrawals is to avoid taking withdrawals altogether. That allows your retirement money to grow tax deferred and keeps that nasty taxable income off of your tax return for as long as possible. You can’t put off taking withdrawals forever, though, because once you reach a certain age, the law will require you to begin taking what are known as required minimum distributions or RMDs for short. So, if you have a pre-tax 401k or a pre-tax IRA, Uncle Sam is going to say, “Well, now that you’re 73 or 75, it depends on when you were born, but now you’re this age, you’ve had these funds in this account pre-tax all these years, and you haven’t paid me yet. I’m now going to require you to take money out of these accounts.” It’s not fun. A lot of people don’t know about these ear early enough, and that’s why there’s some other things to do. But if you were born before 1960, you have to take it at 73. If you’re born after 1960, you don’t have to start taking them until 75.
But a final thought before we move on. If you don’t take out the right amount of your minimum required minimum distribution, the IRS will penalize you 25% of the amount that you did not take out. So, if you were supposed to take out 10 grand and you didn’t take out 10 grand at all, the IRS will penalize you 2500 bucks.
So, to calculate your RMD, they have these tables. Tables change every year. Let’s make it simple. If you just turned 75 this year, I’m sorry, 73 this year because it’s still the 73 folks. If you haven’t taken it out, you haven’t heard of R&Ds yet. Easy to find out. You find the uniform life expectancy table. It’s on their website. All you do is you take your December 31st balance from the end of 2025 and divide it by 26.5. That’s your amount you’re supposed to take out this year. For next year, for 2027, you base it off of your remaining balance from 2026 and so on and so forth. But the number changes every year. They change the numbers in these tables, but it also changes each year that you go. If you have more questions about it, just give me a ring. Happy to help. Of course, most people just don’t think about things in terms of factors or life expectancy. So, just here’s a chart. Think you’ll help find this one helpful. It shows the approximate percentage you need to take out of your IRA from 73 to 90 just in order to steer clear of that 50% penalty. But if you look, you’ll see that each year the percentage you need to take out does increase. That doesn’t necessarily mean you need to take out more money each year than the last though, as that also depends on how much your IRA gains or loses. So if it gains more, you got to take out more. If it goes down, you got to take out less. But RMDs can actually get much more complicated. And as we’ve already discussed, the penalties for making a mistake can be pretty severe. And with that in mind, let me tell you about three of the most common R&D mistakes people make so you can avoid making them. Just remember part of any savvy IRA plan is just minimizing these cost and mistakes. So one common RMD mistake people make is incorrectly aggregating their RMDs between different types of retirement accounts. For example, suppose you have a 401k and an IRA. After calculating your RMDs from each account comes out to 4,000 and 3,000 respectively for a total of $7,000. Now imagine your IRA over here is earning a higher rate of return than your 401k. might be tempted to just pull all that seven out 7,000 from your 401k, leave your IRA alone and just call it a day. After all, what’s the difference? They’re both retirement accounts and whether you take 7K from just your 401k or 4,000 from your 401k, 3,000, it’s the same impact in your tax return, right? That’s logical thinking. Federal government doesn’t really think all that logically most of the time. So, the tax rules are anything but logical and they specifically prohibit you from doing that. An RMD for one type of retirement account like an IRA can never be taken from an RMD of another account like a 401k. Another common RMD mistake is aggregating your RMDs between spouses. Same thing as the first example. Husband can’t take out the RMDs all out of his account or all out of the wife’s account and say that that’s good for the husband and the other spouse. You both have to do it. But a third common R&D mistake is forgetting to take an R&D altogether. Just remember, it’s a 25% penalty on the amount you weren’t supposed to take out on the amount you’re supposed to take out. If you’re supposed to take out 10 grand and you don’t take it out at all, you owe Uncle Sam $2,500. I don’t like it any more than you guys. Just the rules. Let’s vote against these next time. Now, one strategy to minimize the impact of taxes on your retirement savings is to avoid taking distributions from your IRA for as long as possible. And this allows your retirement money to enjoy its favorable tax deferred status for as long as possible. It also helps to keep income off of your return, which as you’ve already learned, not only helps keep your income tax bill lower, but can also help prevent increases in other costs tied to your income. There are some major downsides to this approach, though. Most notably, as your IRA gets bigger, so does your problem. You know, think about it. If your tax bracket remains about the same, your IRA grows, so does the amount that you’re eventually going to be required to take out by Uncle Sam later, you’re going to have more RMDs and be thrown in bigger tax brackets. So, it’s much different from other things you may be used to. So, imagine you buy a house for 200K and have a $50,000 mortgage. If the house doubles in value to 400K, does your mortgage increase to 100K? Of course not. But you get to reap all the benefits of that appreciation. But that’s not the way it works with IRA and retirement accounts like 401ks. If those accounts double in value, you don’t get to keep all the gains. Uncle Sam is well, he feels he’s entitled to his share. Plus, by waiting to take distributions for as long as possible, the required minimum distributions later on will be larger, and this could increase the impact of some of those side effects we’ve talked about. Thankfully, there are ways to fix this. So, that to go back to the mortgage analogy for a moment, you can own your IRA free and clear so that only you benefit from future appreciation, and it’s called a Roth IRA conversion. Many of you may have heard of this before from some of our other webinars, but it’s our next savvy IRA planning strategy. So, a Roth IRA conversion is the name given to a special type of transaction where you can move money from your pre-tax retirement account to a Roth IRA. When you make a Roth conversion, the amount of money you convert is just added to your tax return for the year. It’s taxable whatever income tax bracket you’re you happen to be in. But here, let’s take Jill. Jill has 100K in a traditional IRA. Like to convert it to a Roth. We’ll talk more about why she might not want to do that in a moment. But if Jill moves forward with her 100K Roth IRA conversion, she’ll have to add 100K of income to her tax return for that year, which will be taxable at whatever rate Jill happens to be be. Because this is a big decision and can have a significant impact in your taxes, it is always best to discuss this option with both both your CPA, tax repairer, whichever on your tax side, and your financial professional as well. But why would you voluntarily choose to make one of these Roth IRA conversions and pay taxes before you have to? Well, there’s in fact a lot of reasons. Perhaps the most common reason is one we’ve already discussed and it’s just to pay off Uncle Sam now so that you own your retirement account free and clear for life. Just remember with the Roth IRA, you have the potential for future tax-free withdrawals of everything in your account. So, right now, we have the lowest tax rates in quite some time. and we’re scared, we’re all kind of worried that they might go up one day considering our current balance sheets in this country. So, if they have to go up later, let’s say you convert it to 12% now, but that 12% bracket goes up to 18. Wow, you just saved a lot of money in taxes. But remember, if you’re over 59 and a half and you’ve ever had any Roth IRA for more than five years, then all those withdrawals from those Roth IAS will be tax and penaltyfree for a while. Something else to keep in mind is that unlike Roth IRA contributions, there are no restrictions on who can make Roth IRA conversions. You can be you can’t be too old, you can’t be too young, you can be working, you can be retired. There are no minimum amounts of incomes or maximum amount of incomes you can have. You understand what I mean? If you want to convert your IRA or 401k to a Roth IRA, there’s nothing in the tax rules that will stop you from doing so. This is very pertinent. Most people are good candidates for a Roth conversion. I would say of the folks that I meet with, nine out of 10 folks are good are good candidates for a Roth conversion to some degree.
Now, the potential tax-free nature of the Roth IRA may also provide you with additional benefits such as a hedge against tax rates rising in the future. As we mentioned, you know, when it comes to retirement, there are a lot of unknowns. So, what will the market do? What will inflation be like? what will your tax rate be and so on and so forth. But the last one, taxes, is a major concern for many retirees and one we’ve been talking about throughout this webinar, but a Roth IRA conversion can help manage that risk by paying taxes at today’s known rates. If tax rates rise in the future, tax-free distributions from Roth IAS will be even more valuable. Of course, if you think your tax rate will be lower in retirement, then that’s something that should be covered and considered when having that run in a financial plan. Also, since Roth IRA distributions in retirement are generally tax-free, they typically don’t impact the other things tied to your income that we discussed earlier. So, if we’re trying to keep our social security fully tax-free, having a nice chunk of taxfree money that won’t be added to your income really helps you hedge right there. Another big benefit of the Roth IRA and one that many retirees do find attractive is that Roth IAS also have no RMDs associated with them. So remember all that bad talk we were having with the RMDs and required minimum distributions. Uncle Sam wants this cut, you already paid them. There’s no RMDs on a Roth IRA. So for good legacy planning purposes or wanting to leave a good amount of money to your spouse should anything happen to you first Roth conversions they get to inherit this and they have no RMDs on their inheritance in this case they get to take those funds on tax-free and it can be passed down generations and generations and never be touched
in the tax cuts and jobs act however it does eliminate the reccharacterization option. This really isn’t a big deal, but for it eliminates the recarerization option for conversions made in 2018 and later. So, if you convert your Roth IRA now or in the future, you’re stuck with that decision. But if you are going to make the decision to convert to a Roth IRA, you’re more than likely fully in and committed to it. It’s not that big of a deal here. But even if your tax bill is higher than you thought or if the conversion accidentally phased you out of a credit or if your investments dropped in value, no matter the reason, you just can’t reccharacterize them. But with that in mind, it’s very important that you are sure you want to convert as mentioned your Roth IRA before doing so. So here’s three questions to ask yourself before converting. Do you have a rough idea the conversion’s impacting your tax bill? Financial planning can help you out with that. Do you have a a plan to pay those resulting taxes? Another thing that a financial plan can help you with. And do you have a reasonable expectation that the benefits of prepaying your taxes like this make sense in your overall plan? A financial plan can help you with that. But to do a Roth conversion, your answer should be yes to all these questions. And one savvy conversion strategy might be helpful called filling up a bracket. So look, if you are in the lower end of the 22% bracket and you have all this space to go until you hit 24, fill up that 22% bracket. Don’t you, if you’re at the 24% bracket level and you want to convert a lot of money, well, you might be reaching into the 32% bracket. Doesn’t make a lot of sense to pay 8 points more on top of what you’re already being taxed. Just stay within your bracket. A lot of times a fixed rate works as well. It’s a fixed amount that you come up with your financial professional, but filling up the bracket allows you to stay within your tax bracket while converting and just filling up that amount. And that generally is working with a team between your tax preparer, CPA, as well as your financial advisor.
And Roth IRA conversions can be especially helpful and useful if you’ve had a low income year. And for example, if you’re a business owner with unusually low sales one year, um you’re paying high non-recurring medical bills. So now you have that big tax deduction. Or maybe you’re retired but not yet receiving social security benefits or a pension or an IRA distribution yet. These are questions to ask to see if a Roth conversion is a good move for you. And again, our planning software can help you figure all of this out. But of course, these strategies aren’t for everyone. As you can see, there’s no guarantee that the conversion will achieve the intended result. This is a disclaimer, but again, nine out of 10 folks are good candidates for this. And does a full conversion always make sense? No. But having a nice pool of tax-free money, boom, money that you can reach into whenever you need tax-free. You’re not jumping tax brackets now. you can avoid jumping a bracket from reaching into an IRA more by reaching into your Roth IRA. It offers you a lot more flexibility. You’ve now had another basket to put some eggs in. And there’s a good chance that at some point during your life, you’re going to want to move around some of your retirement money. Maybe it’ll be done as part of a Roth conversion. Maybe it’ll be to make a new investment. Maybe to work with a new adviser. Whatever the reason, you should be aware of how to move retirement money so that you don’t make costly mistakes that could completely derail your retirement. In general, there are two ways you can move retirement money. You can either move it directly or indirectly.
Moving money directly though is usually the savvy choice. So, look, all it is is you’re moving money from a 401k to an IRA or from an IRA to another IRA. If you’re doing it directly, let’s say you have an account with Fidelity and you want to move it to Alliant Retirement Investment Services, you have Fidelity, make the check out to the new custodian for your benefit. No problems. Everything goes into your new IRA. No penalties or issues. However, when you do a direct one, they’re going to make the check out to you, and it’s on you to then move it over. But if you don’t do it within 60 days, you’re going to have to claim everything as income of the year. So if you’re moving over $500,000 from your 401k to your IRA, if you do it directly, there’s no chance of anything bad happening. If you do it indirectly where they send it to you and then you send it to the other folks, Uncle Sam is not that nice to say, “Hey, even if you lost the check, sorry, 60-day rule. You can have the new check issued, but I hope you get it in before the 60-day deadline, or else I’m adding half a million dollars to your income for the year.” And now whatever income you had that year has half a million dollars added on to it and you’re paying at the 36% tax bracket rather than the 12.
This is what it looks like whenever I say doing the direct one. New custodian for your benefit though. But another essential component of any savvy IRA plan is just making sure that you coordinate your IRA planning with your overall retirement, estate, tax, education, and financial plans. And your IRA and other retirement accounts can impact each of these areas. It’s just important to factor those things into your planning. And some of you may have all of your savings in retirement accounts, but many of you probably have some of your savings in IRA, 401ks, and you know, with other savings in a non-retirement account. And if that’s the case for you, one savvy strategy you may want to consider is coordinating your IRA with your overall plan and carefully selecting which of your investments are purchased with IRA money and which investments are purchased with non-retirement account money as well. But doing so could help you meaningfully lower your tax bill. We can show you how that’s done, too. But here’s an example of what I mean. Let’s imagine that you have 100K in an IRA and 100K in a nonIRRA account like a brokerage. Let’s also imagine that you want to purchase 100K of bonds with a hypothetical interest rate of 4% and $100,000 of stock that will pay hypothetical qualified dividends of 4%. Also assume that you plan to live off of that income in these brackets and that you’re in the 24% range. So in the first scenario, you see all the stocks are purchased inside the IRA account and generate 4 grand of qualified dividends. And in general, qualified dividends receive special tax treatment and are taxed at a long-term capital gains rate. These rates are lower than ordinary income tax rates, generally about 15%. However, because this investment was made inside an IRA and all withdrawals from an IRA are taxed at ordinary income tax rates, if you take a withdrawal of that 4,000 of qualified dividends, there will be tax at your hypothetical 24% ordinary rate resulting in a bill of $960. But in the same scenario, you have 100k of the bonds that also generate 4 grand. Bond interest is tax at ordinary income, too. So that means that you’ll owe another $960 of tax in that income, bring your total bill to $1,920.
But in this second scenario, bonds purchased or made inside an IRA, they generate the same 4 grand. Everything is the same, but different story because now we’re going to be taxed at capital gains here because we put it in the correct account. It’s saving you 360 bucks. You just lowered your tax bill by 24% just now. We went from 1920 to$,560. It’s all about the right placement, too. So, make sure that you’re making informed decisions with all of the right information. Don’t make any impulsive decisions here. Use a professional.
And of course, you should be aware that anytime you’re dealing with investments, there’s no guarantee there’s they’re going to perform as expected. Well, I don’t anticipate that special tax rate for long-term capital gains to be eliminated anytime soon. There’s no crystal ball to predict with what Congress will do in the future. And if there was that crystal ball, and if I had it, um, I’d be in a much taller building right now. Now, another way for your IRA planning needs to be coordinated with your overall retirement plan is your social security claiming strategy. The decision of when to file for social security is one that far too many retirees make without thoroughly evaluating their options first. My last webinar was on this. Do not make that decision lightly. Have a plan made before you do that. You could make a very costly mistake depending on when you take your social security. It’s a major mistake and one that in some cases can cost you six figures plus of income over the course of your retirement. Now, the decision of when to claim social security is a very personal decision and one that varies significantly from person to person, couple to couple. That said, many retirement experts today believe that too many people claim social security way too soon. Remember, social security benefits are guaranteed to last your entire lifetime, no matter how long you live. Benefits are generally increased from one year to the next through cost of living adjustments. But additionally, delaying receiving Social Security benefits past what’s called your full retirement age, 66 or 67 for most of you, can allow you to earn an additional 8% increase in payments each year until you turn 70 through what are known as deferred credits. And for these reasons and more, it can be beneficial to claim Social Security benefits later than you initially planned for.
but you have to eat in the meantime. And that might require you to pull money from your IRA in the interimm to help cover your current living expenses. And retirees sometimes opt not to do this because they say, “Well, what if I die early? I’ve spent my IRA money, which takes away from my heirs and I’ve gotten little or nothing for it.” And while that’s certainly something to consider, here are two reasons you may want to give that approach a second thought. um you know a report from 2012 concluded that social security is the cheapest if uh one of the cheapest if not the cheapest annuities available and that might sound a little funny after all you don’t buy social security in a way though you kind of do if you use IRA money to hold off on claiming social security for say a year that’s kind of the price you pay to get that higher benefit and if you compare that price and increased benefit to what you can get from commercial annuity providers it’s almost always cheaper But another reason it can make sense to draw from your IRA in order to help delay claiming social security benefits is that social security benefits are generally more tax efficient than IRA withdrawals. So remember when you take money from an IRA, the entire amount is generally added to your income and taxed at whatever rate you might be at the time. But in contrast, social security benefits are different. They may be anywhere from 15% tax-free all the way up to 100% of them are taxfree. So, the key point for you here is that trading a dollar of IRA income on your tax return for a dollar of social security income or social security benefits will almost always leave you with a lower tax bill, more money to spend. But let me just make that point again. Social Security is taxed differently. To learn more, you can just reach out. Be happy to go over that with you. All right, time to move on to the next point and that’s coordinating your IRA planning with your estate planning. And in most estate plans, there are really two primary goals. First is to make sure that your assets passed to your tenant beneficiaries. And secondly, that they are passed to them as efficient as possible. And when it comes to IRA, 401ks, and other retirement accounts, that’s done with one form in particular, your beneficiary form. And I really can’t emphasize how important this form is. Again, time and time again, people fail to update these forms after major life events such as births, deaths, marriages, and divorces. Many times, people think that because they’ve updated their will, everything is taken care of. But that’s not so. So, for example, if you have your ex-wife or ex-husband named on your IRA beneficiary form, but your will has been updated to say all your assets go to your children or your current wife upon or husband upon your death. Guess who’s getting your IRA? That’s right, your ex. And I can’t tell you how often this happens to people. That’s why it’s so important to keep updated copies of your beneficiary forms with all of your other important estate planning documents. And we’ll cover this again in the next webinar about estate planning in October. But some of you might have five, six, seven different 401ks out there. And some are from different jobs from the 80s and 70s. um you might have been married to a different person then or your feelings for whoever your beneficiary for back then your beneficiary back then was those feelings might have changed. Check up on all those accounts. Sometimes it makes sense to start consolidating in that case.
All right. So there’s a couple different types of IRA beneficiaries. Last time I did this webinar it we just covered way too long. So, I’m going to go through it pretty quickly here cuz we’re already at 13 minutes to the hour. But if you give it to your wife or if you give your if you pass away and you give everything to your spouse, they get to take it on as if they were you. Um there’s no problem there. They just take it on. They continue your RMDs or they just get to inherit that Roth altogether. If they’re eligible, you don’t want them to be eligible. Eligible means that or I’m sorry, let me just do this one then. Non-eligible designated beneficiaries are your children or your nieces and nephews. They have to take out those account those funds if they’re pre-tax like an IRA or 401k. They have to take that out over a 10-year period. Well, it’s not that bad. It is though. More than likely, they’re in their prime earning years. They’re in a 24% tax bracket. They take it on and now they have to take the 100 grand plus out a year for over 10 years. Now they’re paying tax 32% bracket. And great, yes, they got free money, but your money that you gave them is now being t of it is being taken away by Uncle Sam where you could have converted it at the 12% rate and they could have had it in a Roth IRA and kept it forever. Well, this eligible and then next we have the eligible designated beneficiary. They get the same treatment as a spouse essentially. You might think, well, I’ll just make my kids that and that’s not how it works. Um, eligible designated beneficiaries essentially means if you have a disabled child or someone who’s chronically ill as your beneficiary, then they get to have better treatment than healthy children in that case. If you want to learn more about that, talk to me. Um, but again, your spouse gets to take it on as if it was always theirs. your children have to take everything out or your nieces and nephews have to take everything out over 10 years, probably in their prime earning years, and they’re going to be paying a lot of taxes on that inheritance. And if they’re eligible designated beneficiaries, uh they’re a minor. More than likely, they’re either a minor, disabled, or chronically ill, they get to have better tax treatment.
All right, we’re just going to click through these because this one just does take a while, though.
Yeah, one question many boomers do ask is whether or not they should leave their IAS to a trust. And trusts are certainly good at providing post-death control, and if that’s a major concern for you, it’s certainly something to consider. However, naming a trust as your IRA beneficiary adds considerable complexity to your estate plan and if drafted properly, trusts can be treated as designated beneficiaries and preserve the stretch IRA. So, all too often, however, they do not meet the specific requirements outlined by the IRS and they still end up having to follow those less favorable rules that are mentioned earlier. So, just because you’re throwing it all in a trust doesn’t mean you’re avoiding that 10-year RMD.
And so again, back to the spouses, many name their spouse the beneficiary. If your spouse is your sole IRA beneficiary, then he or she will generally have several options after inheriting that, but they include choosing your main as a beneficiary of your account as well as making what is known as a spousal rollover. We’ll talk about that. We already covered it.
So with that, we’ve come to our last savvy IRA planning strategy. It’s off topic. It is important though. It’s one that you should all know, but for whatever reason, it’s still an industry, so it’s still there. People seem to forget. That’s to always do your homework before making any decisions with your IRA, especially when it comes to investments. IAS are often the target of schemes and scams because hey, let’s face it, that’s where a lot of people’s savings are. Your house and your retirement funds are going to be the largest part of your estate more than likely. And I know it and you know it, but you know who else knows that? It’s the scammers. So, in recent years, SEC’s always issued a lot of alerts warning certain IRA owners. They may be the target of scams. and the IRS has even put out publications with it. But the IRS does not approve IRA investments and respon that’s was made in response to many fraudulent promoters claiming that their IRA investments were somehow given the green light by the IRS. It’s BS. Just reach out to us. We’ll help you through that. If you see anything that is questionable coming across your email or anything you have questions about, whether it be with Fidelity, Vanguard, somebody that’s not us, we’re here to help you. You’re our members. you own this place, just give us a call. We’re here to help.
So, we’ve certainly covered a lot of ground today and you should have plenty of food for thought. As you probably realize by this point, IRA planning is a lot more complicated than most people realize. Let’s face it, deciding what strategies are best for your IRA crosses into just about every area of planning, from tax planning to investment planning to estate planning. and few retirees are aware of just how critical IRA planning is and even fewer have taken the time to truly evaluate all the issues and develop a comprehensive solution. So hopefully we’ve helped answer some questions for you today, but chances are you still have questions to um some other questions and that’s okay. You know, we’re here to help. So I’m sending out a poll right now. Say yes, no, maybe. So um it says Malcolm on there, but my name is Baptiste. Pleasure. Um, I’ll get that fixed. But look, please answer the poll. We’re here to help. It’s just a no cost, no obligation. Here to help our members, not here to sell you anything. We’re here to help our members make sure they can cross that finish line. I know your big bank’s not doing this for you. We know your other credit unions aren’t here to help you out with this as much. We are. Please let us know how we can do be of assistance. More than likely, do a financial plan. See if a Roth conversion is there to assist you. Find ways to fill in your income gaps. But let’s help you maximize your IRA. These are funds that you have been working on and saving up tirelessly all these years. You’ve been saying, “I can’t do this this month because I still need to put 2,3 $400 a month away to this IRA, this 401k.” You’re coming to the finish line. Let’s make sure that you’re all polished up and spruced up to retire and live to be 95 and 100. So, uh, everybody, we have about 60% have answered. If the other 40%, go ahead and answer. Again, you’re not going to hurt my feelings if you say no or not at this time. You will hurt my feelings if you do not answer the poll, though, just because that’s what makes me look so good with my boss with my great presentation skills. Um, we’re going to get into questions here in a second, folks. Tax planning. Taxes are going to be one of your biggest expenses, if not your biggest expense, especially if the house is paid off. Taxes will be your biggest expense in retirement. Join me for my next one on tax planning in a couple weeks. And then estate planning. If we’re all at this point of coming up in retirement, you’re past the point of needing to get your estate done. So, if you haven’t gotten everything in order, come give us a holler. We’re here to help. We even have tools to where you basically get to use a robo lawyer to create your trust and your will and it’s free to use if you’re a client of ours. So with that, I will start taking some questions. Please look at the Q&A or the chat section. Uh about 10% more to go to answer the poll. If you can’t find it, it might be behind some of your popups or might be behind the presentation. Sometimes that happens, but please answer the poll. I’d really appreciate that.
Well, here’s a good one. 85% of social security is taxed, but is 85 or 100% of social security used to calculate Irma? Fantastic question. Two different things. Up to 85% of your social security can be taxed as mentioned earlier. It can be nothing. Depends on how much you’re taking out outside of your um social security. So, it’s your provisional income is what social security is measuring. And if your provisional income is below X threshold, none of your social security is going to be taxed. If it’s to the next threshold, then up to 50% of it can be taxed. And if it’s above that, 85% of your social security can be taxed based off of provisional income. When it comes to calculating Irma, that is based off of your modified adjusted gross income, which I’m not the tax pro here or tax preparer here. I do a lot of tax planning. We can cover that. But if you’re modified adjusted gross income, I think it’s for this year, it’s 109 for single or 216 or 218 for joint. If you’re below that, you’re in the lowest bracket. You pay nothing for part D and I think you’re paying 200 bucks a month for your Medicare and it only goes up from there. So find ways and we can help you find that. We’ll help you find ways to stay in that 22 24% bracket while still staying in the lowest Irma bracket because Irma gets expensive. Medicare gets very expensive as you go. um if the first bracket and the second bracket difference is about a h 100red bucks per person per month but the third bracket is about double of the first to where you’ll be paying about $400 plus dollars a month and so in Medicare um probably more than you’re paying right now your workplace retirement plan by a lot so consider that folks if you don’t mind let’s just need three more people to answer the poll and I will be looking good here any other questions to ask please go ahead and do that go ahead and identify the Q&A in the chat section.
You mentioned nine out of 10 people
You mentioned nine out of 10 people might be candidates for Roth. Yeah, about about 90% of the time I make um hundreds of financial plans a year, if not a thousand. Um, whenever I do a financial plan, I will show people a Roth conversion optimization strategy that comes after having a discussion with somebody, finding out what they’re comfortable with converting, finding out how much they convert. We’ll find out what the max is without jumping certain brackets, finding out what they’re really comfortable with and paying additionally in taxes where you’ve pulled that money. I like to just do that as a full comprehensive financial planning. and just an added feature I’ll throw in there, but we’ll come up with a personalized plan on whatever you’re most comfortable with and seeing if that works. And then our strategy tool will show you, hey, you can convert this amount at this amount, you’ll grow your account value by that much more, and you’ll save this much in taxes. Because once you convert money to tax-free and you’re getting 8% per year, you get to have that full 8% in gain to yourself. Whereas in your pre-tax funds, that 8% growth, well, quarter of it’s going to Uncle Sam still. So that’s how Roth can outpace a traditional in value. And then again, it’s a great legacy planning tool because whoever you give it to, they don’t have to touch it. They don’t have to pull RMDs from it, and they’ll never have to pay taxes on it. So learn more. Let me know, folks. One more person needs to answer the poll. If you just walked away to go grab water, it’s okay. I’ll forgive you. I still had better numbers than the rest of the folks in my team. Um, guys, thank you very much for joining today. Look, I’ll stick back for another minute. Uh, answer anybody else’s questions in case anybody got shy. Um, but I’m here to answer any questions, but join me for my next webinar and the one after that. If you’re coming up on retirement, please reach out. I didn’t even put this terrible photo up yet, but here’s my um that photo is from 60 pounds ago, but here’s my information. Uh, I have a different phone number, but if you call it, I’ll try to answer. Best way to get in touch with me is via email right there. And if you’d like to schedule an appointment with me, there’s a QR code. Feel free to take a photo of this right now. My educational background, I studied I’ve been in finance my entire career, but I studied international trade and finance in college. So I I studied macro and microlevel economics at international level as well as local.
That’s a good question. I’ve actually never had anybody ask me about my educational background.
I also speak Spanish as a second language, too. I don’t know if that’s really impressive or not. I do live in Texas. That does come with it. But, um, I minored in Spanish while I also studied international trade and finance.
I also add to it that I double mate minored in political science as well, but that’s not that impressive.
All right, folks. Well, those are all that’s all the questions today. Man, I usually get about 20 of them. Well, look, thank you guys all again. Looking forward to seeing y’all soon. Please join me for my next webinar. Have a wonderful day. Happy Labor Day. I know we’re all amped up. You guys enjoy it. I’m glad. No, webinars are not recorded. I apologize. That’s a compliance thing. You know, whenever you’re handling other people’s money, there’s a lot of regulation, which is good. Wolf Wall Street days are over with. Um, but we’re very highly regulated. We have some webinars that are recorded, but those are our SEG ones that we give to the uh company partners. You know, we used to be United Airlines Credit Union solely, but now we’re open to the public. as well as we’ll have certain groups called SEGs that are companies that we have good relationships with like we we do Tesla now. Tesla is one of our SEGs as well as United. There’s a lot of them in there but we only have recorded webinars for our SEGs but you can find those on YouTube I believe.
And hey, if there was something you missed from today, if you joined late, if there’s somebody else that you want to see this information, member or not, send them my way using this information. I’ll go through this info with them. Be happy to. Part of my job. All right, folks. Signing off. Happy Labor Day. Thank you all very much. Be safe this weekend.
-
How to build the ULTIMATE WORM BIN! A continuous flow through VERMICOMPOSTING SYSTEM!
Welcome back to the homestead, everybody. If you garden, you know how important worms are to the health of your soil. Well, what you see behind me is a continuous flow worm bin that I’m going to show you how to build so you can grow your own worms and produce the best soil you possibly can.
Before
we jump in, wanted to let you know there is a materials list below in the description as well as a cut list. All of this stuff I found at Home Depot for just under 200 bucks. So, the first thing we’re going to do is we’re going to cut our eight foot sidewalls down just a bit so that when we build our top, our screen top, it can fit nice and flush over it. To do that, we’re going to take off just about an inch and 3/4.
All right, we got our sidewalls cut. This is going to be our in walls. And we’re going to cut this to 27 in. The reason being is because I want my overall bin, the overall width of it to be 2 1/2 ft.
Okay. So, there’s our basic layout. Let’s go ahead and screw these together. When you’re drilling these screws in, these are 3-in screws. You’re gonna want to pre-drill first because you’re right on the edge here. So, it’s just nice to not have any cracks in this thing. So, I’m gonna put four screws in each side here.
All right, we got our frame all done. The next thing we’re going to do is we’re going to create the poles that go at the bottom of this bin. Now, you’ll learn exactly what that’s for later on in the video. Um, but for now, just think of it as the bottom of the worm bin. To do that, we have 1/2 in conduit, metal conduit, and we have a 13/16 drill bit. So, we’re going to drill a hole about every inch and a half along the bottom here, all along this bottom on both sides of the sidewalls. So to do that, we’re going to measure down on one side. We’re going to say right at about 9 and 1/2 in from the top is going to be the where our holes are going to be. Again, 9 and 1/2 in. We’ll strike a line right at this 9 and 1/2 in mark.
Okay. So, we’ll go ahead and make our marks for our conduit. To do that, we’re going to come 3 and 1/2 in over to do our first mark for the first hole to be drilled. Uh, and then after that, we’re just going to go 2 in every single time. So, lay our tape measure out and go 2 in. So,
all right, we got our holes marked. Let’s go ahead and drill a ton of holes.
All right, holes are done on one side. We got to do it on the other side. Okay, so we got our um holes drilled. Everything looks nice. Set the conduit in there. Looks good. Um the next step is we have to cut our pieces of conduit. We need 45 of these. And I suggest to measure them on your own. For me, I’m going to do 29 and a half. That’s kind of the median number between these two sideboards. Again, measure yours because your sideboards could be bowed or whatever it is. Make sure you measure before you cut. So, let’s cut 45 of these 29 1/2 in pieces of conduit.
Okay, so we got our conduit in. Next thing we’re going to do is cover our holes on each side with our one by two.
These are just inch and 5/8. Okay, that’s going to hold our piece of the conduit in. And then we’ll do one on the other side. All right, we got our sides on. Again, this is just to stop the conduit from being able to get out on either side. Got those on each side. All right, the next thing we’re going to do is attach or cut and attach our legs. And I’m doing my legs to 46 in. What you doing? What are you doing? I’m doing my legs to 46 in. So, it’ll be about 36 and 3/4 off the ground.
So, we’re going to meet it flush on the top. That’s why I said it’s going to be countertop height or about countertop height when it’s all done. I’m just going to put one in here. And I’m using uh 2 and 1/2 in screws this time.
And we’re just going to level it out.
All right, we are done. The main kind of structure here. I like it. I like the height. Uh my wife asked me why is it so tall? And the reason I built it so tall or put the legs so tall is because a lot of the work that you’re going to be doing is underneath. So, a lot of the laborous work is going to be underneath. So, the next step is we’re going to be making our screened top. I wanted an extra layer of protection from bugs and stuff like that. And so, we’re going to be tacking together uh this one by two around the whole edge. And then, we’re going to be stapling a screen on top.
I’m just taking a good amount of wood glue, putting it on there. And we’re just
brad nailing this together.
All right. So, we got our top stapled and glued together. I found this at Home Depot. This is just some It’s like screen, mosquito screen, bug screen, whatever. It’s 36 in wide and 25 ft long. So, we’re going to take this and I’m just going to staple it on top of that uh top frame that we just made. You could use some batten tape like like you would use on a greenhouse.
just to secure it a little more.
But I’m not going to do that.
All right, we got our top done. Screen is on. So, this will add another just an extra layer of protection against the bugs. Um, because this is going to go in our basement and we want to keep the bugs to a minimum. The next step is we are going to add hinges to the back here. These are just some surface mounted hinges that I had laying around. All
right. So, we got our worm bin in the basement, but before we start filling it up, I wanted to add a base layer of just about 4 in of compost. We have some compost that’s been sitting over here for quite a while, but it’s a little bit too thick. It’s got too many big chunks in it. So, what I’m going to do is I’m going to sift it or seve it through this screener right here. This is a/4 in screener. And this is going to take the consistency from something like this to something like this, much finer. And this will be a much better bedding for the worms.
Okay, so now we got our nice fine compost. This is going to be a great bedding material.
But before we put it in our uh worm bin, we’re going to give it a little water. We’re going to just soak it down just a little bit. We’re not going to overdo it. We’re not going to drench it. We’re just going to get it a little bit moist so that when it goes into the worm bin, everything’s a little bit saturated. is
we grow. All right. And that’s kind of the finished product there. You can see it doesn’t fall apart as easy. It’s got good moisture in it. So, we’ll take this down and put it in our bin. Okay. So, we’re in the basement now. And this is where the worm bin is going to stay permanently. Couple key things. Uh it’s nice to have a light right over where the worms are so you can really do a good inspection. Uh you can feed them. You can see what’s going on. So the first thing we’re going to do now that we have it in place is we’re going to take some like a roll of craft paper basically. Um I got this at again at Home Depot. Uh it’s just some masking paper for painting. And we’re going to roll out two layers on the bottom on top of our conduit here.
So once you got it all kind of situated, you’re just going to soak it down.
Now all we’re going to do is just start dumping our soil in.
You’ll always be my every second, every day.
All right, so we got our bedding down. I am super impressed with the way this compost screened. Um it is uh soaked with water and so we got good moisture, not too much. So the next step guys, we are going to put our worms inside of our bin. Now this is just a really small kind of portion of worms that we got started off with from a friend. And so we’re going to go ahead and put those in here. But I have about a thousand more worms coming next week. And then when they come, I’ll go ahead and put those in there. All right. And here is our kind of temporary. This was our temporary holding bin. You can see
they’re all down in here. We got some nice chopped up watermelon.
Probably get a handful in here.
We got something in here.
I’m going to start them on this edge over here.
Love
Me and Isaiah got most of the worms in here. Hopefully all of them. I didn’t want to dump the whole bucket in because it has really thick compost in it. I wanted to keep everything pretty fine. And like I said, we have 1,000 worms coming next week. We’re going to put in here. But for the last step, all we’re going to do, this side’s pretty good and wet, but we just added a little bit more compost on this side. So, I’m just going to do a quick
drench over here. So, the last step we’re going to do is we are going to put something over top of the bedding. For us, that’s going to be that craft paper. Again, we’re just going to use that craft paper and put it on top. You can use a lot of different items. Um, a lot of people use plastic, clear plastic. The good thing about clear plastic is worms, uh, they can’t tell up from down. And so the way that they do that is by light. And so a lot of people will come and they’ll put lights on the side of their worm bin, which we’ll probably do. We’ll come back and do that because it drives them more down into the uh into the interior of the soil. So let’s grab that craft paper and lay it on.
The other good thing that adding a covering to the top does is it keeps the moisture in your soil. And then the other beneficial thing is that it just keeps down on the flies. So obviously we’re in our basement. We don’t want a ton of flies. Um we have this added layer of protection for the screen so they don’t get through and down into the soil or out.
So obviously if you’re using craft paper or any sort of cardboard or anything like that, it’s going to break down over time. So we’ll probably have to replace this every once in a while, which is fine. So that’s it, guys. We are done with our worm bin setup. Let’s go ahead and close the top.
Before I close this video, I want to take a minute to address a couple questions that might come up as you’re watching this video. So, the first one is this is, like I said before, a continuous flow through system. So, that means as the worms break down this area up here, they produce worm castings. Obviously, the worm castings come and they end up on the bottom of your worm bin. And then
when you’re ready to harvest, you take a tool kind of like this one, whatever works for you, just so that when you place it in between your pieces of conduit, it kind of lines up with the underside of the soil. And then all you do is you pull backwards and you rake out the worm castings and they fall into these bins. So that’s how the continuous flowth through system works. That’s why it’s continuous. You never have to dump anything. You never have to change anything. This system is going to last forever. So, that’s a really cool aspect of this worm bin. The next question I want to address is the height of this bin. Now, there’s other models out there you can find on the internet that do this same kind of method, but with uh OSB or plywood. I chose to not use plowwood or OSB because uh I wanted the structure to be very strong and I wasn’t convinced that the amount of kind of cubic material that we needed called for something very tall. But as always, do kind of what works for your application.
-
DesignBeast Customer Training
Hello everybody. Welcome to this live webinar for design beast customers. My name is Paul Pona and in this webinar I’m going to specifically show you some of the customer feedback, some new features we’ve added, some bonuses, some other cool stuff as well. So now let me get right out of the gate. The most requested thing that we did when we released uh Design Beast was our background removal feature needed to be much better. the very best in the world, right? So, we’ve updated it. We actually built it from scratch when we actually went live based on your feedback and now it’s the very best in the world. I I really encourage you to give it a whirl. You’ll understand what I mean by that. So, basically, this is a massive rework. Okay. So, before, if you think about it, when you were to trying to remove background removal, there used to be some, if you will, edges and that sort of thing. Now, you don’t have to worry about any of that stuff. It’s perfect. It’s as if a professional did it. So what I mean by that is if we um if you will let’s let’s do this right now. So if you go into the oneclick background removal tool inside design beach right now just follow along with what I’m sharing with you right now. And if you did that right so you went into the um basically the oneclick background removal tool and then let’s say you uploaded an image. So let’s say let’s upload an image here. And let’s say I wanted to do this image of these two couple. So now before if you really um you know if you want to be upfront with you the thing was it was not 100% perfect right so now it is so uh basically you would have some of these borders right here a little bit like white borders and that sort of thing before now there’s none it’s perfect so it’s as good as a professional did it now this is important because see we take your feedback very seriously and I know sometimes things are not perfect but I want you to understand that only through your feedback we can improve things and as I mentioned before all the artificial intelligence tools inside design be they only get better the more campaigns that are run with it why because what we do is something called big data analysis right so just to simplify things what happens is there’s millions and millions of calculations going behind the scenes right so every time a new project comes so let’s say our AI system never saw I’m just in this particular case let’s say a background which had this beach area with trees here on the right and all that stuff then the more of that data it gets the better it gets. Does that make sense? So basically that’s the reason why it’ll only keep getting better and better uh with time. So that’s the first major update that we did. Um and it’s really exciting because I know for a fact how hard our developers and our team work to make this as best as possible because I know one of the key things that I saw from people was Paul you know your system is awesome. It’s excellent, but there is these other tools out there that charge for every single bag removal. They charge a monthly fee and all that stuff. They charge like all this stuff. They’re a little bit better. And it kind of made me a little bit uh if you will motivated to make sure that we make it the best possible out there. And lo and behold, it is okay. Bar none the very best in the industry right now. So that’s excellent for you, right? That’s good news. Now, next thing I want to talk about within Design Beast, okay, you can now translate the application into any language in the Google Chrome browser because it’s a web- based application. So, that means you’re going to design Beast like what you see right now and you click on any application. Let’s say the all-in-one design mockup engine, right? So, you see this this is in English. Search by designs by category and all that. Let’s go click on view all here. And then you see this, right? Search for our premium templates, library, and all that. Just right click, click translate to English. Just go click on this three dots to the right. And you can do this right now, by the way. Okay. And choose another language. Let’s uh translate this to Japanese, right? Cuz well, let’s do that. Well, there you go. It’s completely in Japanese. You see this? All the stuff. And in the top, too. All the stuff in the top right. Did you see that? Except for this Facebook text because it’s a logo based thing. Everything is in Japanese here. You see? Now, you can use this application in Japanese language. Now, if you don’t like it, we’ll just go back, translate this to another language. So let’s go to another language here. Uh let’s see. A lot of people ask us for Hebrew. Let’s do that. This is Hebrew. Um you can do this. See, works in Hebrew perfectly. Uh they asked when people ask me to do it in the other language which is I think it’s Hindi. Let’s see here. There you go. The whole thing is translated to Hindi for example. Right? Pretty awesome, right? So now you can use it in any language this way. So pretty awesome. And then of course you can go back and you can change it. So I know some people say is my language in here. Yeah. Anything I can imagine is in here. You see there’s Filipino, there’s uh Greek, there is um you know all these languages here. You see this Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish, um Vietnamese, whatever. There’s tons and tons and tons of languages here. As you can see, you can do that. We’ve added thousands, if not I would say millions, if you will, uh new vectors, royalty-free images, and all that stuff. So, if you go into the application, you go to dashboard and let’s say you like this all-in-one uh design mockup engine or whatever. And then let’s say you chose anything, right? Like any project that you create, right? And that you choose what is unique here. And that’s little bit pretty cool. Uh by the way, right, is that you can now go into images. Okay? And check this out. You can go into images and any one of these images. We’ve added more of these, right? So, millions and millions more. So you didn’t have that many before, you’d have more. So same thing with objects, we’ve added more. Uh same thing with for example backgrounds, we’ve added more. Like every element that you can see here, we’ve added more of them. Okay, so that’s the cool part. Now that was just one of the other updates that we made. So again, pretty exciting stuff. Now also the other thing, okay, which is really cool is we’ve done a lot of speed enhancements and optimizations. What that means basically is that behind the scenes there’s a lot of work to make the application super easy for you, right? For you to click one button and get a background removal. For you to click one button and get an object removed uh from a photo or an image or whatever, for you to click one button and be able to convert a photo into a video, whatever the case might be, the end of the day, you need that to work perfectly. It should be stable and also it should be something you can use for a long long time to come. All right. Now, this is where we went ahead and did something really, really cool. So, what we did is behind the scenes, we really optimized based on, you know, the demand, based on your feedback and all that stuff. We actually optimized things even further. So, what I mean by that is that we made things much faster than ever before. Okay? It was not as fast as now. We made it really, really fast. Okay? Now, that means if you were to do anything from scratch, if you were to wait, let’s say, 5 seconds before for something, now it’ll be like 2 seconds, right? That’s the little optimizations like that. The little details matter because I’ll speed up your workflow, speed up your projects and all that good stuff, right? Now, the next thing that we did is some cool bonuses and also our 10day training that we’ve done for you. Now, this is really crucial. See, one of the things is, okay, you could have the greatest application in the world, but if we don’t do the training to specifically show you how to get results using the exact application that you have, not just, okay, this is feature, click this button to do this or click this button to do that. No, but go beyond, right? And really dive into the details, okay? And show you exactly what you need to do and that sort of thing. And also some bonus applications which will only complement design me. So, where you will find these bonus applications and the 10day training. Let me show you right now. So, if you go into the design application, right, let me actually go in uh real quick here. So, we’re in the design application here. So, all you need to do is you go into the dashboard. So, anywhere you want, you click on it and click on dashboard. So, that will take you to the main homepage of the application. Okay. So, when you go to the main homepage of the application, let me just zoom in here real quick. So, if you go in, check this out here. uh you’ll see new updates and news and updates basically. Okay. So um I actually zoomed it in but but if you go back uh real quick. So that’s basically the uh setup. So you go into news and updates. You click on it, you’ll see uh a little video from me and then you will see this get your design beast bonuses here, right? And then of course we’re going to be making updates here. Any updates we make, we’re going to be notifying you here and that sort of thing. But anyways, click on this new tab and this is the bonuses section, right? Uh this is where you find all these really cool applications. You can get access to all this other stuff uh that you see here. All these applications, right? All these bonuses are visible for you within the dashboard. And then the other cool thing that we did is this 10day uh training and master class if you will. So you can actually access this right away. You get instant access to this. You see all these how to create pattern inter videos using design beast. How do you get free traffic using design beast? How do you get traffic from Instagram, Reddit and Twitter and how do you create an agency from design beast, right? Using the using the application. All this all these are right here for you to access right away. That’s also here. So the idea is that you get this extra training to help you get results. So it’s not just like if you go into design means you go into the training, there’s a whole bunch of these tutorials here, right? So uh as you can imagine you click on any one of these applications you scroll down there’s all these tutorials for each of these applications this is focused on how to use each application right how to use each application now that is just one aspect of it using the application is what 99% of the people in the world focus on any platform you see out there right you can find all these so-called uh great deals on apps and all that all over the world but the point is that it’s an application is only as good as how you can get results with it, right? Otherwise, you just have this really cool application, but doesn’t do anything, right? It’s similar to, for example, if I gave you a really complex application like Photoshop and say, “Okay, here you go. Uh, this application can do anything.” And then I give it to you. You pay a monthly subscription. You’re just going to be sitting there doing nothing because you don’t know how to use the application to get results. Where where do you get clients with it? What kind of projects are designed to get results? Where do you actually price? What pricing do you do? Right? All these uh things you’re not going to get. So that’s what we’re focused on in this uh training um uh 10day training session. And then on top of that as well on popular request a lot of people asked me right saying Paul you know can you do a specific set of tutorials yourself right where you can focus more on the marketing side of things where do you get clients and also not just agency or consulting things where you just uh do a bunch of projects for clients but can you also go a step further and can you teach me okay can you teach me how to get traffic and that sort of thing that’s what the two um two part training series was focused upon right so if I go back into the um so yeah the new twopart training series okay I email all the folks who are here as well uh the this two-part training series it was all focused upon specifically how first of all to sell the projects and the campaigns you built with design where do you sell them what do you price them and specifically where is the lowhanging fruit so you can immediately get results and all that good stuff right that was one of them secondly I showed you how you can get traffic and leads using design business. This is for your own business. Let’s say you don’t want to do consulting agency work. You want to use this application for your own business, your product, your service. I also focused on that in that two-part training series. Okay, if you can see here, right, it’s going to look something like this. You have secrets, how to 10x your revenues design beast. And then the second part was all about how to use design beast to drive traffic and sales to any business. And this is me um and I created this stuff for you folks again for your benefit. Again, this is a follow on and also a followup, if you will, where we build on top of what we covered in that 10day training sessions that you get access to anyway. So, it’s almost like you got 12, right? Uh, so that’s pretty awesome as well. So, now the reason why I went out of my way to make these training videos for you is because I know it’s not just about the actual usage of the application. It’s about, hey, you know, where do you where do you go to get results? what do you need to do to get an ROI out of Design Beast as soon as possible, right? So, this is what these trainings are focused on. Okay? So, if you haven’t already, check out your email and watch them. You can watch them after this webinar is done as well. So, no worries there. All right. Then the next thing that we did also is our obviously our customer only Facebook group. We’re giving away a lot of cool prizes and uh bonuses, gifts, and all that good stuff all the time. So, join that Facebook group if you haven’t already. I already spoke about that just a couple of minutes ago. And of course, we have some other cool bonuses and tons more coming. Now, one thing I wanted to specifically focus on today is the case studies, okay? Successful campaigns made with Design Beast. Okay, specifically where and what you need to do. So, instead of actually showing you my own, which would say, “Okay, Paul, you’ve been using this application for so long now. Of course, you’re going to do really well with it uh because you know the application inside and out.” rather than doing that what I kind of wanted to focus on uh specifically is leveraging our right if you can see here 29,600 or so 30,000 or so uh users okay so you can actually go today and you can scroll down you’ll see all these you know examples you see this right here uh Marbel created this so she created the photo to video animation where she animated the clouds and the water for this one right pretty awesome right and she used design be to do it and she is uh looks like a a Spanish um customer, Spanish speaking customer of ours. That’s great. It’s global. Uh you can check this one out here. This is CTD imaging. Um in this case, you see this right here. The clouds were animated and the water uh is animated, right? And the stones are static. So for example, it converted an image into an actual video. So these are the things that we have in our Facebook group. So these are exact campaigns. So you can again this is another one Anthony built. This is where he added um these extra effects. This is something we added recently actually in the photo to uh video creation software where we have these extra animated elements that you can use. In this case, it’s basically um you know this other animation that you see here and of course you see this here right uh Alberto created this where uh he animated this actual car uh as you can see here. Now again when I do this one of the things is Paul where do I go in the application to be able to do this? So basically if you haven’t already gone to the application uh and uh you don’t know where to go. So this is basically our application which is the 3D live motion photos application. So all those folks are are using one of these two options and then they click on this and then they will upload a boring photo and then they’ll start animating that using this live motion photos um application here. Okay, you just go uh browse or you can even uh upload it from your own computer, any photo from your client or your own or you can even go to the stock photos and get them there as well. Okay, so as you can see in the Facebook group, there’s tons and tons like you will see tons and tons of projects. So again, I mean I can keep scrolling down. This is another one. Um and then you have you can keep scrolling down and you’ll see tons and tons of examples. There’s another one uh this is for here um basically that was created and then I can keep going on and on. There’s another one for uh Halloween coming up soon. Um and then you can keep going on. This is another one right where this person has created something really cool. So anyway, the idea that I wanted to mention here is this is super super powerful, right? Because you see this here, right? Clients expectations, clients budget, somebody thought put a thought. This is what we like to call memes, right? Memes are very viral nature uh ways to actually get results. So you can check all the stuff here in our Facebook group. You see this one right here? Jeremy did it really cool. Um, check this out. So, what he did is he animated this water, right? And the idea is this is this engagement based, right? So, what I mean by engagement is if you’re scrolling down, right? Lot lot of times you’re on Facebook, you’re just going like this or you or your clients or your customers, whatever, and then you’ll stop here because it just is something called a pattern interrupt, right? It just basically holds your attention. when you hold somebody’s attention, it makes a big difference. And you know, even this post right here, this one got 35 30 something like 40 likes, right? And then so many comments. Now, if I go into something bare bones, right, like any um you know, a video or an image or whatever, it doesn’t get the same kind of results, right? As an example, check this one. Thanks for asking my membership. Five likes or whatever. Three comments. This is what most people do, right? In terms of posting. See the difference here, though? This one right here. See how many likes it gets? This is what I mean where you’re actually getting engagement in this world today that we are in. Engagement is the new currency. Okay? Engagement is everything. If I were to put a dollar sign, people who get attention today are the ones who will lead the world today, right? Because it’s so difficult to get attention. So these are the campaigns that I like to basically mention to you and how you can leverage it. Now the idea is there’s huge demand for this stuff. Okay? You can sell background removal services. You can sell object removal services. Photo to 3D video animations. You can go a step further and do social media creatives for businesses. You can do Google and Facebook ads. You can create engaging LinkedIn or Snapchat posts or Pinterest or whatever platform you can desire using design from one platform cuz again as I said there’s 7,000 plus templates you can go through to create different types of stuff. The potential is huge because you can be the go-to person for any business or industry for creating engaging content. So what a lot of people don’t realize is today, right? And I’ll I’ll actually note this down for you so you can understand very important component is that if you really simplify this here, if you’re talking about creating engaging content, right? Very critical that you understand the world today works on content. Correct? And if you understand that a picture is worth a,000 words, right? A photo is worth a,000 words, then don’t you think an engaging animation or design that you create is worth a,000 sales. That’s how we like to look at it. Okay? A lot of businesses out there, if you’re doing this work for as an agency, consultant or your own business, you need engaging content to not only be on top of mind for your clients, but also to be able to close sales ultimately, right? If you’re unable to close sales, it’s because your content is not engaging enough. You could have the best product or service in the world, but if you’re not captivating the attention of somebody, your prospects, then it’s a futile attempt, right? I mean, you can as as they say, right? A great product will need good marketing, all right, and good engagement to be able to get great amount of sales. Same thing. Now, why are these designs and animations so powerful and why are they working so well? It’s because of this proven fact that currently design is 75% of copywriting. Okay, what what we mean by copywriting is if you really think about it any material whether it’s a billboard, whether it’s a newspaper ad, whether it is for example an online ad, whether it is for example a sales page that you went to, maybe even something like a website that you went to. Historically there’d be a whole bunch of text, right, for you to read, even a blog for that matter. Now you will notice that design is 75% of that copyrightiting. So meaning if I were to sell a product or service I better have really good designs at the end of the day it’s a fact right and that means think of it this way if I were to have really really awesome designs then you know and I know together that I will be able to captivate people’s attention and I’ll be able to get 75% more sales because other people out there are not focused on this aspect. So this is how you want to look at it. We want to have the math in your favor. Right now, secondly, we’ve done something else really cool. Okay, we we’re adding some more new templates and some other cool updates and that sort of thing as well. So, for example, when it comes to templates, you can go into the design application right now. And you’ll see under our design and mockup engine, right? under our design and mockup engine in the application. You go in here there were already 7,000 plus and we’ve added even more templates for every single category that you see here. You’ll see tons and tons and tons of templates added. So, anything you want, you can do it. And this is the reason why this is so powerful because often times you’ll have clients or you yourself right somebody will say I I need to have Google ads created and you are just sitting there thinking what is a Google ad and what makes a good Google ad right now you can use any one of these templates and you don’t have to be creative to be able to do so does that make sense it’s same thing with Instagram you don’t have to worry about the dimensions you don’t have to worry about whether it’s compatible with Instagram you don’t have to worry about any of that mumbo jumbo stuff you just select okay this is for Instagram I’m good to go oh this is Instagram story. Okay, then I know it’s going to be ready to rock from day one and I’m going to just post it into Instagram as a story and I’ll start getting results and engagement because I’m not going to worry about opening up a Photoshop or whatever and then figuring out what dimensions Instagram requires and Instagram stories or Instagram ads and all these other platforms. You just select the option and you’re good to go. Right? That doesn’t mean that you cannot use it for Snapchat for example. Snapchat and Instagram stories are very similar. Facebook stories and Instagram stories are quite similar. So they will work hand in hand but the idea is that you don’t have to worry about the dimensions and all that stuff which saves you a ton of time and also a lot of headaches in the process because I know I know because I’ve seen it uh tons and tons of times right let me cover some other important questions right that um I wanted to answer as well some frequently asked questions if you will uh one of the big ones was how do credits work inside design beast application especially if you just got the commercial license for design beast how does the credit system work so you’re going to be getting 600 projects for every single app per month. So that’s about 3,600 projects per month, right? In total, right, for if you add up all the six applications inside design. But what I wanted to specifically focus on, which was a good question some of the folks were asking was how does it work in the case of logo design for example, Paul, right? Like for example, if I were to create a a logo and there are 50 variations of the logos that you have, right? For example, I go into logo factory here and I say real estate. Um, let’s say fast real estate is the actual tagline, right? We sell houses fast. You click create. Go into graphics and let’s say it’s a real estate niche or whatever industry doesn’t really matter. I’m just doing it really quickly. But let’s say I choose these 50 examples. Do these count as uh 50 projects, 50 credits? No, really. It is one project, right? So that means you could be creating all this and you’re not going to be build any credits. Okay? So that’s simply so you understand. So you don’t worry about like oh I’m going to use 50 variations of every every logo that means my credits will run out. No. So and the cool thing is these credits will get actually reactivated every single month. So you’re down to 600 this month. Next month it’s going to be 600 and thereafter 600 and on and on and on. So the reason why we did this is there’s tremendous amount of cost involved in being able to do some of these technologies that you have here. I mean you already know it. I mean, you’re smart enough. Like, if you go into any background removal technology out there, there’s not a single background removal tool out there which comes with a onetime payment option, right? They all come with a credit system, monthly recurring subscription or something like that. There’s, for example, if you go into object removal, there’s not a single tool. Even Photoshop, for example, is a monthly subscription tool, right? This is the reason why because we’re using a bunch of servers behind the scenes that cost us a ton of money. Okay? And I know when I talk about it, we’ll get to that in just a second. How much it costs to maintain an application like this and you know really develop it and all that stuff in just a second. But this is the reason why we do it so that we can provide you this great value for the rest of your life basically forever, right? And that we can sustain. I’ve been in this business for 14 years. So I’m not going anywhere. So that’s the reason why uh we’ve done it. So that way we can keep maintaining it for the long run and it doesn’t come into situation. So this is for your commercial license users who just got design and this is what so you can use it and again this is no monthly fees or anything like that you can keep using it. So that’s let’s say one project is one credit basically. Okay. So that means you have tons of opportunities to keep creating a ton of them. That’s a huge judicious amount right for you to have uh tons and tons of opportunities there. Now second question I get is can I create projects for my own business as well as clients? Yeah that’s included with the commercial license as well. So you can do this stuff for clients as well. Let’s say you want to do it as a branding agency for clients. Let’s say you do logo creation. Yeah, you can sell the logos to clients for any price you want and you can you can use it as for example your foot in the door. Maybe you give one logo for free and then charge them for the other 10 logos. You have complete flexibility there. Now, another question I answered this right away, but I just want to cover this one more time. Is there step-by-step training for me to succeed with Design Music? If so, where? So, as I mentioned before, it’s in the members area for under the tutorial section for each application. You have step-by-step training on how to use it. Secondly, you have the 10day step-by-step training under the bonuses section of the application. So, that’s basically where you have step by step. Okay, now you got the application, you know how to use it, how do you start getting results with it and that sort of thing. And then also you have the two-part training which I gave you on top of that which is focused on how to get traffic and leads as well as how do you and where do you sell the actual uh designs and animations you create inside design for top dollar to clients around the world. Right now, when I talk about this, right, and I want your permission on this, do you want me to cover the most requested thing that we’ve had in our uh support desk for literally the last 10 days now? And it’s shocking because I didn’t expect it’s going to get that kind of high level of uh requests and that sort of thing. So, let me talk about that. Okay. So basically the biggest question was what is the fastest way to build a successful online business right now using design be particularly I don’t want to buy any other tool I want to focus on this and how do I do it with complete automation meaning I don’t have any technical skills I’m not really good at for example any of this mumbo jumbo stuff of marketing sales agency stuff all that stuff what is the fastest way okay and this is basically where if for example you put a gun to my head and you say whole what is the fastest way if you were to start from scratch what would you do to actually start getting great results okay so the secret to this okay and I have to answer this very clearly so you understand this is that you got to do what the successful people are doing and not particularly what they’re teaching okay so what I mean by that is often times right I love to teach you how to get results how do you go to an agency how do you build a successful agency how do you get traffic, how do you get leads? All that stuff is great. However, sometimes what I have to do is I have to hold back on some knowledge. And this is what you see with a lot of the gurus or whatever out there where you’re so excited. You buy this course or whatever and then you realize, well, this is quite basic. Well, where is the advanced stuff? Where is the stuff that will actually the meat so to speak, right? Let me actually get me results. Where is this stuff? Right? And there’s a reason for this actually. And the reason is often times there is anciliary stuff that is required to make something successful in the online world. What I mean by that is if I tell you okay this is how you need to do to build an online business. This is exactly what I do today to get a successful business uh to build a successful business. I have to talk about everything. What tools I use, what technologies I use, um the infrastructure that I have, right? the the the the team that I built and then I lose 90% of you right there because hey, who has the money to pay a huge amount for a team, right? Do you have like $10,000 laying around per month to pay for servers and Google cloud, Amazon cloud, all this stuff? Do you have $30,000 a month to have a team of 15 20 people to help you with customer support, software development, and all that stuff? No. Right? So therefore, this is where we get stuck because if I were to teach you everything that is needed, you’re going to just stop halfway through thinking it’s too much for me. I cannot handle it. Right? So then how do we solve that issue? Then there’s a gap, right? For me to get you to the successful zone, there’s a gap, right? And what I mean by that is if if it is this is you, right? Say this is you right and you are here and you have to get to the promised land so to speak where you get uh results. This gap here, right? This gap here is what stops everybody from succeeding. Okay? Why? Well, it is because you might require things like customer support. You might require things like product creation. You might require things like uh prior experience, design skills, copywriting skills. There’s so much stuff. You’re going to get overwhelmed pretty much right when we begin, right? So really then you got to do what you have to do is you have to copy what already successful entrepreneurs are doing online right now and copy it such that you have the entire process mapped out meaning the entire right right from start to finish you have everything sorted and you’re just not going through the basics of okay you need a website to succeed online okay you need to have a payment processor okay next it’s basically stuff that will take you 6 months to a year to just understand the basics and then it’ll slow you down even further. Right? And the goal here and I keep teaching this all the time and my most successful students, right? People who I’ve taught who’ve gone on to do great things have all focused on this. Okay? Be a producer and not a consumer long term. So you want to be a person who’s producing products, producing services, uh producing something, right? Something of value that the marketplace is willing to buy from you. This is the top secret strategy nobody wants to talk to you about. Often times we’re talking about affiliate marketing. Oh, you know, go and sell somebody’s product. But at the end of the day, still with affiliate marketing, the whole thing is not sorted for you. You got to figure out how to keep hold of that customer, right? So you’re generating the traffic, you’re generating the marketing, everything, and then you’re just gifting the customer to somebody else, right? Some other platform. So it doesn’t give you control. You’re not building a customer base here. The same thing is when talking about being a producer, it is about being somebody who will be of value to the marketplace, right? So basically what I mean by that is to get this dollars here, right? And you are here to be able to get there, you need to actually have something of value to give, right? So this is what my principle is. You put a gun to my head and say, Paul, in the next one week to two weeks, you got to figure out a way to build a successful business. And you will have to do it with no connections, no prior knowledge, no prior skills, nothing. Right? The only thing I’m going to focus on is okay, what do I produce and what do I create that is of value in the marketplace where people will pay me money for? And then where is the distribution channels for me where I can sell this stuff where they’re already customers, right? And that’s all I’m focused on. And if you understand this, this will be a gamecher for you. Okay? So, this is what I’m going to be teaching you today. Okay? This is what I’m going to be showcasing uh to you with your permission. Of course, if you have your permission uh because I’ll be uh showing you some secret stuff. I’m I’m going to be giving you behind the uh if you’ll behind the scenes information that is unparalleled. Okay. So the fastest way to basically succeed with design beast, okay, without any experience, right, is to basically copy what is already working, right? Meaning you need to leverage the infrastructure, the team, the marketing knowhow of somebody or uh somebody um you know multiple plural, right? A lot of people if you will who’ve already been there and done that, right? And this is done through basically providing unparalleled value to the marketplace. But also you got to follow the steps. You cannot miss any one of the steps. Okay. So today, do you want me to train you and show you what I do? Right? What I did and what I do consistently to build an 8 figure per year business. Right? Do I have a yes on that? Right. Of course. Right. I’m going to train you on that and I’m going to show you how to build a your own successful SAS application company and I’m going to show you how you provide a great value without you having to create your own products without you having to do all this technical mumbo jumbo stuff. You create products that sell themselves. Okay? Meaning if you were to go for example right this is what I like to showcase to you. So imagine right you’re in the marketplace right now and you wanted to buy let’s say something really valuable for you right let’s say for example you wanted to buy simply shoes or let’s say a handbag or you wanted to buy for example a tool right so let’s simplify things in the digital world let’s talk about that let’s say you wanted to buy a tool let’s say like design beast I’ll tell you behind the scenes story of that and you look at other options available So now you have, let’s say, Photoshop at $20 a month or $30 per month, whatever it is that they’re charging. So that’s going to cost you, let’s say, $300 per year. And not just that, there’s barrier to entry where you got to learn all the techy stuff to learn how to use it. Go to a college or something that’s going to cost you a lot of money to learn and a lot of hours to learn. Right? On the second spectrum, you are looking at something like Design Beast, for example, where you get it for a great value, great price. Secondly, you’re getting five different six different tools, right? and you don’t have to pay any monthly fees and all any of that mumbo jumbo stuff. And thirdly, there’s nothing like this in the marketplace. It’s a market leader, right? In what it does. So when you are the only solution in the marketplace for the best possible price, then it is very easy to do the sales for you, right? And that’s what I’m going to be talking about today. How do you offer more products, more services by providing great value? And how do you maximize revenue with existing clients without any product or experience or uh without any of this mumbo jumbo knowhow stuff? And the way you do this is very simple. You got to look at the ascension of a customer. Okay? So what I mean by that is if you agree with me that the more value right that you provide right the more money you’re going to make meaning at the end of the day then don’t you agree if product is a value right similar to let’s say you’re you’re selling shoes or whatever in the online world let’s say you’re selling a product a digital product could be a software whatever it might be software has the most intrinsic value because it’s so difficult to create right and it requires a lot of creativity and time so don’t you agree with me the more products you have let’s say you you have the more number software you have, right? Let’s say the more money you’re going to make, right? Because why? The idea is that when a customer buys one product, right, they’ll buy the second one, they’ll buy the third one, they’ll buy the fourth one, they’ll buy the fifth one, provided it’s going to be of quality and it’s of importance and it’s it’s of value for them, right? So, this is the concept. This is the reason why a lot of people don’t realize Coca-Cola, for example, does not just have Coca-Cola. They are in a variety of different industries, right? From orange juice to anything you can imagine, right? If you think of Apple, Apple doesn’t just sell an iPhone, although that’s one of their biggest um, you know, profit drivers. They sell, for example, MacBooks, they’ll sell um, you know, iPods, they will sell iPads, whatever it might be, right? The more products you have, the more you’re going to make, right? So, this has been my whole strategy and this has been proven. Every successful person out there has been doing it. So, how powerful is this basically? So, let’s talk about that today, you and I. How powerful can it become? and what you can do in your own business to succeed with this. So again, I’m going to be giving you insider secrets. Nobody talks to you. Nobody shows you. Nobody even dares showing this stuff uh to you because they don’t have this kind of proof. So first thing I want to show you using this exact concept that I’ve done is this is my uh JVZU account. It’s one of the platforms. Again, you see my name here on the top. Uh let’s zoom in here real quick. So in this one account using the exact principles that I showed you here. Check this out. uh last year this one account I have actually multiple accounts with different partners and that sort of thing made $2.5 million right $2,530,000 and then year to date so this year right so far it made $2.8 million right and this is just my basically my my sales right uh if you go 2.81 81 million like if I go into my uh basically the products that I promoted with the customer base that I made like uh right and if you talk about that and that’s just not even included here this is already uh here 488,000 this year right so that’s just in this one platform now if I go into clickbank which is another platform out there a lot of people um use to sell u digital products like software or whatever uh check this out in any given month let me zoom this in here I’m making somewhere between in this case this was 53,000 in this uh particular month. Uh then here it was 3940,000. Here it was uh uh 40,000. Here it’s like 23 and on and on and on. So on average it’s making just about $100,000. Right? In the last 90 days it made about 400,000. So give or take about 120 130,000 per month uh for this particular account. Again multiple ClickBank accounts. So this is just one of them. So again why is this powerful? It is because I’m building value such that distribution becomes easy when there’s quality out there that you’re providing right value but you’re providing a product that people actually like people will actually pay you money and people will actually uh give you that money happily because at the end of the day you are the market leader so for example in the marketplaces that I just showed you and the number one in these marketplaces okay so isn’t it in your best interest to get the training and mentorship ship and specifically the same secrets that I’m using, right? To be able to do this exact same thing, of course, right? It’s going to give you the ability to actually do things that nobody else is showing you right now. So, this is why I like to show you all this stuff because behind the scenes, you need to understand that this is what all the successful people are doing, right? And this is what you need to do. You need to do you need to do this stuff. So, as an example, I want to show you another uh thing real quick. Okay? Uh again, you know, again, this is to show you that anything is possible if you focus on it and you actually do the stuff. So, here’s my um PayPal account. Again, it’s my actual live account. It’s not a fake screenshot like other people show. In this case, this is 2021. Uh this account made 2.8 million. Again, majority of our sales are actually in other platforms like Stripe and ClickBank. And you know, you got my idea, right? This is not through PayPal. But if you go into 2020, I want to show you this real quick. It was 2.8. So, we’re already going to more than make what we made last year, right? In this one account, by the way. And so, as you can see, the people from all over the world purchasing here. Again, it’s already surpassed what it did last year and it’s going to do a lot more by the end of this year. Anyways, now this is the insider stuff that nobody shows you, right? Why? It is because there is barrier to entry to be able to do so. Okay? And it’s a fact. What I mean by barrier to entry is if you think about it, right? If we’re talking about software development on its own, if you really look at it, let’s talk about the uh some of the costs you might incur. Right? Now, everything is going into mobile, right? I mean, if you will cloud, the cloud if you will, right? So, one of the things is for example, the costwise, right? If you look at it, this is our Google cloud account, right? So, the stuff that design beast, for example, right? The application itself. So, um, we are looking at right now this month $15,000 in in cost in our Google cloud where we’re going to be hosting the application, managing things. This is the kind of cost that a normal average person like you cannot do it. You need experience. You need to know what you’re doing. You need to know if this is a correct price to pay. Is it fair or not? You know, you know what I’m talking about. And it’s just the Google, right? Uh, we have another platform that we use with Amazon and some other stuff where, look at this one right here. We’re paying about $17,000, right? uh per month in this case was 12,000 and that sort of thing. So we add up some of these 17 plus 15 almost 30 $32,000 a month just in the servers alone. Okay, just the service alone and this is by the way this is our infrastructure where we have it with Amazon and some other technologies that we use like for example the background removal technology within uh design me some of the other stuff like object remote stuff which we’re doing big data and analytics we’re paying this kind of money to make it happen. So that’s $32,000 a month just on the server cost. Now, that’s not even development, right? If you go into development, I can keep showing you that, right? So, a lot of people don’t show you this stuff because they’re not doing this kind of high numbers, first of all, and they’re very worried about it. Um, so, for example, let me show you uh real quick. This is one of my dashboards. Again, this is not the only one, but look at the development charges that we have. So, some of these uh in this uh in August, for example, $4,000 uh in this week, 3,000 here, 3,9004,000. So some let’s say an average about 5,000 bucks per week that’s about $20,000 a month give or take right that’s just for the development alone meaning my developers what am I paying them and all that stuff right this is the kind of stuff I’m talking about a normal average person cannot do this stuff however what if you can leverage these resources meaning I give you this kind of infrastructure I give you this kind of team behind you and I also give you all the knowledge and all the resources that I have to be able to do something like this, which is basically if I’m spending $20,000 a month or $30,000 a month, whatever. Let’s say in a in a year my costs are more than a million dollar, right? That’s a million dollar infrastructure, right? If I give you that infrastructure, then don’t you agree with me? You’ll have an incredible edge over your competition. Do you agree with me in that? Let’s say for example, I give you a infrastructure which is a million infrastructure, right? So, let’s do that simply here. That’s a millionoll infrastructure. Do you agree with me that when you leverage that infrastructure, whether it’s customer support team, development team, if it is for example the uh design team, whether it is for example the servers or the infrastructure, all that stuff, right? If you can leverage a million dollar infrastructure per year, that is, then don’t you agree with me that you will also have an unfair advantage over your competition, right? Because your competition is not spending a million dollars. This is the problem often times that when I try to teach this stuff, it kind of goes over everybody’s head because I will need you to spend a million dollars to kind of get the results that I get, right? It’s a fact. I mean, there’s no other way around it. But if I can help you leverage this infrastructure, and this is the kind of infrastructure nobody in this marketplace is spending by the way, except for some really really high level uh entrepreneurs and big brands out there which do hundreds of millions of dollars every year. That’s the kind of high level I’m thinking and that’s the level big thinking I’m doing for you on your behalf. Now, the only way you’re going to be able to get the results that I’m going to be getting is basically be able to compete me in with me on this level playing field. Right? So, if I give you this infrastructure, do you agree with me? It’s going to make a big difference for you. Right? Absolutely. Right. So, that’s what I want to talk about today. Okay. And I want to basically talk about how you will be having the ability to leverage our entire software development team, our maintenance team and also our basically if you will our customer support, our for example developers, our marketing and copywriting team, myself, my own knowledge, our graphic design team, everybody to be able to build a successful business in the easiest possible way, in the most scalable possible way without having to spend a million dollars a year or something like that in terms of the infrastructure correct so what I’m going to be showing you today is let’s say I gave you this infrastructure and I gave you a platform like this one say for example a lot of people don’t know this this is gumro.com so let’s say I gave you my exact infrastructure our software tools our copyrightiting our our entire team right all our best if you will tools like design for example and I give you the ability to brand it as your own right and be able to sell it in a marketplace like Gumroad for example where if you go into gumroad.com and uh you check it out. It’s the secret platform which is doing really well right now. You go into their apps and software uh database, right? Just in the design software alone, there’s 173 uh here. And check this out. People are actually selling stuff, right? This person is selling something for $20 a month, $73 right here, right? Uh this person is selling um for example this membership here. this platform if you agree with me that if you get a valuable software that people will actually pay you for. So, for example, if I just click on design here, for example, and there are about, let’s see, um just about 894 products with that uh particular niche. And even with 894, check this out. This person is making thousands of sales right at $80 here, right? This person is $15 a month as monthly subscription. This is $99 right here, a design tool, and this person is making thousands of sales. Do you agree with me? If you get a valuable software and a technology infrastructure and all that stuff and on top of that you’re able to put into a platform like this one right here and where there’s already millions of buyers, right? Do you agree with me? Now you’re going beyond agency stuff and beyond just going after clients and uh putting more effort into it because see the problem with agency and consulting stuff where you’re building projects for clients is that there is an issue where if you’re sleeping you’re not making any money, right? Because as long as you’re putting the effort, that’s when you’re going to get paid. So you’re going to burn out eventually because if I gave you,000 clients, you cannot handle it. If I gave you even 50 clients tomorrow, right, you’re not going to be able to handle all that work. But on the other hand, if I gave you 50 customers to buy a product that you see here, a design system or whatever uh a software, then you can see yourself being able to do that, right? Where you can sleep to tonight and it’s going to still get sales because it’s a scalable model, right? It’s something where you can be sleeping today and still be able to consistently keep getting sales month in and month out, right? And day in and day out as well. The same thing, right? There are other platforms out there. I mean, I showed you JVZoo, I showed you ClickBank, I showed you this uh Gumroad, there’s another one called Code Canyon here as an example. This one right here. Check this out. In the last week alone, some of these products have made 500 sales in the last week. So, if we go into any one of these, right? So, any one of these applications, let’s let’s uh go into something like this. I’m just going to go to random one. Uh this is 26,530 sales that were made for this one software, right? And then if you go back here, this one right here, uh made 39,564 at $89 each. Okay? Why? Because they’re already millions of buyers. So if you have something that is of value and you have the infrastructure to back it, do you agree with me that you can see yourself listing it in some of these platforms out there and being able to make a ton of sales without any traffic generation, without any of the stuff? cuz all you need to worry about is this stuff right here. You see this design elements here, you see these bullet points, um these images here. What if I did all this stuff for you where I wrote it personally, right? To make sure that it’s designed to convert right from the get- go. Would that make a big difference for you? Think of it, right? Where one of the key problems is I’ll tell you the platform, then you’ll be like, uh, the platform is great, but I’m not good. I don’t know what to write here. I don’t I’m not like a copywriting genius or a ninja. I don’t know what to do here. this stuff is uh going to take me years to master, right? But what if I gave you what stuff to put here? Or even for that matter, even in this uh example, what if I gave you what to put here? Like you got the sales video like this one right here. You got the uh basically the description and the summary, all the stuff that that people are getting, right? And you’re able to just copy and paste this and you can list them and start making sales, right? Here, as you can see, there’s team, there’s enterprise accounts, there’s all this other stuff here that people are charging. That’ll make a big difference, right? And look at this. 93 reviews. Generally, what happens is when you talk about 93 reviews, you’re looking at thousands of sales because not everybody who purchases leaves a review, right? Just about 5% leave a review. So, this is what I want to talk about. So, as a designbased customer, our most requested feature was can you give us the white label license to design, right? And we thought a lot about it because it’s not easy first of all to build a platform like design takes years, took us over 2 years. Secondly, it’s not easy to build a white label system because it kind of hurts us in a way when we allow you to actually be able to compete uh in the marketplace and especially uh in a way such that you’re positioned to succeed right and we’ll give you all the tools resources. So what we thought is for a limited time, right, probably only this week, we’re going to and specifically only for this webinar, I wanted to give you the opportunity, right, to be able to get access to the design based white label license, which we’ve never offered before and probably we will never again offer it, especially after we have a limited amount of spots available and we once we are done with it, we’ll be removing it forever. So, what that means is you’re going to be getting the white label license to nine different applications inside Design Beast. Okay, nine. Okay, not just one, not just two, but nine applications. So, you can rebrand them as your own. Put your own logos, right? And you keep 100% of the profit and you can get it for just like a ridiculous price. No monthly payments, no yearly payments, all that stuff. Plus, I’ll give you the copywriting, the sales materials, and everything else you need to succeed. Okay, that means you get all these tools, right? And you’re good to go. And how easy is this to set it up? Like imagine this. Okay, so if I go into design beast application real quick here, I’ll show you. We go into the design beast application, right? Um, and I’m here in the design beast application. You go into the dashboard, right? You go into the white label manager. This is what I’m going to give you access to in just a bit so you can get access to it. And then you just add a brand, right? You click add brand and you put your own logo. Meaning what you see here gets changed completely with design. Okay? Uh with anything you want. Secondly, you’ll have your own branding, your own email address, your own customer system. You can put it for any one of the products here. You can even give the description, anything you want. And then what happens is you can pick for any one of these products, right? And so it’s going to look like this. So if I go into this page, check this out. It’s a generic domain or like basically a white label non-branded domain. You put your logo, the login, and everything is unique, right? and nobody will ever know that you’re using Design Beast. Now, think of it this way, right? Just one of the applications, right? Right now, there is no application out there which does just background removal alone, right? Just background removal alone. There’s no application which does lifetime access for onetime payment in the marketplace, which I’m going to allow you to do. So, for example, if you go to remove.bg as an example, right? This particular application, if you go into the pricing, they charge a per credit system, right? They do it. Now, if I go into AI background removal, you do it. You do the math. Okay? I’m not even kidding. You go into any one of them, right? This is a pixels.com. Apparently, this is removal.ai. Um, this is remove.bg. Hotpot.ai. I don’t even know what that is. Um, any one of these tools, right? Every one of them costs money. Check this out. 100 images, $6, 210, right? And on and on and on. And that’s just per credit based system. If I go into this other tool right here, um, let’s go to this one right here. And I’m just talking in the top like when somebody searches for this stuff. Uh go to pricing here real quick. Uh let’s see here. Yeah, check check this out. 15 cents per image, right? And that adds up very quickly to like uh 300 per month is uh somewhere like 45 bucks a month, right? And that’s a monthly plan. If you want to do it as a top up per image, 50 cents or something per image, right? And it adds up. That’s the competition, right? I’m giving you the ability to be able to compete with these guys, right? for at a better quality output and at the same time with more applications and thirdly with the ability for you okay to be able to price it even lower than these guys without any credits and all that stuff. Does that make a big difference for you? Absolutely. Right. This is the unfair advantage where you provide a quality application for a good price and you’re destroying the marketplace because you have a quality product infrastructure, a million-doll infrastructure that I’m putting together for you and you have the ability to compete. Just that’s one application by the way. Okay, now this is another one I just went to that pixels or whatever.com image price from 95 cents each turnaround time next morning. So 24 hours they need. Okay, you see that turn around 3 hours. You can do this in 1 minute or even less actually. maybe more like 10 seconds, but I’m just going to say a minute. But from 3 hours, they need a monthly subscription of n uh $2,000, right? To be able to do this. You see my point? This is the type of competition you’re dealing with and you can actually beat them at their own game. There’s a reason why we are confident design will be the go-to technology out there and you’ll be able to do and how big is this market by the way? If you really talk about it, just uh if you think about it, right? So, um if if you just go into Google, right? You go to Google and then you type in something simple like for example uh let’s say Canva net worth, right? How much is it worth? Right? Canva is worth right now $15 billion. Okay, that’s the net worth of Canva. You’re getting this high-end tool to be able to sell as your own. Okay, that’s $15 billion. And then if you go to Photoshop, right, net worth, I don’t know how much will that be. Oh, yeah. There you go. Just Photoshop alone, right? If you go in here, right, it’s $20 a month, whatever, but it is a huge part of Adobe’s, right? Right. 20 billion revenue stream. So Adobe is worth hundreds of billions of dollars. They make in a year 20 billion. This is how big the marketplace is, right? I’m not making these numbers up. This is you can go to Google and you can go find it yourself. I mean, there’s nothing much there to it. So you can go after this marketplace with what I’m going to be giving you today with my infrastructure without having to spend millions of dollars and all that mumbo jumbo stuff. And I’m going to make it risk- free for you. Don’t worry. The goal will be for you to get an ROI as quickly as possible and then effectively make it profitable for you right out of the gate. Right now, this is a once in a lifetime opportunity because you’re going to be getting white label access to nine worldass apps. You can rebrand these nine apps with your own logos, your own branding, sell as your own, and keep 100% of the profits. And you can control the payments, the price, build your own customer base. You you have full control. Meaning, I’m not going to take control of your customers. We’re not even going to know who your customers are, right? We’re going to basically have that privacy for you. And you can leverage our million-doll per year infrastructure and our team, our developers and our designers, our copywriters, you know, everything you can imagine. And you’re going to get it for nine applications. Not one, not two, nine applications. And here’s the best part. On top of that, you’re going to get a complete traffic and sales getting platform as well. That means you’re going to be having done for you sales materials package included. Okay? That means the sales videos, the copyrightiting, the bullet points, the description, all that stuff that you can copy and paste into a platform like Gumroad, for example, right? And you’re good to go. You get all the millions of buyers that they have already. Or for that matter, you can go in, use our all-in-one drag and drop reseller website that we’re going to be building for you and which is already ready to rock. You can pretty much set it up in the next maybe 30 minutes. And then you have unlimited Google Cloud hosting included on it, right? Which means it’ll work with any payment processor of your choice. try PayPal or let’s say you’re in Asia and they have a different uh type of a uh you know payment processor or in for example you’re in Latin America and you have different processor it doesn’t matter it’ll work in every single payment processor system as long as they allow you to embed their uh buttons you can use this and the cool thing is with this by the way and I’m going to make it clear for you so you understand how powerful this is think of it this way right if you’re thinking about it you’re going to be getting this uh platform right out of the gate with full What you see is what you get editor. So that means let me show you how powerful that would be, right? So you understand. So think of it this way. You’re going to be getting this platform, right? Which is going to look so beautiful like this. You can set up. It’s going to have an entire membership system built in where you can sell the applications here. You can click on any one of these dashboards and you can edit anything. So for example, you have live 3D live motion uh photos and then you can go in and you can have uh for example the entire sales page ready to rock. You see this? And everything is super easy to edit, right? All the animations and all that stuff is done for you. And so basically when you’re positioning this, you look like an expert. You look like a genius copywriter. And everything is editable by the way with a drag and drop editor. So we will attach it with our world-class WordPress platform where every element is editable. So for example, think of watch what I’m doing here. I can edit any element in WordPress. So we we worked really really hard. took us many months to make it compatible with WordPress. So you got a what you see is what you get editor a membership system. So basically what happens is if person buys one application they want to buy more. You can do automatic funnel upsells and that sort of thing without you having to be an expert with funnel building and that mumbo jumbo stuff and every element is customizable here. You see this I go in here and edit. I can do it and of course it’s integrated into Woo Commerce which is very easy. A lot of you folks already know where you can put Tribe, PayPal, whatever payment system and it’s what you see is what you get editor. So you have not just some landing page builder or something straightforward. You have a entire membership system. So when somebody buys the licensing system is built in here when they can go into the dashboard and they can go buy more products. Uh then they can go into like um uh the branded tutorials that we’re giving you which means you will have a completely white label set of tutorials for every one of these. So they’ll have no link back to design beast in any way. So that means or any one of these applications by the way. So you can even change the logo. You can use our logo uh factory application and build your own logos for this by the way. So basically to simplify this, think of it this way. You’re going to get the drag and drop uh builder and you’re going to get all the cloud hosting included. So you’re going to have a system where imagine you have a membership system where people can come buy multiple applications. They can go through a funnel. They can add to cart as many as possible. So you don’t have to have nine different uh domain names or nine different websites. They’re going to make from one simple platform. If you already have a domain name, you can point to our web hosting. We can help you out with that. that’s not a problem. Uh but if you want to, we can even give you our own domain name to use uh generic domain name. That’s also super easy to do. Now, with this, you’re going to get a white label traffic and sales getting platform. Now, think about membership sites or a system where people buy something from you that sends the email. It’s going to be able to actually uh be able to track what products a person purchased and offer them more products automatically. It’s going to track, okay, you added these two products into cart. Do you want to buy the other three? We’re going to give you a discount. You can do all kinds of cool things automatically with the system in a drag and drop easy manner. And on top of that, you can build funnels, microser, you can create shopping carts. You can do mobile um pages which is only for mobile applications. You can even offer affiliate uh opportunities. So meaning somebody else can be an affiliate and you can give them a commission for selling these um apps, right? So meaning somebody else will send you the traffic and you pay them a commission and you’re the vendor here because I’m giving you the ability to do so. You’re going to be able to actually uh do interactivity stuff like achievement badges. So if they buy all the products, you give them a special achievement bonus, let’s say. Uh you can do all kinds of cool stuff with this platform by the way. So which is revolutionary, right? And you also have our customer onboarding system, which is basically a complete white label non-branded dashboard, white label video tutorials. So all the video tutorials will have no link back to Design Beast at all. Meaning the tutorials that people will be watching, your end customer will have no idea that it was Design Beast. Okay? because you’re having the ability to sell these high-end applications as your own and you’re going to have a nonbrand domain you can use off your own or you can point your own domain to us that’s up to you or you can even purchase a domain from us it’s up it’s up to you right and you get the professional software updates and management from myself and my team so that means imagine this there’s no hassle no setup right you build your own brand and we are going to do the updates that’s the beauty of a web-based cloud application any updates that we make will automatically uh you know get changed over into your uh design beast white label application. So you don’t have to do anything. You don’t have to even ask our support team. It’s pushed automatically because they’re all related interlin to our master uh system that is behind the scenes, our master infrastructure, so to speak, right? So the way this works, think of it this way, and I want you to really look at it in a perspective. So we’re going to give you 250 white label sub accounts, right? Or white label account creation per application. That’s 2,250 accounts for all the nine applications. So you think of it, right? You can reach 2,250 potential customers with this. And that’s a huge amount, right? Like it’s it’s impossible for you to fail with this, right? Now, generally speaking, if we’re really looking at the numbers uh of of something like this, right? Think of it this way, right? The total value of something like this is is over $70,38. Yeah, 70,000. You heard it right. Why? 2250 total white label licenses for all these nine applications. There’s $ 250 for each application, right? That’s even at $27, right? It’s actually the retail is like $47 easily. Even at $27 retail price, it’s $60,000. Uh $750, right? $60,750 is what you would have to pay to get access to it. In fact, your customers would have to pay to get access to it. That’s the kind of profit potential we’re looking at here. And we’ll also give you the opportunity to buy more, right, for a cheap cheap price, which is exactly the same thing, which I’m going to be showing you in just a second, which comes to like something like 20 cents or something like that for each license, which is ridiculous. And you’re going to be getting our automatic sales getting platform with Google Cloud hosting, which is not just some landing page builder, but it’s a full-fledged membership site platform with a what you see is what you get editor. So, you can build checkout pages, you can create a cart system, funnels, anything you can imagine. You’d have a you can even have a membership system with badges. So if they bought all six products, you can bring in your own products on top of the design based applications here, which is really good for flexibility. Let’s say you have your own courses or products and that sort of thing. And also you have a drag and drop sales page editor, meaning anything that you’re creating or any product you add in here on top of the nine applications, you can edit it easily, right? You get the done for you copyrightiting sales materials and as well as the sales videos included. Okay, which means that we spend a lot of money to create those sales videos. I’m right now the number one vendor on JVZoo, number one affiliate on JVZoo, and also one of the top folks on ClickBank. These are the top platforms which get millions and millions of uh people coming in to sell stuff. I’m the very best at what I do because of the fact that I have that infrastructure. It’s simple as that. It’s not because I’m some genius or some I’m so intelligent. It’s because I built a system over the years. It took me over a decade to put together where everything is streamlined, right? Think of it like a piano, right? Every key is set up such that the system is going to do the thinking and the system will work itself out. I don’t do any day-to-day maintenance there because we have the team, the system to do so, right? And it’s fully scalable. So only software maintenance. You throw let’s say thousand customers cuz you’re getting 2,250 potential customers you could reach, right? So that means ultimately if you throw, thousand customers at it, we got to be able to handle that. And we can because we’re infrastructure is through Google and through Amazon and that sort of thing, right? And there’s no hidden fees or additional purchases needed, which is even more important, right? There’s no hidden fees or anything like that. You get the white label um opportunity right out of the gate, right? And you can be the first person in the world to get access to this. Now, as a special because you’re a design customer and because I’ve never offered this before, right, I’m going to give you the opportunity, right, to get it at a 50% discount on this webinar, okay, to what we were going to price it, uh, which we’re going to start pricing it for because it’s legitimately worth over $70,000 if somebody were to buy it retail. And on top of that, you’re going to be able to get this for each license, right? If you look at for less than 20 cents or some 22 cents per license per application. So if you’re selling something for like let’s say 27 $47, right? Which is the real world value. In fact, it’s even more because just the background removal object removal alone, right? Just the background removal alone there people charging 50 cents to a dollar for every image, right? Every photo here, that’s the whole application license you’re getting it, which is ridiculous. And you I’m also going to give you 30 days no question as money back guarantee. Try it out. Try it out for your heart to your heart’s desire. See for yourself if it’s worth it. If not, you get every single penny back, no questions asked. as always, right? Because I want you to do that. We put a lot of effort into it to make it worthwhile. But the first time ever, I’m doing even something more cooler. If you’re in the US or United Kingdom, I’m going to give you the PayPal credit option in the checkout page, which means six full months, no payments, no interest. Okay? So, effectively, you’re getting it for free. If it’s you’re in the United States or United Kingdom, it works in these two areas. If not, you can get it for a really rock bottom price. That means when you go to the checkout page using PayPal and you’re in the United States or United Kingdom, you’re going to get an option that you see right now. Something like looks something like this in the bottom, right? PayPal credit. You want to apply. If you’re already in there, you’re good to go. And you can use this right out of the gate. Okay? And you can start getting uh this for six full months. No payments, no interest. If you’re not in the United States or American, don’t worry. You can still get it for the lowest rock bottom price. Now, let me ask you a question. Okay? this particular technology let’s say with this whole white label and everything else that I’m giving you right now right if I gave you this technology today right now as we speak okay the design beast white label at 50% discount but where it comes down to just like around 22 cents per license or whatever do you see yourself where you can get an ROI out of it just let me know in the chat box you see yourself where like if you were to sell it for 27 bucks or whatever you you’ll make back that 10 times 100 times over that’s the secret right the richest person in the world right now is the guy from Louis Vuitton, right? He owns Louis Vuitton. Why is he the richest person in the world? The margins are ridiculous in the clothing business. The same way in the technology space as well. The margins are so great. When you have something that cost you 22 cents and you can sell it for uh 30 bucks, 50 bucks or whatever, then it’s super easy for you to get an ROI, right? Because it’s just a numbers game at the end of the day. And especially with the platforms that I just showed you on this webinar, there others too. you will be able to get millions of potential buyers to knock on your door and buy this from you, right? Like Gumroad, Code Canyon, there’s so many other ones, right? And you can leverage these platforms and their millions of buyers, the ones which even I’m not reaching and be able to just make a huge amount of revenue stream for yourself and for your family, right? So now, how much does this thing cost? So, normally we would charge something like this $2,000 a year because that’s the fair price for us to break even on this. But since you’re a DesignB customer, I want to do something really cool. I want to give it at half off at $997. And that’s a fair price as you can imagine because you’re going to be able to make 100 times over very easily just because at the end of the day, you’re getting an infrastructure or technology and all that stuff. But as a customer, I want to do a little bit more for you. Okay? So, I’m going to give you half off on top of that 997 bucks without any yearly fees, no monthly fees, any of that stuff. Try it out for a onetime payment, right? For lifetime access. No need to worry about any of that mumbo jumbo stuff. And with our infrastructure and all that backing you, it’s it’s impossible, literally virtually impossible for you not to get a few sales at least because the technology alone works. So now you got two options for it, right? You can get this for $497 onetime payment or you can get this as a payment plan using the link right here, which is $97. Try it out as a pitchin fee today. Right? That pitching fee is $97 to try this out for your heart. You know, see for yourself if it works for you and you can get it right there at that special link that you have, which is www.designbeastwl,
which stands for white label.com. I’ll post the link in the chat box as well. You can type it into your browser as well, designbeastwl.com. The main difference between the $49 onetime payment and the payment plan, which is $97 spread over six full months, is that with the 490 and all, I’m giving you a special bonus that nobody else gets access to that I had to think 100 times to do it, but I’ll be doing that for you and we’ll probably never do it again. And that is if you’re stuck with any technical stuff that could be setting up your website, setting up your sales getting platform that we’re giving you which builds membership sites. You can bring in your own video courses into it. You can add additional products, upsells, downells, order bumps. Imagine like a Cartra or ClickFunnels and if you will a Kajjabi all those in one. That is the platform that I’m giving you as a bonus with unlimited Google cloud hosting because it’s an important component of you putting your buy now buttons, taking the sales, collecting the customers, managing them and promoting the more offers and all that stuff, right? So that you can make more money and just duplicate your results very quickly. However, with anything technology, there will be some hurdles. So in that kind of scenario, I will allow you to book a one-on-one call with any of my team members. We have four people who are very experienced with this stuff, with the technical side of things, whether setting up your website, adding a buy now button, editing, modifying a few things and all that stuff. We will get on Skype with you or do a screen share with you or we will do whatever it takes to basically get your issue solved. In many cases, we’ll probably even do that and do a done for you type of deal. So everything is set up ready to get you sales, right? So you’re never stuck with technical issues that I can give this when you get that phone answer on one time payment. But you got to post your transaction in the chat box. I can confirm you’re in and if you’re eligible for that bonus. Okay, the reason why is it’s only for this live webinar. I cannot offer it for more people because time is the most limited asset first thing. But more importantly, I only have four people in my team. It’s not like I can come in and help you with this stuff because even I’m not that technically skilled. So it would take me say 2 hours to solve an issue just like you. When some of these folks in my team with years and years of experience, they can do it in 2 minutes. For example, what takes me 2 hours takes them 2 minutes cuz they’re experienced with this stuff. And if I had to hire more people to help you, it makes no sense because it’ll take years to get to that level of expertise. And if you wanted to do it yourself, it’s going to cost you $40 an hour minimum to have somebody else do this stuff for you. So that’s the bonus I’m going to be giving you. But you got to push a transaction after you get in. And this is going to allow you to get instant setup, instant kickstart, and instant uh ready to get sales system. And now the only difference otherwise with the $97 payment plan is if you go in and you email our support team, we’ll tell you, okay, this is the issue you did. Okay, this is what you need to do to fix things and that sort of thing with technical issue, right? It’s more like, okay, you do it yourself, but we’ll give you the assistance on how to do it here. In this case, we will do it for you if it really comes down to it. And that is something no amount of money can buy. But I’m going to give that as a bonus only. It’s very limited. It’s only for this live webinar. I cannot really afford to give it to other folks. So this is the reason why it’s imperative that you actually get it right now. Push your transaction just for that bonus alone. Um because if you’re spending 3, four, 5 hours with you to ensure uh you know you can go in and get everything set up and working then of course as you can imagine that’s time that we will never get back. And yes regardless of that we’re still going to give you 30 days no question and money back guarantee. So try it out to your heart’s desire. See for yourself if it’s for you. If for any reason, no reason at all, it’s not for you. You get every single penny back. No questions asked. Okay, that is the game changer. All right, and that I think can be a big difference between you getting great results and not so much depending on what your skill set is and where you’re getting stuck. Okay, so definitely get that. You’ll see two options. And of course, they’re all um going to have the PayPal credit option, which is no payments, no interest for six full months for any reason, no reason at all. um you know you you don’t want to pay anything today if you’re in the United States or United Kingdom today and you want to pay it 5 months from now for no payments for and no interest either. Okay, for six full months. So 5 and 1/2 months from now you decide okay I’m going to pay back everything cuz I’ve already made 100 times over return on investment on this. It’s not not going to cost you any in any interest at all. So that means literally you’re getting it for free today. If you’re in the United States or United Kingdom, if you’re in those two areas, those two countries, go ahead try this out. You have nothing to lose. just check out with PayPal and then use the PayPal credit option. Now, this is a special that we are doing only for DesignB customers. And I was thinking about this hundreds of times over because see, I could sell it for $2,000 a year. I can get about let’s say 100 people, right? Getting it and I’ll make a ton of money doing it, but I’m not really helping you out, right? The most requested thing that we’ve had is is there a white label license for Design Beast, right? All the technologies in there because you know for a fact it’s valuable. There’s no competition for design beast out there, especially for the pricing, the value that we provide and all that stuff. I have to actually, you know, really twist the arm of our developers and our entire team to be able to give this to you because it’s very difficult for us to let go of our baby and give it to somebody else, right? To be able to sell it as your own with your own branding and all that. But I want you to be successful doing it. And with the amount of value that’s in here, there’s no way you’re going to not get any results with it. It’s impossible. How how else like if you’re competing with brands out there which are costing 30 bucks a month uh and you’re competing with uh technologies out there which charge for every single background removal or for example for 3D motion uh animation. There are applications right now we charge a monthly fee just for phototo 3D animation right and you can get all that into this all the nine applications at that special link at designbewl.com. There’s two ways. And you can use the PayPal credit option if you’re in the United States or United Kingdom for both. Uh $97 pitching fee to try it out right now. And then that’s spread over six months. Slightly more expensive. Or put $497 onetime payment. No more other fees and none of that mumbo jumbo stuff. Now let’s say you want more than that $250 white label accounts per application. 2250. Let’s say you want more. Well, you just buy it again, right? So that means that you can get that at 22 cents per application license. You can get more of them. So simple. No complications, no need for you to worry about, okay, are there any additional purchases I got to make to make this work? No, you’re going to get everything. No hidden cost, nothing. It’s very clean, very cleancut, clear-cut, very transparent. Okay? But I want to give you this opportunity because I know if I give you every single possibility to profit with this technology that you have, and you know the power of it already, the value already, what you can achieve with it, then you will be positioned to succeed. and along with the very best person in the world who can teach you with this stuff. Okay, I’m the number one in the game right now. So, if I’m giving you my infrastructure, it holds a lot of weight, right? Because might as well get the infrastructure of the very best in the industry rather than somebody who’s just getting started or somebody who does not have the track record that I do, right? Or the proof that I do. Why? Because at the end of the day, it takes years to get to this level. But if you were to talk about a shortcut to succeed where you don’t have to build any products of your own, you don’t have to have a customer support team of your own. You don’t have to have for example the copywriting team of your own. You don’t have to be a designer. You don’t have to be an expert. This is the stuff. And with some secret platforms out there that is completely untapped like Gumroad and some of these other ones out there, you will be positioned to get incredible amount of sales doing this stuff because there already millions of people out there looking for this stuff right now. and you can be positioned to give them right now without any mumbo jumbo stuff, right? And why is this different? You might be wondering, right? Like why is this different from other platforms out there? And especially with the PayPal credit option, whether it’s if you’re in the United States or United Kingdom, there’s no payments, no interest for six full months. So literally, I’m losing money there, right? But I want to give you every single opportunity to profit. So why is this different? Let’s say you’re from other parts of the world, right? Um and this is not for you. Still, it’s a huge huge deal for us to give away something with no monthly fees, no yearly fees, and also literally 22 cents per license if you think about it. And if you were to give me this when I got started with somebody else handling the infrastructure, it makes my life easy because I don’t have to learn copyrightiting. I don’t have to learn funnel building. I don’t have to learn uh software development, I don’t have to learn marketing, I don’t have to learn, for example, uh sales uh generation or something like that. I don’t have to learn website building. all this mumbo jumbo stuff because all of this is handled by our team. And here’s the best part though, right? Everything is included in one place with zero risk, okay? No additional purchases, no hidden fees, right? You get 2,250 white label accounts with your branding included for all the nine applications. That’s 250 per app, right? And that comes to 2250 licenses and you get that included. No monthly fees, no yearly fees ever. And you’re going to get done for you sales getting platform with web hosting included. And you’re also going to get our done for you sales videos and copywriting. Okay, that’s also included by the way, which means all the sales videos that my team and I built together. It took us many, many months and something that you can just replicate easily cuz our team is the best in the world, right? And you’re going to get that plus you’re going to get the software maintenance and updates forever. So when you actually sell it to the end user, if there’s a bug or something, we will fix it. You don’t have to worry about all that stuff. And the way it works cuz it’s in the cloud, there’s no need for that end user of yours, your customer, your client to have to email you or reddownload that particular uh software again. No, it’s in the in the cloud. We make an update, it it gets reflected in a couple of seconds across all the platforms, right? And you’re going to get the white label tutorials and the dashboard as well included. Normally what happens is with a white label um system, people will say, “Okay, I’m going to give you the white label account.” And then now you’re stuck. You don’t know how to sell it. You don’t know where to sell it. You don’t know what else to do, right? And you’re stuck with technical stuff. So, this is the reason why this is so powerful. On top of that, let me quickly recap, okay? What you’re really really getting here because it’s often times people don’t understand how valuable it is. If you want somebody, right, like myself who’s built a business, if you see this is just my PayPal account alone this year, 2021, $2,820,000 just in this one account. That’s almost 3 million, let’s say. Then we go back and then um let’s see real quick. Here we go back here. Let’s go back into JVZoo. This is 500,000 here. And then go to uh let’s see here. This one right here. Click on this little dashboard. That’s that was three there. This is almost 500,000. So that’s three 3 million 500,000 or whatever. We round it off basically, right? And then you add another 2.8 million here, right? And I’m not even showing you my stripe, which is a lot more than this. That’s about six. And then we add up another 100 200,000 per month here. That’s about another 4 million or something like So that’s a $10 million business, right? And that’s just from what I can show you right now. Some of the stuff I cannot because I have partnerships. So I cannot really reveal that information. So if you want to get the behindthe-scenes infrastructure, the products, the software, the copywriting, the kind of stuff that you know people will never share with you, this is the only way you’re going to be able to do so. I’m not the kind of person who just goes and does dabbles with something, right? I go all out, right? because I put my reputation on the line because I’m in this business for 14 years. So, it’s not something I take lightly. This is the reason why if you think about it, nobody and I can guarantee you, you can go into JVZoo marketplace or whatever and tell them to show you, hey, how much are you spending on your hosting stuff? Okay, what are you doing for your application? Like, how much are you paying? Let them show you this kind of numbers because to be able to do background removal, to be able to do object removal, it requires hundreds of servers, right? Big data servers to calculate all that stuff behind the scenes. It’s not something you just think about in a day and be able to do. So ask somebody, right? Are you spending 17,000 bucks on the servers, right? This is just one of our servers, by the way, which does the, you know, machine learning stuff. Then if you go back to the Google one, $15,000 a month, right? And just last month, right, it was I think 13,000 bucks or something. 12,600 bucks, right? And just go into even this weekly summary here in our one of our development team that we have, right? Check this out. 5,000 bucks uh here, 4,800, 4,000 here, 4,300, 6,000 here. An average about 4,500 to 5,000 bucks a week. This is August 2021, right? Not something like last year or couple of years ago. It’s right now. I’m on the top of my game and I have the infrastructure. I’m not shy or afraid to spend big bucks to be able to give the right kind of technologies in your hands. And the right kind of technologies can only be giving they’ll only give you an unfair advantage if you have the right kind of tool the team and specifically even more than anything else the ability to be able to compete in the marketplace against big corporations right if you look at Canva it’s worth 15 billion with a B look at Photoshop with hundreds of billions if you look at for example the remove.bg BG, right? That’s another uh tens of millions of dollars that those folks have that they’ve invested in any one of these applications out there. Why are they so powerful and why are they so successful? If you were to build something to compete with them on price, you’re not going to be able to beat them unless you have the infrastructure which I’m showing you right now. It’s a fact, right? There’s a reason why if you go into Fiverr right now and just do background removal, right? Right. If you go in right now and you just do background removal and you search and Fiverr is a cheap platform out there, there are people charging, right? This this person right here is charging $25. This person is right here. You see, you can go into any one of them. Okay, check this out. This person right here, right? And I’m going to put US dollars here as a uh option here. Just right, just seven full body images, $10 going to uh 50 or uh whatever it’s $50, right? So, $1 for every image that the background is removed. And this person, check this out. They have 482 reviews and there are people buying from them every single day. Check these feedback. This is just one of the applications you’re getting out of nine applications with white label, right? So these are your potential buyers ultimately, right? These are the kind of people who pay money from you because effectively they can either, you know, get use the application that they’re getting and then they can start charging money. So effectively they’ll get an ROI very quickly. And the second thing is the only competition that is out there is all charging per credit or per monthly fee and all that stuff. and you’ll be able to compete with them literally with a onetime payment. This is my secret to success. It’s a fact. I mean, there’s no denying. I’m able to destroy my competition in the marketplace and do millions of dollars in revenue because of one reason, and that is I create something of value. I create something of very high quality with the infrastructure that is millions of dollars worth of infrastructure that big corporations would do with a lot of venture capital and all that uh mumbo jumbo stuff. and I’m able to compete with them on price with the quality right included. So you can get that infrastructure and do the same thing that I’m doing. It’s a simple as that. So what are you waiting for? Jump in right now. You have two options. You can go to www.designbeastwl which stands for white label.com designbeastwl.com or go to the uh button. Click on the button right below this video because you’re watching this in video format. So you can go click on that button right now. Now, if you have any questions and that sort of thing, you can always email us at supportdesignb.io. We’ll sort that out. But I just want to make sure that you understand that this is very limited. We have a limited amount of actual spots available for this. We’re going to be closing this down very, very soon. In fact, it could be closed down by the time you’re even watching this video and you click the buy now button or the order button right below this video and it says sold out. Don’t be surprised because we have limited amount of people that we are reaching out. And if you want to get one-on-one assistance from our team to kind of navigate through the technical issues, you can get that $497 option and then it will help you basically have somebody walk you through the process and more importantly solve any technical issues that you’re facing whether it’s WordPress setup whether it’s pointing your domain name to our web hosting because we’re giving you the whole sales getting platform or maybe it is something as simple as putting a but buy now button and linking it to Stripe or PayPal so you can start getting sales and manage those these are the things that we can help you and we plan to do that for at least one month for free for you with no extra charges, no $40 per hour kind of fees, nothing like that. So that at least then you’re good to go and you’re ready to rock because once you get that assistance and once you’re set up, there’s nothing more for you to do because that’s the main issue most people have, right? And that could be you. That happens to me. I get something and then I get stuck in the technical aspects of it and then I give up and then I blame myself that I’m not technically skilled enough to move forward. That should not be the case. That’s what I want to solve here. So, we can solve that for you. Now, if you feel you’re good to go because our system is quite easy to use and you’re not that much in terms of technically skilled challenges that you’re going to face and you want us to just email us and then have somebody tell you what to do rather than do it for you kind of thing, you get that $97 payment plan option. It’s slightly more expensive. It’s spread out. You can pay for it using the profits that you generate. That’s the kind of setup you have. But either way, whatever you get, you’re going to get everything, okay? Everything mentioned with no other hidden costs or nothing additional to purchase or any of that mumbo jumbo stuff. Okay? Get there right now. Click on the button below to get it right away. And as I mentioned before, regardless of what you get, use the PayPal credit option. That will allow you, if you’re in the United States or United Kingdom, these are the two places. If you’re in one of these two, definitely use the PayPal credit option. That’s basically where for six full months, there’s no payments and no interest. So 5 and 1/2 months from now, for example, you decide to pay the whole amount, then there’s no interest charged. And that’s a long time to start getting results, right? with this design beast bright label license that you’re getting along with our whole sales getting platform with web hosting included our training and specifically as well with everything that you’re getting which is just 22 cents per license that you’re getting for these nine applications which is just extraordinary if you think about it how powerful just with our sales getting platform alone you can basically automate all the aspects such as SSL certificates which we pay on your behalf you don’t have to pay any money for that we automate the DNS or the HTML or the fact that you have to normally do any databases and all that stuff. We automate all that stuff. It’s plug-andplay easy. You just set it up and it’s ready to go in a few minutes. That’s how fast it is. And it also allows you to sell anything beyond the software tools that you’re getting here. Those nine apps. You can sell video courses, ebooks, you can sell anything with this powerful sales getting platform that we built for you that’s fully white labelled. And you can create as many of these as possible. And the beauty here is that you can get instant access to that right here as well when you click the button right below. And I just want to make sure you understand, you have 30 days to test drive everything. We’ll do our very best to make sure that you’re up to speed and get results as quickly as humanly possible. But all we require from you is some commitment and make sure that you have some skin in the game. So put in that pitch in fee here today just to show your seriousness so that you can actually start using it and start getting results with it. And of course with all the entire platform that we built for you the sales getting platform the white label where you can brand all your logos and make this application as your own and get access to our entire infrastructure like our support team our technical bug fixing team our developers all these folks who will actually update things automatically on your behalf. You don’t have to even ask us when a bug is there we’ll update it and it can automatically get updated in your white label apps as well. So this kind of infrastructure would have cost you millions of dollars to build from scratch and decades to do so cuz you need expertise as well, not just the money, right? So if you always wanted my life’s work in a silver platter along with all the infrastructure, this is it. So click on the button below and look forward to seeing you in the inside. I’m sure you’re going to be thrilled and enjoy using this entire infrastructure that we built for you. So thanks again. I look forward to seeing you on the inside and start getting results with the design beast white license. I’ll talk to you very soon.
-
ContentReel Customer Training
Um this is the very first uh membersonly training session. We’re going to be doing one more um I think next week and then there’s going to be a third one which would be the last live training session uh a week after. Now these are the live training session. You’ll find access to them inside your dashboard as well. But I highly recommend you stay till the end cuz we’re going to do a bit of Q&A uh to help you uh answer some questions as well. Um just so you understand this training is not a tutorial training. There are tutorials inside your uh app dashboard. So if you click on on your icon on your name over here and you go into help and support you’ll find all the trainings and tutorials and videos everything here. Anything and everything that you need everything is here. So if you think that this is a tutorial training and you’re not getting enough out of it, you’re wrong. Um just go here. you’ll find everything. Excuse me. So, this session is mostly about um use cases, how to use content reel more efficiently and to give you a bit of a walk through um on on content re how to utilize it in the right way. Right? So, let’s jump into it. Um quick uh rundown on what content re does the real purpose. The purpose here is to help you create good quality content in mass in scale, right? So you enter a keyword and it can create a lot of scripts for you and convert all those scripts one by one into storyboards which you can then customize and publish. Now if you think that you can create a lot of videos like hundreds of video in just one second and then publish all those in the next second and then expect to get traffic that’s not how um the internet is anymore. That’s spamming. So that’s not what we do. We aim at creating lots of videos at scale but good quality videos using it. Right? So um to get started super easy. Click on create a project. Now create a project could be anything. Right? So let’s say you’re working for a client. So you can call this project a client name as well. So let’s call it client A. Right? I’m going to click on next. You can really call it anything. Now once you’re created the project, you create something called video set. Now it’s very important to understand what a video set is. Inside a project, you can have multiple video sets. Now the way we create a video set is to help you distinguish between these different platform because story re uh sorry content re supports 39 different um content formats. Um, so you know, if you’re creating videos, let’s say about real estate staging, let’s call it uh real estate staging short, right? And the keyword is real estate staging. So let’s say you’re creating uh content about real estate staging. Your client is a real realtor and you’re creating content for him or her. uh you can create one set of real estate Tik Tok organic videos, right? Five of them. Then you can come back again, you can create another set inside the same um project, but this time for Instagram reel, right? So it’s going to be a little bit different. So what what this does is like a project is a client for example and then inside a project you can have multiple video sets each for a different platforms to help you organize and manage everything more easily. Okay. The third you can create YouTube standard videos which are vertical videos. Okay. Simple. So again uh I highly recommend doing five or six video per uh per set. Of course you can do more but you get a higher uh quality with smaller versions. Of course you can create another set of YouTube short videos again like you can create multiple sets for the same platform. There’s no limitation on that. Now what CTA does is it’s kind of like a watermark right so if I put website.com here it’s just going to add this text on whatever position I select. So if I put select bottom right, it’s just going to add this little text on the bottom right just like kind of like a watermark or if you want to put like a affiliate link or you just want to say created by you know Deborah uh anybody anything you want to do. All right. So once you’re done that um all you want to do is click on submit. Now what’s going to happen in the behind on the back end it says generating script. So it’s going to take a couple of minutes and it’s going to create five video scripts. Now each of these video script is based on a formula uh that we have studied and found works the best for short content for microcontent format. Right? So it has a a hook in the beginning. It has content and then it has a closure. Right? And all three of that mix and match thousands and thousands of permutation combinations help us create unique videos. Now as you see the script is generated literally takes less than a minute of the scripts are here. Now you see that all of these are script approval pending. Now there’s a reason why this happens. There’s a reason why this happened is because you’re interacting with an AI system. Content safety and content moderation limits have been applied. This is a very very important compliance tip. uh the the the way AI is in its current form and I I know a lot of gurus out there a lot of marketers after creators will take tell you you know you go out there type a keyword AI will write stuff for you you copy paste and you use that word that’s not the real use case of AI this is not what uh the companies who are behind the AI tech are recommending the the purpose of AI is to help you eliminate what I call a writer’s block, a creativity block. It gives you a head start, but you need to add more to it, right? That’s a compliance thing again by the companies uh running on the back end and we strongly believe in this as well. AI is not here to replace anybody. AI is here to assist it, right? So, which is exactly why we ask for script approval. So, once you go there, you click on edit. Now, of course, you can add a lot of uh more stuff. You can make minor changes. For example, right here it says space missing. A little bit more space. It’s not that big of a deal actually spacing. But you know, you can read more. Hey, hi there. You can add hi there. This is Mel. You know, your name or you can change this. Hi to hello. Whatever your uh style of speaking is because AI doesn’t know how you sound or you how you speak or how you talk. Right? If you’re thinking about getting into real estate saving, you won’t believe how easy it is to get started. So, this becomes your hook, right? In this video, we’ll share some tips to help you get started. Right? And now, this becomes the content. Finally, D. This becomes your content, right? And then the closure. If you found this video helpful, please give it a thumbs up and subscribe to our channel. Now, this since it is for YouTube, it’s saying subscribe to our channel. If it’s Tik Tok, it’s going to, you know, say like and follow, stuff like that. But you know, you can of course modify this. If you found this video helpful, please follow me or subscribe to my channel and go to this link. Whatever you want to do, right? Next, once you’re done, you can either save and go back and edit more scripts or you can just click on convert video. Now what convert video does again it works with the AI on the back end and finds important parts uh words keywords in the script and uh creates a storyboard adds a template uh for the video adds animation transitions the whole nine yard and the the the images the background images the background video clips it uses are based around the keywords and the words that I used in this script. So we have a efficiency of about 98% relevance right of course there can be some cases for example if you’re trying to create a video about Toyota uh Camry from 1990 we can’t find those videos because those are copyrighted videos right that’s a bit tricky to find those kind of videos so we can’t find those videos and certain times you can’t find exact video that you’re looking for now um let’s see this one over here. So, we want to add how you’d get started in real estate stage.
A little bit of a this and that. Now, I don’t like the background here. It’s a bit computer stuff. So, what I’m going to do is I’m going to click on this first. I’m going to select the background. So, if I click on it, you see this little dotted line, right? So, I’m going to click on it and then I’m going to delete this. Then, I’m going to go to backgrounds. I’m going to go to video and I’m going to search real estate.
Plenty of videos. I can mouse over them and you can preview each of these videos using just a mouse over. But, you know, if I if I like something, what I can do is I can just scroll down, watch more. It’s going to keep loading a lot of these copyright free, royalty-free videos. But if I like something, let’s say if I want this one. So, I click on it. And what’s going to happen, it’s going to add this video as the background. If you can see right here, it’s loading. It’ll give it a second. Um, and it’s going to add that video to the background.
Now, as you can see, the video is added. Now, of course, I can move all these elements around. If I want to move this here, I can move the white block here. Can select this little thing. I can try make it small if I want. Or I could just try to move it. Let me try to move it real quick.
And then I can move my text here. There we go. Brilliant. So again, you can customize things the way you want. You can go into text and you can, you know, add more text layer. If you select this text, you can change stuff around the text, you know, font and stuff. You can add more font size to it, you know, change the color if you don’t like the color. Um, you can add a background to it. You can remove the background. Lots of customizations that you can play. And then if you like this font styling theme, you can apply it to all the slides. It’s just going to go out there and apply it to all the slides. Um you can add more uh you know u media like if you want to add another gift or something or another video or you want to add another picture over here on top of the background, you can do that as well. See if we can find something. Yeah, this looks nice. So, if I do this, I added this and I can just go here and I can put this little thing here and I can make a little bit smaller. There you go. You know, so it kind of helps. And as you can see the website thing, this is the uh CT that we added when we were creating the um the video set. Now again, you can go into voice over to create voice over. Um, you can either add your own custom text that you want to use as a voiceover artificial uh voice over or you can click on this little check box, load all layer text. So, what when you do that, what it’s going to do, it’s going to copy this text right here. So, you don’t have to manually do it. And then you can select, you know, whatever language you want. Bunch of different really good sounding uh accents and uh characters that you can pick. And then click on generate. What it’s going to do, it’s going to generate the voice over and then you can use it. But once you generate, you can also use the same language and voice to generate voice over for all the slides, right? So you don’t have to manually do it as well. You can just click on use. It’s going to apply the voice over on this specific slide. Pretty simple. Now if you purchase the content re bundle you can you got access to sonority which creates much more human sounding u voice over like really really natural like right now um you can’t distinguish if I’m real or if I’m just AI script talking to you but don’t worry yeah I’m real I’m very real but that’s what Sonority does it just creates really really good or you can upload your own voice over you could go into recording and you and do your own voice over recording right inside the dashboard. Then you can add background music. Again, simple stuff. Uh upload your own background music. You can change transitions for each uh for each slide. And then you can add animation for each element, right? So first make sure you select the element. That’s very important, right? Uh and then you can just pick any you want and you can preview them as well how they look like, right? You can make them a little bit longer, a little bit faster, whatever you want, right? You can add some delays to it, a little bit of a delay added to it. Oops. Yeah, there you go. See, a little bit longer delay, that sort of stuff. So, you can do play around, see what you like. Um, you can add your watermark, your logos. Um, you can decide how long this slide is going to be on the screen. Now, as you can see, it’s already filled with a random number which is 9. Now, you would be like, why is it 9 seconds? It’s 9 seconds because the voice over that we created here is 9 seconds. So, the AI is going to read the script. It’s going to take 9 seconds for the AI to read that script. So, minimum 9 seconds. If you make it less than 9, it’s going to cut that voice over. So, don’t do that. Um, you can control the volume, excuse me, of the voice over. I usually keep it 100 and keep the music at like around 10%, usually gets the best result. You can try to make it lower as well. You can of course change the CTA if you want. You can change the position of the CTA this thing. Uh, then we have something called templates and template variation. So, um, this uh the entire video is using a single template. I think it’s using this one. Yeah, the nature, right? But if you don’t like this template for some reason, you have a bunch of different templates to go and use them as well. So you can what you can do is just click on it on a template and it’s going to replace the template for all the slides.
Then if you look this what has done it has changed the template for the entire video. But let’s say you don’t like this template, this variation on this specific slide. So you can change that too. You can each template has five to six different variations. So you can change the style and look and feel of each slide the way you want it. So you have a lot of customization option here just to make sure it fits exactly uh on your vision. Then intro and outro. Now, this is something that we’re going to show you today how you can create intro and outro uh on your videos using a brilliant app um that’s going to just change the way your video look. Just going to add about like 100% more personality to the video, get you higher retention, more views, and most importantly, more clicks to your profile or on your description links to get you more traffic to whatever you’re trying to promote. So this is the real trick that we’re going to be covering today on creating intro and outro and of course a lot of different things as well. But this is one of the major use cases of what we will be covering today. So um to cover this stuff and of course share a bunch of cool new things on this training and actually jump right into the real uh meat of the training. I’ve got my good friend Paul and Sid on the call uh who’s who are going to be uh sharing some incredible incredible stuff with you guys. So folks, make sure you grab your pen and pen and take notes. Try not to get distracted by notification stuff. take note because what we’re going to be sharing today on this session is just going to blow your minds and can be the difference between you making you know 60 70k a year to 200 to half a million a year using videos right so Paul thank you for uh taking the time out and doing this from peeps over to you thank you Abby all right let’s get jump right in here folks okay this is Paul I’m really excited to have you all here so now let’s talk about the number one biggest thing that you need to do to succeed with content reel Well, that is going to be traffic, right? Without any further delay because if you’re not going to get traffic to these videos, even if you get 100 videos, thousand videos or whatever the case might be, if you’re not getting traffic, then there’s no point to creating the videos ultimately, right? So, the second most important thing that you have to figure out then is whether traffic generation or getting results with videos is luck, is it skill, is it talent? What is it really? Well, I’m going to make it simple for you, okay? It is all about timing, right? and jumping on the right platform. Okay, you have the right timing, but you jump on the wrong platform, it’s not going to help you at all. So, to put things in perspective, back in 2018, I mentioned Tik Tok would be a massive, massive source of traffic. A lot of people laughed at me. They told me that Tik Tok is for dancing videos. It’s not for all these types of videos like educational videos and that sort of thing, right? So, then lo and behold, what happened? I figured out that if you have 1 billion users or something like that being used then obviously there’ll be a large portion of them who will want to watch other types of videos not just entertainment videos right so therefore Tik Tok in 2019 if you listen to me 2020 2021 and even 2022 by the way it was the fastest growing and still is the fastest growing video platform in the planet right now and has beaten YouTube. So in effect that means you need to have the right timing and you need to know what the right platform is. So meaning in other words you want to know what train to catch and you need to know what time to catch the train right that is going to allow you to succeed that’s going to give you better odds to succeed. So today what we’re going to be talking about and it’s straightforward I want you to think about this is that if you did the same amount of work let’s say you created a video or you created 10 videos you created 100 videos with content reel let’s say and you created those videos and you basically uploaded those videos right you upload those videos into a secret platform and you got 10 times more results or 20 times more results 10 to 20x you didn’t do anything extra you didn’t do more work you didn’t do any snazzy crazy little tricks, nothing. You just did this one thing where you did the right timing and the right platform and you’re going to get 10 to 20x more traffic, more sales. I’m going to show you some examples of it as well in real time so you can copy it and start implementing it right away. Now, to make sure that this is going to be relevant, there’s one key date I want you to keep in mind and that date is February 1st, 2023. Okay, why is that a relevant date? Let’s talk about that. So on February 1st, 2023, what’s happening is as you can see here specifically YouTube shorts, okay, YouTube shorts platform YouTube shorts is introducing monetization to their platform. So what that means is that right now if you publish your videos on Facebook, you publish your videos on Instagram, you publish your videos on Tik Tok or whatever it might be, you or anybody else by the way, they’re spending a lot of time in creating all these videos, you don’t get a single penny from those videos. So that means effectively people are publishing it just for traffic purposes or whatever the case might be, brand building and that sort of thing. So, YouTube starting February 1st, it’s going to allow everybody to have that monetization available. It has two benefits. You’re going to be able to generate money just by publishing videos where YouTube is going to pay you money for people who are watching your videos, of course, with ads. And you they don’t have to buy a single penny. They don’t have they don’t have to spend a single penny. They don’t have to buy anything. They don’t have to even invest anything or not even have to actually even subscribe to an email list or mailing list or anything like that. All they have to do is watch the video. Right? So, now that’s very enticing for you, right? But not only that, there’s another key element that’s going to be happening in YouTube shorts. You’re going to have all these people in Facebook, Tik Tok, and all these other in influencers. They’re going to all migrate over to YouTube. Okay? YT, I’m going to put it here because they’re going to get paid for it. That’s going to create, if you put a simple chart, it’s going to create a massive spike in traffic for YouTube shorts. I’ll show you some real life data so you actually understand this. So that means we are here in the first innings. Okay, that’s what February 1st was going to be all about. Now, generally opportunities like these, they last about 6 months to a year generally. We’ve seen that with Tik Tok, we’ve seen that with Facebook in the past. We’ve seen that with YouTube also normal YouTube in the past. Also seen that with Google search rankings in the um before. So, if you can come in here, you could make all the mistakes in the world. You could be creating the worst videos in the world. You could even be not even spending uh time on keyword research and all this other mumbo jumbo stuff. But you will still actually come out much better than everybody else. Right? So because of the fact that the timing is right and then the platform that you chosen is also right. Okay. So now keeping this in mind, let’s go back and let’s talk about how and why this is beneficial because you could just do one little thing, one little tweak. Instead of publishing your videos into Instagram or Twitter or whatever, which you could do, I rather figure out on solving information overload and also shiny object syndrome. Right? So you want to focus your efforts on one thing. Okay. So let’s go back into the content real application. So that one thing you want to focus on, right? That will be simplified. If you have your focus, it’ll be much easier. It’s going to be YouTube shorts. Okay? So that way at the end of this presentation today, you’re going to immediately go and implement it right out of the gate. Now I’m going to give you all the tools, the resources, and in fact, I will even have my team and I coach you, mentor you every step of the way on Skype or via phone, right? He’ll give you a phone number. or you can call and that way if you make a profit you can pay for it using the profits you generate if not we don’t want a single penny I’ll give you all the tools the resources and the training for free okay so the main idea here is that I want you to actually benefit I want you to actually grow your brand and your business without spending a single penny all right so let’s talk about that uh real quickly here so if we go into the YouTube shorts platform so for example if I went into YouTube and I typed in the word weight loss and then I put this uh uh you know shorts right this tag you’ll see all these shorts coming in. Now, I want to show you this for example. So, this girl uh posted a video which got some 8 million views. Let’s go into her channel. I’ll show you something even better, right? So, if you go into her videos, right, check this out. Her long form videos, and I just did it randomly, by the way. Okay. Um so, 14,000 views is her normal average everyday video that she’s posting. That’s a 24minute video, right? 21 minute, 21 minute. Her average views are 7,000, 17,000, and 14,000. Right now, if I go into her shorts, which is this, which is what I’m talking about here, right? You go into that, you click on that button, check this out. Her average video here is 43,000 views here, 449, 60, 101, 128,000. You see this? It’s 10 times more at the minimum than what she gets. Sometimes even more, right? This is what I’m talking about. If you are getting, if you’re publishing videos on YouTube and you got 50 views, 100 views, times that by 10 or even 100, that is the kind of potential you’re going to be looking to get when you are going to do this starting February 1st because there’s going to be a massive influx of traffic who’ll be watching these shorts. Look at this. She doesn’t even have a single million view video, but she’s got so many like three videos of it published in the last week, right? You see this? 7 million views, 7 million views, 1.9 million views. Right? So, the point I’m trying to make here is that you could do what everybody else is doing, which is publish like this, which takes a lot of time, by the way, to create videos like this that get 10,000, 5,000 views, or even less in your case, right? Or you can go in and click shorts. You see this? It can go across anybody. You can go back here, right? Um, and you can see some other channels as well. Let’s go back here real quick. Okay? I’m going to show you because it’s important. This is important that you pay attention to. Okay, so uh there’s all these other tons of videos here, right? So, um this is right here, weight loss transformation, 139 million views. Let’s go back here, right? If I go to videos, look at this. An average video gets 860 views here, right? 4,000 views, 652 views, right? 428 views, right? Now, going to uh shorts. Okay, I’m not even going to popular. I could have clicked on this. No, no, I’m going to go to shorts here on the top. Right. Let’s click on what’s happening there. Look at that. Right? Same channel which is getting 600 views and so on. Getting 6,000 here, 4,000 here, 10,000 here, 5,000 here. 10x exactly 10 times more. Right? Maybe even more, right? Sometimes some of them even go more viral, by the way. So, uh, some of them get millions of views, but on average, you’re seeing it, right? It’s 10 times more. Somebody’s getting 600 views is getting 10,000 views for on a mobile device. What happens is that when the video is playing, because of how the mobile device is structured, right? Generally speaking, how the mobile result structured immediately when they watch a video like this, they’re going to get more subscribers because it’s going to say right below that video, subscribe. So, what’s going to happen is right below in the mobile device right about here. Okay? So, right about here, it’s going to have that subscribe button right right here. Right? So, that what happens is when somebody’s watching it, just click this one button and they become a subscriber. Now, when they subscribe, they can go back here to the normal channel and they’re going to still be able to see these kind of video views here, right? That’s the beauty here. That’s the power and right now most people check videos on their mobile devices anyway especially vertical kind of comrad is even more so on mobile right so hope that is uh making sense and what you need to do let’s talk about then how do we monetize because one key thing you’re noticing here right you must be seeing this quite a bit right which is always right even in the case of let’s say for example like we went back um you know every single short video right this one this one this one This one, this one, all of them have one basic, if you will, commonality, right? What it is is that they have a human being here, right? As a human, a person, right? Because that’s the thing, right? When you’re consuming content, you don’t want to consume a PowerPoint presentation. Most of the time, you want to consume somebody, right? Cuz people have emotions and people will reach you uh in a better way possible, right? So what I mean by that is in the case of let’s say uh this girl right here is publishing this kind of content right which is uh her shorts content right most of the time it is her just talking right so like this you see this this particular video got 820,000 views okay and I want you to zoom in on this one because it’s important it got most amount of views than any other one that came in recent times right so let’s let’s let’s zoom that in let’s see what’s happening right check this out basic video right check this out really fancy you start speaking in front of the camera, right? Like this type of a video and that’s gotten a million views. So my point is then and I want to ask you here, what if you can create a video like this, okay? Just like this, right? That you can then create in just maybe a couple of minutes without you ever being in front of the camera. You basically you never being in front of the camera. You can create any amount of videos like this. unlimited amount of videos without you ever being in front of the camera, without you having any audio equipment, without you having to even speak a single word, without you even having to type anything if you wish, right? Wouldn’t that be a game changer for you, for you, for your clients or any other business? Just just let me know in the chat box if that makes sense, right? Because that is critical, right? To re really do a gamechanging aspect of it because now a lot of times when I talk something like this, people are going to be like like you, you might be wondering, oh, okay, I get it. we just hire a bunch of spokesperson people and then have them speak and I’m going to pay. Well, that’s another option you could do that. That’s what people have been talking about for a while now. But my point is if you go into a platform like fiverr.com, right? This is fiverr.com which is one of the top um freelancer websites. You can see like you have these uh videos with like spokespersons like these, right? Like these like this right here. Now the thing is that yeah, you can pay this person right here and publish them. Yeah, you can publish them and so on. The problem here is though, you see this, you can, it starts off at 110 bucks, right? Um, basically, and then it goes all the way to $375 and then look at it. It takes this person 10 days to generate um, you know, deliver something. So, let’s keep this number in mind, right? 375. Is this the case? See, because often times what I see is people always equate success to hard work. Okay? You don’t have to really work hard to be successful. What you need is a strategy, right? You got to do something that is valuable in the marketplace. So let’s go back here to uh this uh Fiverr platform. Let’s see. Let’s say I want to get somebody else here, right? Um let’s I like this one right here. Let’s pick somebody random here. All right. So here again, starting price is 150 and then goes to 335. 7 days delivery. 200 words. 200 words is just under uh give or take about a minute. So something around 45 seconds or so depending on you know the speed and that sort of thing. So uh she’s going to do it in green screen with some uh wardrobe or whatever right. So this video right again so a video like this one like say for example right how do we leverage the aspect of vertical videos right out of the gate. So my question to you is then this is where I want you to clearly understand this is 335 bucks here right to create a 200word video about just under 60 seconds and now you’re publishing YouTube shorts for it. Let’s say you create 100 videos, right? Let’s say 1 minute each or whatever it might be. So that’s 100. That’s $3,335, right? Now, if this $3,335 made you $30,000, right? 10x, right? Um $30,000. Would you invest that $3,000? Let me please answer that question if you agree with me. Like meaning you paid this person right here, right? um $335 for every single video, but in the end, because of the traffic it generated, because the leads it generated and all that stuff, it generated $30,000. Would you pay that 335 bucks? Of course, right? Because every single time it is generating a revenue stream and you would do so. Now, the problem though is that to figure out what is worth 30,000, what is not worth 30,000, that’s the hard part, right? So, let’s go a little bit deeper here and let’s let’s discuss this other aspect, which is what if, right? What if we can do the same thing where say for example 335 bucks right if we got for $335 right this $335 we could generate unlimited such videos where this person right here this one right here or even 100 other people like her right were able to generate videos for you on demand can create unlimited amount of them would that be worthy of an investment because for meaning you create it even in 5 years from now and that sort of thing. Would that be would that work for you? You can now do that with AI. Basically, you could basically do it in such a way which I’m going to show you right now. Especially works so well with content reel. You could clone her and even hundreds of thousands of people like her and then you can actually have her or some other spokespersons just like that as an example. I’m saying and you could have her or hundreds of other spokespersons like this using AI to speak anything that you type and you can create unlimited such videos. Now this is important because AI does not sleep. Robots does not have any rest. Right? So in that case, in this case you see 7 days delivery. You could do that in 7 seconds, right? 7 seconds. That’s how fast AI can create it. So that means effectively you can now immediately create spokesperson videos and then you can publish them using the power of AI where it’s going to even sing off of any audio you file you give it. Meaning it’s going to sing it perfect lip sync. You’re going to even speak anything you type. And on top of that, do it in any language you desire as well with perfect lip sync, perfect audio that is human sounding audio, all that kind of good stuff. Isn’t that powerful? So, we did a test recently, right? So, we did a a simple system like this with like a AI spokesperson like what you’re seeing right now in the hardest to rank category, which is basically credit, repair, foreclosure, that kind of an industry. And this is a completely AI made video, right? As you can see here, this person’s gotten 19,000 views cuz YouTube does not consider this at duplicate content. If you had to get 19,000 views for a video like this, you have to spend at least $5 a click, which means effectively would have cost well over 50 60 $70,000 or more on at the bare minimum, right? You get for free. And this is not even YouTube shorts. It would get 10 times more traffic if it was uh YouTube shorts basically, right? Cuz it’s perfect lip sync. Now let me show you the high quality of this with actual real text to speech and also see how the lip sync looks like because then you’ll understand exactly how powerful it is because now videos like this you can create and you can actually completely upload it into the content real application. Let me show you how. So you go into the content real application and you click on the background for any slide. You see this background option and then when you click on that background option you can go into the upload tab. So you see this upload media tab and you can upload these videos and I’ll show you how you can create unlimited amount of these videos on autopilot. But once you upload them, it’s going to appear something like this. Isn’t that cool? So I have a spokesperson video giving you intros, outros, or even the entire video for you that you can publish as YouTube shorts and all other good stuff. You can add like like what I did here. Call to actions, right? Which you can customize to your heart’s desire, right? You can change things, you can customize things, you can do all kinds of cool things like what I have for you here. Now, let me show you the quality of it in full HD, okay? Because you have to see it to really believe it. Finding the right gifts for Christmas can be a time-consuming process, as you need to pick the perfect gift for every age and personality. Here are five gift ideas for the holiday season that should bring a smile on everyone. First one is a Lego building kit that are cleverly built blocks that nurture creativeness and at the same time challenges kids to be more and do more. This timeless classic is designed for collaborative fun for all ages. The second gift is a portable coffee maker. Upgrade your at home coffee game with this sleek machine that can brew a cup of coffee or express with just a single push of a button. Whether you are grabbing a quick cup of coffee out of the door or service coffee to a crowd, this has you covered. With multiple brew sizes and a strong brew feature, you can enjoy a perfect coffee anytime. The third gift is an all-in-one virtual reality headset with a growing trend of metaverse. This is not just a gaming device, but an immersive experience generator that brings hours of joy in an interactive world that includes virtual concerts, sporting events, and videos filmed in 360°. All you need is an app on your smartphone and internet access to explore new worlds that are so realistic, you will feel like you are there in person, experiencing it all by yourself. These three gifts should not only bring you lots of joy, but we’ll check all the boxes of a perfect gift that is applicable to all ages and personality. Now, as a tongue-in-cheek thing, I got as somebody with doctor’s costume to speak about Christmas gifts. But the reason I want to do is just explain and show the point that they can speak anything. Now, how does this whole thing work? Okay, I mean, you can basically create unlimited videos with this again with no monthly fees, yearly fees, and all that mumbo jumbo stuff. But I’ll get to that in just a second. But check this out. This part right here, right, is where the whole magic happens with the lip sync and all that kind of stuff. But they can speak in any language. Okay, first you got any language it can be spoken, right? And then you can have them speak in any accent. Okay, you can also have them sing a song, right? Sing songs as well, which is kind of cool. By the way, if you’re in if you’re interested, you can do that. You can also take in any audio or meaning you can have any voice over or whatever you want or you can even basically not just do audio but you can also do text to speech. Okay, so TTS so text to speech in many different languages and voices and all that stuff. So meaning you can upload your own voice over as well. It’ll perfectly lip sync. You can put a song like you sang or somebody else sang and then it’ll automatically sing it perfectly. You can do anything you want with your own virtual AI, if you will, if you will, human who will do everything, right? A little pal of yours who can do all kinds of good stuff right out of the gate. Now, why is this a game changer? As I mentioned before, it’s going to save you thousands of dollars in the long run, but also you have an action plan now where, you know, you’re creating those YouTube short videos right out of the gate. Right now, why is this so powerful? Well, it’s because a human being will allow you to actually uh if you will have a better relationship and better engagement with a person than anything else out there. Okay? Now, this is something we’ve done tests on. Okay? I’m not just saying this just for the sake of uh saying it because it’s important. You need to understand, right? I mean, everybody talks about something, oh, it sounds cool, it sounds great or whatever. But the point I’m trying to make here is that uh if you if you look at real life right what you see here um is that often times a lot of times I’ve seen this across the board the difference is when people are speaking with the real person it’s more likely that you can engage with them better. So, for example, this right here, we’ve done tests where I ran this where you had a spokesperson like this, right? Speaking with some animations on the left here. That can be like a landscape videos, but also it can be a portrait vertical video too. By the way, when we tested it, it was getting 20x more results. Okay? So, that means basically something where 100 visitors would come in, one person would buy, you would get 20 times more results, right, with this. And instead of just having a PowerPoint style presentation or slideshow or whatever it was right now, this particular video, this one video did 1.4 million in sales. Okay, this one video. Now, this is the reason why I’m telling you if you want to go to the next level, you got to do what’s working rather than struggling to find out what’s not working and that sort of thing. Okay, this is real stats, right? Because you got to understand, you know, people, you probably noticed this already. The most successful people are using this right now because it helps you emote. You know who you’re buying from. You understand like what’s happening and all that, right? And that’s what I’ve been doing for the last uh 3 years. In the last 15 years, I’ve done well over $100 million in sales. Well over, right? Very few people can say that, right? More than 100 million in sales. Very few. And the secret has been where just emotionally interacting with people. You don’t have to be a great copywriter if that person can emotionally engage with you. You don’t have to be a great salesp person if you can engage with people, right? But you don’t, you know, who wants to be in front of the camera all day long? You can automate this whole process. That’ll be even better, right? So, when we started figuring out how to automate this process, the results went nuts. Okay, here is our uh ClickBank account, for example. I want to just show you this real quick. Um, a lot of people know ClickBank or is a stop. Um, you can sell any products, services, digital goods, and stuff like that. So, this one is 3.379 million that was made in this one account, right? In a very short period of time. And again, it’s a real account. It’s it’s not a fake screenshot or something like that like you would see right now in a given month making about 200,000 a month and that sort of thing right as you can see here. Now the reason why I’m showing you this right is not to brag but to show you the power of engaging with people in an automated way because now you can reach people across different industries even if you have zero expertise in that industry even if that client has no clue right they’re giving you a project just because the value is there in that particular you know that engagement that that human is generating for you now you guys are and gals here are probably familiar with JVZoo uh I’m the number one affiliate there I’ve been a number one sales up percentage with products there for a long period of time. Here you go. It’s uh 55 million commissions, 11.64 million in sales here in this one platform. Um the reason why again I I want to kind of show you this is not many people can do this. The very best of the best can do this. Okay? Nobody’s able to match this kind of results because again as I’m mentioning it is about not about me bragging. It’s but to show you what’s working right now. Okay? You want to use YouTube shorts from February 1st. It’s going to take the world by storm. Well, you got to do these things, okay? You got to have some leverage, right, in the marketplace where you got to have that advantage that other people don’t have, right? So, what can you do? What are the other types of videos you can create? So, let me show you another example of something where you can do this for a say, for example, in different languages as well, right? Let’s talk about that. Let me show you an example of this in different languages. So, that you can create one video in multiple languages as well if you wish. Okay, let me show you an example of that.
Forejour.
Animated video
agency.
Hello human.
Pretty
cool, right? Let me show you one other one where you can see like in a bakery scenario and that sort of thing. Then I’ll show you how you can even go a step further. You can create hundreds of thousands of such people out of thin air which is going to blow you away. You’re looking for a quality bakery for your next event. You probably have a lot of questions such as do you create baked goods for the type of event I am having? Are you available for the date of my event? or even do your baked goods taste good. No matter your question, we have the answers. Whether you are looking for a wedding cake, cupcakes for a party, or even if you are looking for diabetic options for your event, we can help. Our bakers have years of experience providing tasty treats for birthdays, weddings, business functions, or any event you may have. We even have delicious baked goods for your everyday needs. Contact us today to learn more about all of our delicious baked goods. We look forward to providing you amazing service. Let me show you one other example there where you can change the costume or whatever you want. You can create a doctor uh human, right? If you wish, whatever you want. Are you constantly bothered by back or neck pain? Were you in a car accident and just can’t get rid of the constant aching? Do you frequently get headaches, nerve pain, or numbness? If so, you’ve come to the right place. We are proud to be the premier local chiropractor and getting our clients pain-free is our number one goal. We have helped hundreds of clients greatly reduce or eliminate their pain in just a few sessions. Don’t suffer another day. Contact us now to arrange a free, no obligation chiropractic consultation and let us help you get on the path to becoming painfree. Now, I want to show you something really cool. Okay? What if you could right change this spokesperson to anybody you want? Meaning for branding, you’re not using the same 20 people or same 30 people like everybody else. Well, what if you can just convert a photo into a talking, laughing, singing spokesperson or a human, right? Well, you can do that with our next generation technology. Again, I’ll give you this tool pretty much for free, okay? Today, I’ll talk about what I mean by that uh in just a second because you should be getting results as quickly as humanly possible with it. But more important than that, I’m going to do something where what if you got this tool which can now you see what I’m going to showing you right now which is just going to be pretty cool which you can do this. Let me show you real life. So you can convert any photo into a talking speaking human. Okay. Again perfect lip sync perfect everything just off of one photo. You see that? Isn’t that cool? Super powerful right? Because that means you can create any variations. Okay. You can create hundreds of thousands of different individuals out of thin air like so you see this and that is a game changer because nobody else is doing this right now okay nobody else like this concept which I’m talking about okay now why is this so powerful so let me get into this a little bit in in detail here so you understand okay it’s cuz it’s going to blow you away and it’s going to change the game forever for you okay so what’s happening basically is that you we are getting a real human being that can be converted into any person just of a photo, right? So that means it’s going to give you infinite possibilities. So for example, if you’re doing vertical videos or nonvertical videos or whatever, you have full flexibility. Yes. But also, it allows you to create videos in unique scenarios like this, which works really well in vertical uh format. Check check this out. Looking to buy or sell a home? No problem. Most realtors only want to sell your home. We go beyond that. We offer full service leasing, property management, and selling. So whether you want to sell the property now or keep the property as a long-term investment, we give you the option to choose what works best for individual financial situation. We perform the proper due diligence on your behalf, such as running comparisons for both rent and sale, as well as helping you to determine your best route. Best of all, our fees are very affordable to everyone. Ready to get started? Contact us today. Pretty powerful, right? I mean I can keep showing you on and on but I want to show you how this whole process works so that you don’t have to worry about ever have facing any copyright issues or anything like that. That’s very important too, right? So basically uh you get hundreds of thousands of such variations. So I’m talking hundreds of thousands of people that you can do that are copyright free. Okay? So there’s no need to worry about ever worrying about some uh Tom Cruz’s video coming in and Tom Cruz coming back after you or some politician or celebrity. These are people where hundreds of thousands of dollars were spent to make sure that you never have to worry about copyright issues yourself. So what would happen? How the system work is you got a real life person and then a generated person, right? So the attributes of a real life person, a real life person has paid a lot of money. They taken their permission and then the attributes of them is taken, right? And then you can create your own spokesperson like this. You see this real life and then generated. Okay? That means there’s no way that the generated person who does not exist in the world uh is ever going to have somebody who looks like them. Okay? This is important because you don’t want a client that you’re spending a lot of money to acquire and you’ve spent a lot of time to acquire and then they come back to you and say, “Hey, look, you know, um, you know, I I I am having an issue because this person is not giving me permission to use this data.” Right? That becomes a problem, right? I mean, you probably see that. So, you never have to worry about copyright issues. Okay? It’s that easy. It’s that simple, right? So, how this works is very, very easy, straightforward, right? You just pick who you like from the checklist or in this case the list of you know basically thousands and hundreds of thousands of people uh based on the attributes you select and this is going to save because you never have to be in front of the camera yourself. You never have to even do anything, right? And then you just click one button, you select this person, right, that you like, right? It can be any person really. And then it you save that person. Okay? After you select that person, you save that person. Okay? And once you save that person, right? And I’ll show you how that process works. Um uh it’s going to say, okay, successfully saved. And then you go in, you click on that one button, then you click this person’s um photo here, right? Again, out of hundreds of thousands of people. And automatically it’s going to change that buddy or pal of yours to become any kind of a human spokesperson. Right? So in other words to simplify this you can convert any photo into a talking human video. Isn’t that cool? Like so and with any age, ethnicity and all that in any costume, any clothing cuz there’s different clothing types you can pick from. And then now once you like what you see and again from a simple text that you can copy and paste, okay? And then you can just copy and paste that and then you can create off of that text any kind of talking video with all these animations and elements and and all this other good stuff with just one single photo as well. That gives you unlimited possibilities and flexibilities, right? That way every business you’re consulting with if you’re creating it or every business you are creating, maybe you have an e-commerce business, you have an affiliate marketing business, you can have a different mascot for every single one of them. And that way because you can create unlimited amount of these things, you never have to worry about ever, you know, missing out on potential of this new next generation technology like this, right? So, uh once you create the video, so you give it a name like so, um you give it a name, you do it like uh 1080p HD quality, you click create video, and then it’s going to start rendering. And the beauty is since it’s on the cloud, you can generate unlimited videos while the other one is being created. So, you can clone that existing video. It gives a progress bar and it never uses your computer speed. You could be using a 10, 20 year old computer, it’ll work just fine. You can be using an iPad, it works just fine, right? Even mobile devices, you can get away with it. But just that sometimes, you know, to visually see it in a mobile device, it might just be a little bit complicated for you where it might be too tiny, but it still works in mobile as well. And now you see this, I can clone this. I can change the script over a little bit again. And then I can change the voice over or whatever. And I can quickly get up and running with this. It’s that easy. And the beauty is I can upload my own audio file. I can upload my own songs for singing. I can upload anything. It will perfectly lip-s sync that aspect throughout the process. Okay, isn’t that cool? So, that is the beauty here. And it works across the text to speech, works across hundreds of different languages and it fully integrates with the content real application. As you can see here, you can import the videos and then you can add call to actions. You can do all that and you upload it to YouTube shorts right out of the gate. And the beauty is all the scripts that content wheel generates for you, you can even use those scripts as well to create uh videos where you can get these spokespersons to speak anything that you type. That’s a huge game changer, isn’t it? Now, let’s go back here and let’s talk about how much this thing costs, right? Because that’s important that you understand because I want to make sure that you have zero risk on your part and you start getting results right after you watch uh this video and then you can go in and take action right out of the gate. So normally what you see right in platforms like this you see okay there is this main offer there’s upsell this is this another upsell another upsell and all that and don’t you hate upselles right I mean must be frustrating and you don’t know what you’re purchasing and then start off here and then you end up at like $1,74 or something like that. So what if you do not have to ever pay any extra? So there’s no upsells or anything to worry about. That would be a big big relief, right? And if you could get just get this for $497, right, with no monthly fees, no yearly fees, no quarterly fees, or no credits and all that stuff, with unlimited videos, with just one video, you’re already making a profit. Correct? So, the best deal you can get, you can go click on the button below and you can get it for that, but that would still be awesome. I wanted to do something special again for a very short period of time because we’re changing the pricing to monthly and a credit space system very soon as early as next week. So, this is basically the last chance you’re going to get it for a onetime payment. So, instead of paying $497, you’re going to get it at a rock bottom price. Not 397, not even 297, just a onetime payment for lifetime access of just $199. Right? that you see right here. $199 for lifetime access to this awesome technology with all the updates included for free. We actually introduced the version 2.0 recently. We gave it away for free as a free update. Everybody were grandfathered and tomorrow when we change it into a credit space system and in a monthly system, you still get it for this low onetime price and you get to keep it. You’re grandfathered in and you are good to go. You don’t have to pay any monthly fees, yearly fees or any of that mumbo jumbo stuff. And also it comes with one-on-one assistance right on the phone or on Skype. It will give you a phone number to call in or alternatively you can come on Skype as well and we will personally solve all your issues. Stock by integration with content real and as well as this human pal technology. All you have to do is go to the link that you see on your screen or just click on the button below and this bonus will be added into your members area. So you can start that way where you have somebody to call in. Okay. Mondays to Fridays uh 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Eastern time which is New York time. You can give a call. Somebody’s always available. somebody will uh sort out your issues and also help you navigate through things and and take you to the finish line. My team and I will be there to mentor you every step of there because I feel it’s not just about what you get. It’s about the mentorship and the coaching that will take you to the finish line because as somebody who’s done well over $und00 million in sales over the last decade that I’ve been doing this stuff online, I know for a fact the secret is not just the toolkit like content trail and this human pal technology, but also you need that handholding and that mentorship to drag you to the finish line, right? to get you to uh basically the latest trends and latest technologies and that sort of thing. That’s what you’re going to be getting access to. Now, if you’re in the United States or United Kingdom, we’re also going to be giving you if you’re in the US or the UK, you get six full months no payments, no interest in the United States and 4 months no payments, no interest in the UK uh UK. That means basically you’re getting it for free today if you just use the PayPal checkout option and then there’s going to be an option showing up in the bottom for you like this PayPal credit for the United States or United Kingdom. Use that option. Basically, that means for six full months, you’re not going to pay anything. By then, you should be getting profits with this, getting results with it. And in United Kingdom, it’s about 4 months. It’s a long time to just one video will make a profit for you. It’s literally getting for free. And the beauty is in 29 days, you decide this is not for you. You didn’t pay anything. You got every single penny back. You got my mentorship, my coaching, and all that kind of stuff for free. And also, you had somebody to mentor you and all that kind of good stuff. Plus, I have some awesome bonuses uh for you as well. And these bonuses are worth a lot, but you can keep meaning you can keep all these bonuses just giving it a try, right? Give this human pal technology a try. Specifically for content real customers, you have a special deal, right? Um and you have a special coupon that gets applied to bring the price down to $199. Otherwise, the normal price even without the monthly and recurring is 290 bucks or something like that. So getting almost a 30% discount regardless in the special link that you can click on the button below and get it. Now, the first bonus you’re going to get, you’re going to keep all these bonuses, is 10 days step-by-step success training. So, this covers things like affiliate marketing, how to use uh basically YouTube shorts to get success, how do you monetize your YouTube shorts, how do you basically take advantage of this YouTube shorts uh mayhem, if you will, that is happening for traffic generation and all that kind of good stuff. Uh so, it’s 10 different topics, 10 different days. You choose what you like. We’re talking about affiliate marketing because I’m the number one affiliate marketer in the world right now. We’re going to be talking about uh basically um in across many platforms too. And we’re going to be talking about for example consulting agency. How do you get clients for your agency? Creating video creation services which works really well with uh content reel. How do you do social media marketing services? How do you do for example if you will traffic generation for your own business? How do you generate leads for your own business? We’re going to be talking about different topics specific to you to get results, okay, and get success. So that’s what this whole thing will be focused upon. Now the second thing is you’re going to be getting the mockup video creator. Again, you can keep this technology for free. Even if you decide this human pal technology is not for you, you get every single penny back. That’s my way of saying and thank you for trying it out, just for giving it a whirl. Uh this mockup video maker will create mockup videos for you across different platforms. And it works perfectly with Content Reel as well cuz it’s going to create laptop mockups, mobile phone mockups, and all that stuff you can import into Content Reel as backgrounds for your videos. Okay? And you’re also going to get our niche dashboard application, which is where you can become an expert without even being an expert in any industry. where for example we had a client recently where they had a client who was uh for example in the DJ uh services business for nightclubs weddings and that sort of thing and they use this niche dashboard application where it has a whole bunch of readym made voiceovers uh sales scripts copyrightiting frameworks and all this stuff built in it had a DJ services script they basically and the voiceover as well included they created a video for that and then immediately started charging money it basically did the entire video script writing for them and that saved them a whole much of time. So, this is a special bonus. You can keep this again just for giving Human Pal a try because I’m so confident it’s going to work for you that I’d rather you take this bonus just to giving it a try because I know for a fact you’re going to get results if you just give it a try and it’s going to be something that’s going to put you on the map to success, right? You’re also going to get our human pal template request club which is uh basically where instead of paying extra money for some upsells, downells or monthly template club and all that, you get it included here where you can suggest features and we will publish those features into our road map. I’ll show you that in just a second. And then we will keep that as top priority. Those features will be the top priority for you. And of course, you’re also going to get our vid editor application which is like a Camtasia premier style video editor with screen sharing and all that. Plus, you can merge together multiple videos like your, for example, content re uh video plus your human pal video. You can have two human pals talking to each other, conversational style videos, and you can add screen share to it. Add all kinds of good stuff with it. You’re going to get this. You can keep this bonus as well just for giving it a shot. This alone is worth $300 on its own, but you’re going to get this. And you’re also going to get vid resizer application, which is a powerful application that will allow you to resize your videos. with content real 2 even human pal you’re having these vertical videos but what you want to upload them into LinkedIn LinkedIn has a different size uh let’s say for example you want to upload them into for instance uh Twitter Twitter has a different format right has a different format so it’s going to resize them automatically into these formats and then when you’re publishing them you’re going to get better results than ever before because they’re going to get accepted into these platforms and it’s going to do that automatically. Now, the other awesome bonus you’re going to be getting, probably the most important bonus, is the video marketplace builder. So, this video marketplace builder allows you to have a funnel builder, membership site builder, as well as uh a built-in agency website builder. So, you can actually do drag and drop editing and all that. It’s backed by WordPress. It comes with our own uh web hosting included. So, you don’t have to ever worry about hosting fees or anything like that. You get this. Again, you can keep this bonus as well if you decide pal is not free and you leave. The reason why I want to give this to you because it comes with 60 different payment options and also the default of 3,000 templates that are included. It allows you to create a marketplace. Okay, that’s the default template where you can create different services that people can order from you on this platform. People can order video creation services, YouTube shorts services, traffic services, SEO services, all these other services that you want to offer, you can put them in one place and then people can pay you right out of the gate and it’s going to send the invoices and all that stuff automatically as well. Uh this is the platform which allows you to do that. very very powerful as you can imagine. You’re going to get this as a special bonus as well. Okay. And why is this so powerful? I want to show you how much I’m investing in your business. Okay. So, this is our Amazon cloud services. Okay. This just where we host humanpal as well as these websites we’re talking about. Just these two platforms. On last month, we spent $22,55. And this month, we’re already uh projected to about $24,000. Okay. This is my real account. Again, you see my name here. It’s a real account. It’s not a fake screenshot or anything. This is the time type type of commitment I’m doing for you, okay? This is the kind of investment I’m putting into your business. So, you know that it’s not some cheap $30 a month or $100 a month kind of hosting. It’s something that is going to be where it’s going to last a long period of time and getting the very best infrastructure. In fact, we got accepted into recent Amazon uh startup accelerator program because Amazon themselves were so impressed by this technology. Even they were blown away by it. They also wanted to help us out with product management assistance and some other things as well. And that allows us to put the best technology in terms of faster rendering, in terms of basically cutting edge machine learning technologies and all that stuff built in. So you know for a fact that this technology is going to last in the long long time. So last year we did about $10 million in sales. So I can update this in the long run. Even if this project is not profitable for me at 119 bucks, it’s not profitable for me. But in the future, we’re going to be offering basically a credit space system and a monthly based system for new customers. You don’t have to pay that. But for new customers, we’re going to be doing that and they’re going to happily pay for it because we’re going to be the number one platform in the world because what what our goal is is with with you as a founding member, you come in, you’re going to be grandfathered in at this onetime price. We want to take your feedback and so that sort of thing. So, because as you can see here, this technology got 793 4.7 star reviews here. As you can see here, it’s the number one platform uh in getapp.com. It’s one of the top software review websites. And if that wasn’t enough as well, you see this, right? uh likelihood to recommend nine out of 10. Um exceptionally good experience dealing with it. Uh it’s such a high value for such a low price. Excellent software and training because I do believe the training is also important. This is the best money ever spent in digital marketing in entrepreneurial field, right? Because we have the best interest of the heart for our clients, right? You see this 793 and if you can go here, look at this 792 here as well in this uh platform, right? As you can see here and again as you see it’s 1999 bucks. We’re going to keep changing this price. is going to be moved to monthly soon, but you don’t have to worry about it. Again, we’re not perfect. I would like it to be five, to be honest, but hey, we are only going to get better and better with time, right? And the goal here is we want to be the number one platform by beating this platform right here. Okay, they’re the number one platform in the in this industry and we’re I would consider number two. And uh they’ve raised 50 million here, but it says overall they raised well over $100 million in uh actually money from capitalist to actually fund this uh project. It’s very expensive to build a project like this with AI, video and all that stuff. We’ve spent millions ourselves personally, right? So to beat a behemoth like this, right, we wanted to make it our platform, the best platform ever. So that’s what our goal is. That’s what I we want to achieve. That’s why we got such high reviews and everything and we’re making things better and better, that sort of thing. Now, if you go into this platform, you can go buy it if you want. Uh there’s a number one platform right now. We’re number two. It’s fine. I want to be the number one, right? So if you see here, they have a personal account, $30 per month, right? And let me zoom this in here. As you can see, $30 per month for just 10 video credits per month. One credit is one video. So for 10 minutes worth of content, it’s $30. So it’s about $3 per video. And that also is only for personal use. You cannot use for client projects, cannot use it for ads, you cannot use for any commercial activity, right? And if you want corporate accounts, they start at $5,000 per year. Okay? You got to buy the yearly plan. So they start off at $5,000 a year. Okay? Because this technology is very expensive to maintain and very expensive to create and and master like we had to get three worldclass machine learning uh PhD level uh developers to just work on the uh machine learning side of things AI side of things and we had 15 developers and team to work together full-time on this and this is the reason why because you need to have very high level uh not only infrastructure which Amazon is helping us out with but also you need to have the highle way of thinking to make this happen right so we want to beat this platform and be the very best that’s why as I mentioned And you’re going to be getting free access to all the updates and everything because we have our own road map here which you can go in and update. So we always update things. You see this is completed. This is completed. We completed about 50% of our road map uh features as you can see here. We completed this one. So a lot of the features are completed because we want to make this the very best platform. So you see singing human pals face in a circle headshot uh fitness looking character. We’ve done all this stuff because I want to make sure that this is the best possible application in the planet. And we also have a Facebook group here. Uh and as you can see here, we have like people messaging here and all that kind of stuff. Uh we also have uh 40,000 people in our Facebook group who are communicating making this better and better. We also have our own swag giveaways like we do like this one just to keep things fun because we have a big community of people building this stuff and making things as powerful as possible. So in a nutshell, you can go into this link that you see on your link atmanpal.com/now which you can see on your screen or click the button below as you’re watching it in video format to get this. Okay, has the very best reviews is the very best in the market at what it does. You have the very best customer support including phone support and phone assistance and Skype assistance if you need it. And on top of getting it for the lowest possible price you’ll ever get it. Once we raise it to a monthly fee, you’re going to be missing out and kicking yourself for good. And also once YouTube Shorts kind of goes and gets saturated, it’s so brand new right now. It’s the perfect time to use human pal as well as use for example content reel together and then take advantage of YouTube shorts. That deadline is coming soon. If you snooze, you’re going to lose. Okay, you have only a little bit limited amount of time, maybe a next one or two months before you can fully leverage it because you’re going to get 50 100,000 subscribers, let’s say. And even if it gets saturated upon that after that, it doesn’t really matter because there’s 20,000 50,000 whatever amount of subscribers you made right now are yours to keep, right? And in internet marketing world, what we like to look at is one subscriber is worth $1 per month. So if you got 10,000 subscribers even or 5,000, that’s worth $1 or $5,000 in that case per month. So that’s the power of subscribers. If you can channel it, that’s the platform. So definitely if you if you want somebody to mentor you how to get into YouTube shorts as quickly as possible, it’s a free platform to get started. You want to get these human AI videos created as many as you want and use content re as well to boost it, right? to get you the scripts, to get you the videos, and to also get you some cool uh looking um text effects, animations, and all that. This will be the powerhouse tool set, and there’s going to be no more information overload, no more technical mumbo jumbo stuff. All you have to do is take action, and right away, you’ll have an action plan to follow because all these bonuses, you’re going to get instant access to them, and you can keep them even if this is not for you and you get a full refund. I don’t even care. In fact, I’ll even do the co phone coaching and the mentorship for free beyond that as well because I know you’re going to get results because you just need the guidance and you need the AI technologies to make that possible. Right? Instead of buying a $2,000 course, a recurring subscription, and then all that other stuff, just buy it on one time payment for lifetime access, right? You also have a payment plan option in the page, but slightly more expensive. I wouldn’t recommend it, but it’s up to you. It’s $69 uh for 4 months. It’s coming to $280 in total. So, it’s a little more 30% more expensive. You can do that, but I highly recommend you get it, especially if you’re in the United States, United Kingdom. Use the PayPal credit option. There’s nothing to pay, no interest, no uh principle, no no payments literally for six full months in the US. And in the UK, it’s about 4 months. Definitely use that option so that you can get in literally for free today. If you’re in other parts of the world, hey, it’s 199 bucks for something that costs millions of dollars to build, right? And you’re getting in the ground floor of the next AI revolution. And they say, if you will, a picture is worth a,000 words because you have these text generators, AI text generators, and AI image generators, right? Well, what is a video worth? I believe a video is worth a,000 sales because it’s much more powerful than a photo or anything like that. So, just go in there, click on the button below, and get up and running. I look forward to getting to know you better and helping you reach your goals and make 2023 the best year
-
Content Genie Customer Training
Hello everybody. Welcome to this live Content Genie customer only training webinar. Now in this webinar we’re going to be talking all about the Content Genie application. What is it? Well, Content Genie is a two-in-one application if you will. One, it is a social media content creation based application, right? We’ll talk about that first step and second part being it’s a publishing application as well. A compare comp comparative application would be something like a buffer or a hootswuite and that sort of thing where you can create content and then you can publish it on social media platforms. So in a nutshell what it is really is it’s it’s in its core a traffic generation and an engagement platform right. What do we use content gen for? Why do we need to post on social media? Well, we want to use that for traffic generation and also for if you will, we want to generate engagement where people can watch our content and then they can come to our website, opt into our mailing list, book an appointment or maybe do a table booking in the case of a restaurant or whatever or maybe just become a lead, right? They sign up and become a lead or even buy from us if it’s an e-commerce website, right? So the main idea is when you start off with content genie because of the fact that it is predicated and and and focused towards social media you want to connect your accounts here. You see this Twitter, Facebook, Instagram and then Pinterest. These are the accounts you want to get started and basically immediately in the first step is to connect these accounts. Okay. And generally the idea is and it’s always said right and uh one of the key points is which one do I focus which social media platform do I focus because there’s so many uh platforms out there right like if I scroll down um here even with uh uh content genie here like we have LinkedIn as well here that you can connect along with Instagram and all that right so the idea is every platform has a specific type of content that does well right so for example in the case of Twitter text and image type content does pretty well. Generally speaking, anything that is a trending topic or something in the news generally does really well for Twitter. So, you want to focus on that when it comes to the the platform Twitter. When it comes to Facebook, Facebook does really well, if you will, with something which is not just trending, but also something where you can post content. This could be a video, it could be an image or it could be anything even where it creates a discussion, right? And that does really well with uh Facebook. And then Instagram is generally something more in the nature of vertical video or mobile based videos something you could do um based on that that does really well. They introduced something called Instagram reels. Basically it’s a Tik Tok competitor something like that which is vertical videos or vertical kind of content. Somebody would publish by taking a photo from their mobile phone and post it there. That does really well. Uh Pinterest is mostly catered towards as you probably already know mostly fashion u design if you will interior design some things along those lines which are mostly related to somebody’s interest that’s why it’s called Pinterest right so you pin somebody’s interest so something which is catered to niche market somebody’s interested in sewing somebody’s interested in bodybuilding somebody’s interested in certain types of clothing right or fashion these are the things that would do really well with Pinterest it has nothing to do with trends or following controversial social stuff and posting or engaging does all to do with somebody who’s interested in maybe you know uh renovating their house they would be interested in Pinterest right um LinkedIn obviously it’s more businessoriented right so these are people who are looking for a job these are people who are trying to build their network so the ones that do well on LinkedIn generally are howto type of stuff right how to you know do well in a job interview how to get better at the skill set this is the type of content that does well so now that you know these platforms. Every one of them are quite different. So the key component then becomes you cannot really say okay I’m just going to publish this content and publish all over these social media platforms and start getting results. Okay. The point being you have to kind of mold your content based on these platforms. Okay. So that’s why there’s so many different aspects within the application. Here you see how in the top here you have content AI which is uh an AI content generator. You have video discovery, right, which is basically where you can discover the hottest trending videos. You have speech AI, which basically you can generate speech from uh text. You have article discovery where you can discover articles and uh basically uh you know basically reward those articles in your own words and basically create content. Ebook converter which is basically where you can convert um any kind of an article or text into an ebook. There’s quote discovery where this is basically where you can find all the hottest quotes and of course there you have the content planner. This is where you can schedule post ahead of time maybe weeks or months ahead of time. Okay. So all of these have value. There’s nothing that is not but it the idea is you have to understand which one is important for which platform. Okay. So in the case of content AI let’s let’s go into that one first here real quick. So you see this right? I’m AI assistant for content genie right? what do you want me to write about? Okay. Uh for up to 200 characters, right? And then you can tell it what you want it to do. Okay? That is the key thing here. Okay? And the idea is again make sure that you understand that everything that is in the application here is easy for you to modify, easy for you to edit and easy for you to work with. Okay? So all you have to do is just scroll down and then you post something. uh write me an article on basically losing weight let’s say okay and then you just type that in and then you click on generate content and it’s going to start generating that content for us now again as I mentioned before you need to understand which platform this type of content would do well if it is a how-to type of a content LinkedIn would do really well if it is for example a type of content which is generally something that is trending right and something that is right now really really hot in the marketplace and that everybody’s talking about the stuff then I would use basically in that case as you can imagine I’d use basically um Twitter right Twitter would be used for that particular platform and then you should be good to go right so you got to understand so now you have this uh content here then you just click on use content here or you can download this content or you can even um copy this content you up to you what you want to do you want to download it you’re going to download it it’s going to save up as a text file document. You can even use content here like so. And you see how it says uh click on either uh of these two to create the content. So create social media content, create medium, WordPress type of content. What do you want to use? Right? You see this here you can connect your WordPress account or you can connect your medium account and publish content there to get search engine rankings and basically uh get rankings on social on Google and all that kind of stuff. here on the other uh side of the equation. This is for social media post. So again, it’s very important you understand this is for SEO, right? Uh getting rankings on Google and stuff. This generally speaking doesn’t do as well on on basically Google uh and search results. Generally speaking, LinkedIn to an extent helps, but the other platforms not as much. So this is mostly for engagement and instant traffic. Okay, you want people to watch your content and this is also engage with you and that kind of thing. Building community and that kind of thing, right? So it’s very important you understand this is more shortterm. Okay, shortterm meaning you consistently feed this more content. This is more long-term. Okay, so in other words, if you understand this, we would probably create a longer form content here, right? So maybe you write a big uh article or whatever. Meaning you could probably publish two. You could create two articles and then merge them together and publish it here. And here you’d only want to do a small uh form content because you got to publish more of them, right? You got to do more of them so that you can consistently uh play around with it. Okay, does that make sense? Now what you want to do that’s why you got to start with the end in mind always. So now when you do that again it’s going to say okay now do you want to put this text into some kind of an image? You have an image editor here as you can see. Uh you can do that based upon say weight loss or whatever and then it’s can search and it’s going to find you weight loss related um you know images and this other other stuff as well as you can see here. Right? Pretty cool. And this is how you can you can even upload your own uh images as well and you can add it. This is useful for social media platforms where you can add quotes and that sort of thing. Right? So this is the basic idea of what we are trying to do. You can add a campaign name and then you can add some images and then you just go in, you connect it to your specific social media accounts that I told you to connect in the beginning and then you can publish. That’s it. That’s all there is when it comes to this aspect. Now we go back. Let’s talk about the video discovery. Okay, video discovery is basically where you can find the latest videos and have them transcribed and have them uh you can recreate them basically and that sort of thing. Okay, you can search by keyword, you can even search by URL. Um, so basically you can get videos from a website and that sort of thing, right? So if I’m searching uh weight loss tips, let’s say, and then I search for that. So we’re going to get the u trendiest videos that are doing really well right now. And then the good part about this is right here, you see this? We have transcribe for social media post and transcribe for blog post. Right? So what does that mean exactly? What is transcribe means? It’s basically what it’s doing is it’s taking the video and it’s converting the audio in that video and making it into legible text. Why is this important? Majority of the time when we’re trying to create content, we’re struggling to write content, right? Like write articles and all that kind of stuff. So when you transcribe this here, we’re getting this article, this video and the key components of this video and converting into text. Now you can reward it slightly and you can publish them and get rankings on for a blog post or you can even get uh engagement on social media cuz you’re posting good valuable content, right? And that’s why it is so powerful because now you have all the content you’ll ever need in your fingertips, right? You can just click on transcribe for social media post for example and then again it’s going to transcribe the whole video like you see here. I have that right here and then you can go in and you can uh generate some uh hashtags for this particular um you know video. You see this? I can generate hashtags. So I can say something like weight loss and then I can see how many hashtags I want. This is basically where I put five and it’s going to generate me weight loss hashtag fitness weight and then loss. Pretty cool, right? Why is this important? Well, generally speaking, lot of people don’t just search for weight loss. They might say lose weight or they might say fitness, right? So you’re capturing those people uh when they’re searching for something on uh Instagram or they’re searching for something and that sort of thing, right? Of course, you can edit every component here. like I can go here and add spaces here and that sort of thing like as you can see here um and make it a little bit better like more legible right you can always do that so that’s uh always uh at your fingertips now let’s go back and let’s just look at uh the next one here so we have the speech AI okay click on the speech speech AI what this is is basically you can add uh basically where you can add your own audio let’s let me do that right now right for your eyes weight loss is one of the best ways to be fit because if you’re not going to lose weight, it’s very difficult for you to actually be healthy because excess weight can cause issues where you could run into basically gut issues or anything that way. Okay, you see that it basically transcribed my thing and then you can use this as content too. Pretty cool, right? So the idea is this way you don’t have to write content. You can immediately say something and then you’re good to go. When I click end, it’s going to take this and I can use this content any way I want. So it’s using speechtoext analysis and it’s getting me that particular text to be posted on social media. This does really well, this type of content does really well on Facebook and also does really well on Twitter and also LinkedIn. Uh Instagram not so much. Instagram needs photos, Instagram needs uh videos, that kind of thing. Uh but anything where it’s textbased does really well on Facebook and does really well on LinkedIn specifically and also with Twitter uh you can definitely try this type of content. You can split them across. Just keep in mind that in the case of Twitter for example there are word limits right character limits and that sort of thing. Now the other thing is we have article discovery where you can basically quickly type in something and you can discover articles related to that uh keyword right and can be any keyword by the way. to see this and you can use content here based on these articles that are out here. It’s going to allow you again because social media content is the most important way for you to consistently keep getting engagement. You post a video on Facebook today or you post a piece of content on Facebook. You post even on Twitter. Well, 3 days from now people are going to forget and new type of news feed is going to come in, right? You have to understand that. You have to consistently keep pumping new content. That’s why you have all these different content generators that are in here that you can utilize into your basically into your uh application. So now here you also have ebook creator. Okay, you can generate any type of text and you can convert that into an ebook, a PDF. Why is this useful? This is useful in cases for example like LinkedIn where you can create resources where saying hey these are the 10 best ways to ace an interview job interview let’s say and they’re saying okay that sounds great. I need more information. Well, you give them an ebook for example, right? Uh this also works really well for lead generation purposes where you can generate that ebook and then give that away to generate a lead right on blogs and that sort of thing as well. Works really well. Then you have the quote uh discovery. So this is basically where um you know you can say mindfulness all right and then you can generate uh quotes uh based on mindfulness right you see this Elanor Roosevelt Aristotle the energy of the mind is essence of life right so you can use this and the cool thing with this if you click on social media you can even say uh an image search like mindfulness like so and then you see this you can take an image and you can put a quote on that particular image does that make sense so that’s the other good part about having images this way where you can create a campaign name and and basically do it this way uh for that particular social media platform. Now the next thing you have is the content planner. The content planner is pro perhaps the coolest part of this uh because it basically brings everything together, right? So the contents that you’re creating, you can actually create content ahead of time. So I could go in, I could create content here, I can go to the calendar and then I can publish them well ahead of time. I can go next, next, next. can go into the next year and on and on and actually have the content posted for that particular social media platform or that particular blog or whatever much ahead of time. So that way when even when you’re vacationing or whatever, you’ve already scheduled the content ahead of time. This is also useful if you’re working with clients, right? Because a lot of clients, let’s say you’re managing 10 clients, let’s say, not easy every day sitting in and posting content for them and that sort of thing. You can preset the content, maybe spend a day on it and then you can preset that content for many many months to come and then you can charge that kind uh that client in a monthly basis as well right so in a nutshell if you really look at it I mean if you look at all these aspects here let’s just summarize real quick so that you’re all on the same page what we need to understand is for basically getting success with content genie one we have to basically start off with content right and then the second part we have to start off with after we’ve looked at that we got to look at the platform okay the platform or you can even say network right so in other words what I mean by that is LinkedIn whether you say Twitter or Facebook or Pinterest or whatever it might be you see if you don’t have the clarity on these two things you could have the most beautiful content in the world but you’re posting in the wrong platform you’re not going to get results right if you’re basically for on the other hand let’s say you have 10,000 uh subscribers uh or maybe 100,000 followers, but you’re not consistently posting content for them to engage with them, you’re still not going to get results too either, right? So ultimately the key point then it comes down to is that it is all about the content that you create and the platform that you do and you have to have both of them mapped out. Okay? Now one thing that you have to understand, however, is that when we are talking about content, you have to stand out from the competition, right? Do you agree with me? Let me know in the chat box. Don’t you agree with me? If you’re posting images and your competition is posting videos, since a video is a lot more u powerful than a image to convey your messages and your u basically your ideas, then obviously the competition will eat your lunch, right? They’re going to they’re going to beat you when it comes to that. On the other hand, if you only have text as your content, meaning you’re using the content AI system here, generating this text and your competition is creating images and beautiful looking um photos and that kind of thing because a picture is worth a thousand words as they say, right? Then at the end of the day, don’t you agree with me that if you look at it in that perspective, then somebody’s going to beat you when it comes to competition. Does that make sense? Let me know in the chat box. So, are you following along with me so far? Because this is quite important what I just mentioned. Okay? So you need to understand that we need to make sure that we stand out from our competition every single time. Now what I wanted to kind of talk about today specifically that when we talking about getting results getting making sure that uh you basically destroy the competition and also get results for clients if you want to get results for clients as well right that’s something that you have to basically pay attention and this is the reason why a lot of times right and this is something that I’ve dealt with over the last 15 years I’ve been doing this stuff online is often times people understand that what they need to do is a clear-cut goal that they to achieve. But often times what happens is that you miss out on the key component of where you need to start and where you need to end. Right? So now let me ask you a simple question now right let’s say a client comes to you right and I’ll give you all the clients you’ll ever need. Okay, let’s say today I gave you 10 clients, right? Who are going to love social media management and uh let’s say I’ll show you that. I’ll show you that right now, by the way, just a second. How to get all the clients you’ll ever need, right? Don’t you agree with me to get a client to make sure that a client pays you at least $500 a month to manage their social media. And now it sounds big for you, but it’s not big for a client because at the end of the day, they’re paying maybe $5,000 a month right now for an employee to manage their social media content. So, as a consultant agency, not that difficult for that client to pay you $500 a month, right? It’s not that difficult. Anyway, the point is, if I give you those 10 clients who would probably pay you $500 or more per month, the problem is you’re still not going to succeed. You’re going to say, “Why? Why? Why would I not succeed? Why would I not be able to?” Well, it’s this way, right? The thing is it’s not about the client. It’s not about the price you charge. It is about the content that you create. Okay? Very very important. You’ll notice this. Sometimes people go viral just by posting one piece of content. Well, you can struggle for 3 years and you never get the following. It is all in the content. There’s a saying, right? Content is the king or queen online. So my question then is, don’t you agree with me that we need to stand out from the competition? So, I’ll show you today firstly how to get all the clients you’ll ever need, right? We’ll talk about that. I’ll show you some strategies today. And then secondly, what I’m going to show you is what type of content that you can create automatically, which will completely basically give you an unfair advantage over your competition. And I’ll show you how you can do that literally without spending a single penny if you choose to. And if you do make a profit doing it, well then basically I can help you out oneonone and my team and I can help you every step of the way and you can pay us using the profits that you generate later on. I mean it’s not the key point here. Is that fair? Where basically I’m going to show you a simple method and a simple strategy where you can get all the clients you’ll ever need and then with automation and next generation technologies that are out there, we stand out from the competition. you do these two things then literally you can basically have people knocking on your door even when you’re not interested. Okay. So let’s let’s do that. So you don’t have to do any cold calling or any of that kind of stuff. Okay. Now like you go to indeed.com, right? One of the best ones. So I’m I’m from Toronto, Canada. So I’ll put Toronto, Canada here and then just put social media manager. Okay. And I click find jobs. All right. Okay. There’s these uh there’s 271 jobs. There’s more regardless where you go. So you go to remote, click on the remote icon here. Okay, so here you go. This one right here is $5,500 to $7,000 a month that they’re willing to pay or any one of these companies, right? You can just literally apply to any one of them, right? And then they are more than happy to take you in because if they’re paying $5,500 per month for a social media manager, then it’s not really that difficult to pay you $500 a month, right? As an agency or consultant cuz you can say, “Hey, I’m managing multiple clients. That’s my only requirement. I can deal with that. In this case, it’s 20 bucks an hour, right? It’s the same thing. It’s more than 500 bucks a month that they are charging. So, this is one way to get all the big ticket clients. Go to indeed.com and you find them here. The other secret uh you can do is you can go in and you go into upwork.com, right? And I’ll show you this uh how this would work. Okay? So, you understand exactly u along the way. You go into upwork.com. You probably are familiar with the Upwork platform, right? like it’s a one of the top uh freelancer websites and what they did is once you log in to Upwork there’s something here uh I want to show you this called browse project catalog okay you see this now the thing is when you click on that a lot of people out here right as you can see here are actually posting projects here where Upwork is sending their millions and millions of big ticket clients to go look at this comes from logo design video editing and all that kind of stuff. You see this right here? So, if you can do social media manager and you can actually post jobs here like so you see this social media manager marketing and all that kind of stuff and you can charge clients basically on a per job basis or on a monthly basis as well here. It’s a brand new thing that they’ve introduced recently and it’s doing really really well. Why? Because there is a secret here. If you can make yourself online permanently like so you see the 7,525 right? If I make myself online permanently then basically it goes from 7,000 people to just a handful of people. You see this just have a handful of people right now who are online not many. Right? You see this this is the secret. So the little tactics like this will allow you to get clients for your content genie platforms and also your social media marketing and stuff like that. Right? Now, what is the main thing that you need to understand, right, is results. Okay? The client does not care you post on LinkedIn. They don’t care if you post on Instagram. They don’t care it’s Facebook. They just want in the case of, let’s say, a doctor, chiropractor, plastic surgeon, that sort of thing. They need appointments, right, to be booked. In the case of a restaurant, they need as many table bookings as possible, right? Or coupons used in the case if they’re using any coupons and that kind of thing. In the case of an e-commerce business, they just need sales. They don’t care about appointment booking. They don’t need any of that kind of stuff. In the case of, for example, a coach or consultant or a digital marketing company, they might need to basically generate leads, right? Maybe it’s even for example a software company, technology company, they need leads, right? So, it’s about what results you generate. So, it’s all coming down to then how do we stand apart and how do we really get results from that client. So now I’m going to show you the most secret strategy that nobody’s going to teach you because at the end of the day they don’t even know because it’s so brand new. That is basically where what we like to call this is results arbitrage. Okay. What that means is a same thing like it’s like this right and I want to ask you this question so you understand if let’s say oil gasoline whatever is right now I believe it’s trading for something like $70 per barrel. Right. Right. Pretty straightforward and it’s trading for this. This is the the marketplace has set the price for uh gasoline oil, that sort of thing. You came in and you offered the same thing, right? And maybe the same kind of a product, right? Maybe even better quality. And you said, “Hey, look, it’s not 70. I’m going to give it to you for 50 bucks, right? 50 bucks a barrel, right? Whatever.” Right? In simple terms, do you agree with me? Assuming it’s a commodity and it’s a product or service or whatever it might be, you’re just beating them on price just because of the fact that people would buy this anyways, right? If people were on the in the process of buying something anyways, they will do price shopping. They’ll go, “Okay, this sounds a little bit cheaper than what I’m uh going out anyways, then at the end of the day, the person number two here, this this person right here will always win. Do you agree with me? Type in yes in chat box.” They’ll always win, right? So, same concept applies online as well. There are certain actual pieces of content that you can create. There are actual certain types of uh videos that you can create. There are actually certain types of u uh things that you can do right now where just like how gasoline and oil is required by people anyways with automation and AI and all these other things. You can charge more money and you can make more money and you’re going to any day of the week win the game. Okay. So, what I mean by that is let me explain how that would work. Okay. So, let’s let’s go in and just type in something here. Okay. Uh let’s let’s go in here and then do spokesperson video. These are pretty hot right now because a business wants a mascot, right? To do the selling for them and a human being conveys a message the best possible way, right? Do you agree with me? So, in a nutshell here, you look at these, right? So, we have all these spokespersons here creating videos. I mean, like from 55 bucks, from 150 bucks and that sort of thing. So, let’s look at her here. I mean, she’s uh like pretty pretty popular here. Okay, 100 words, she’s charging 150 bucks. Um, and then for 300 words, she’s charging $400, right, to create. Now, why is that the case? Why is somebody willing? She has 75 reviews. So, it’s pro most likely about 750 people went in and ordered something from her. Uh, average probably is like 300 bucks or so uh per sale. Now, why is that the case? Well, it’s because at the end of the day, these types of videos work and people are also willing to have a mascot and that sort of thing, right? Now, my question to you is very simple here. You have Content Genie, right? You can publish this stuff. You go to a business and you say, “Look, this exact video is being charged $400 for 300 words. Takes 5 days to deliver. I’m going to deliver this to you in maybe 2 hours. I’m going to deliver a similar quality of thing with you where instead of just $400, I’m going to charge you $250, let’s say. And on top of that, I’m going to create four videos like this rather than just one. So, in other words, with this person, it would have cost $1,600, right? And then in this case now, it’s costing them just maybe 250 bucks, right? And then if you came to that to a client and you positioned them saying what if you can create we can do that for you on a monthly basis, weekly basis and that sort of thing without you ever have to worry about that and you can have the exact same person like so or somebody of this high quality creating the content for you. You just have to provide us the text right and then we will do the rest and you have the AI content generator that’s built in to content genius. So you can even create your own text right for any niche that you desire with chiropractor, dentist, doctor or whoever it might be. Don’t you agree with me? That would be a big game changer, right? Do you agree with me on that? Let me know in the chat box. Now I’m not even talking about this. I mean, this is just one of the platforms. Let’s even go to another platform, right? Let’s go to fiverr.com. All right. And I am in fiverr.com here. Well, check this out here. Okay, there’s um you know this person right here. Uh there’s this person right here. Let’s go into this guy here as well. Um, let’s see this. 255 words, 185 bucks. Uh, this person right here is 185 bucks for two 15-second um clips. So, that’s about 30 seconds worth of clips. And then this person right here is $335 for 200 words uh script, right? What if you can get these people literally like these types of videos you create and literally do it automatically, right? you do it automatically, right? And you can create unlimited amount of them without any monthly fees or u per video fee or anything like that. So meaning you have people like this at your service at your disposal every single time right out of the gate. Would that be a big game changer? Because now you can go in and you can upload those videos, right? You go back, you go back into um basically the Content Genie application, right? You go in here, right? Like so. And then you can go in here and you can just go to the content planner like so. And you can now start publishing content here, these videos out to a social media campaign for a business, maybe a word uh WordPress or Medium type of content. You can even transcribe that video, right? You see that you can that video that I’m talking about with that spokesperson, that sort of thing. You go in here, you can even transcribe that video and you go into this video discovery here, right? You go click on that URL. Let’s say it’s on YouTube or wherever it might be. You transcribe that. You can create a text version of that video as well. So that way there’s both, right? That’ be a big game changer, wouldn’t it? Right? And again, like I said, if you could get, let’s say, for example, I gave you an opportunity for 30 days to create as many of such videos as possible and get as many clients as possible and then literally start generating profit right out of the gate. That would be a huge game changer, right? And you cannot do this. I mean, if you want to do it, you need to have the best um, you know, like say for example, like this one, you need to have the best green uh um, for example, you need to have the best green screen content. You need to have the best uh, audio equipment, best uh, camera equipment. You need to know what you’re doing. You need to look beautiful. You need to have the best day possible and all that kind of stuff, right? So, if you don’t have to worry about all that, it saves you a heck of a lot of time, right? So, that’s the key thing. If you’re trying to succeed with Content Genie, the secret is you want to go into this type of content. Why? It’s because the marketplace set the price here. Okay? Let me give you an example of what I mean by that. There are people out there you can go in and it’s social media image post just one or 10 or 50 like I I’ll I’ll show you right now. You’re going to Fiverr right now. Let’s do that. I’ll search for you. Um social media banner. Let’s say this is an image or quotes or something, right? Just a simple banner, right? People can create tons of these banners. Like look look at this. There’s so many of these people here, right? Uh but let’s go into this this person right here, right? One social media banner is $10, right? As you can see, six uh six platforms and banners is $40. Now, you can do $10 worth of work or you can do, as you can see, $335 worth of work. Up to you. You understand what I’m saying? That’s how you have to look at it. Either you’re considered a higher value person who values what you’re doing, or you go into the cheap level stuff here like creating designs for 10 bucks, and you’ll always feel burnt out. Even if you can automate this process, you’ll feel burnt out, right? So my point is if you can create unlimited videos like these, right? Unlimited videos like these and then you can do animations and all that kind of stuff and you can offer it to clients. It speeds up your success faster than ever before, right? So let me show you an example of what I mean by that. This is next generation artificial intelligence using lifelike text to speech using lip sync using some really really high level technology to create HD videos like this like full HD video with the background and all that kind of stuff and custom outfits as well that you can choose and then beautifully charge people any amount of money and this is how you have to look at uh automation and stuff like that. Let me show you an example video and you can create unlimited videos like that. You can have that person speak anything you wish. Okay, you just type in the text, you can make him and then you can upload them into Content Genie and then have all the content published to your heart’s desire. Okay, let me show you an example here. Finding the right gifts for Christmas can be a time-consuming process as you need to pick the perfect gift for every age and personality. Here are five gift ideas for the holiday season that should bring a smile on everyone. First one is a Lego building kit that are cleverly built blocks that nurture creativeness and at the same time challenges kids to be more and do more. This timeless classic is designed for collaborative fun for all ages. The second gift is a portable coffee maker. Upgrade your at home coffee game with this sleek machine that can brew a cup of coffee or express with just a single push of a button. Whether you are grabbing a quick cup of coffee out of the door or service coffee to a crowd, this has you covered. With multiple brew sizes and a strong brew feature, you can enjoy a perfect coffee anytime. The third gift is an all-in-one virtual reality headset with a growing trend of metaverse. This is not just a gaming device, but an immersive experience generator that brings hours of joy in an interactive world that includes virtual concerts, sporting events, and videos filmed in 360°. All you need is an app on your smartphone, and internet access to explore new worlds that are so realistic, you will feel like you are there in person, experiencing it all by yourself. These three gifts should not only bring you lots of joy, but will check all the boxes of a perfect gift that is applicable to all ages and personality. Pretty pretty cool, right? I just want to show you something here how the technology works behind the scenes, right? Uh if you will. So, the idea is this person right here, right? We’ve cloned this person so to speak, right? They’ve um been shot in with like very high level high definitionition cameras and all that kind of stuff. We created a technology. What it does is basically you go in here, the lips will speak anything you type in any language. I’ll show you an example. So you type in any language you want, right? You want to do um like say for example Spanish or whatever. You do anything you want and this person will speak it. Okay, in those languages and because we are using automation, artificial intelligence and all that kind of mumbo stuff, what it effectively does is you could create this person, right? You could create 20 videos, right? in just two minutes. Okay, the same way what I’m trying to show you and you can do animations and stuff like that. I I’ll show you that in just a second. That means effectively you have unlimited potential to create mascots like this could this could be for a dentist, chiropractor and all that kind of good stuff. And the beauty is because you can make them speak any language, you can reach different audiences as well for that particular business or even your own business. And you can now even for that matter create this person as well. So you can create your own custom person as well with just a simple photo. I’ll show you that as well in just a second. So you can customize, right? You can change the clothing. You can also customize this person, how they look, talk, whatever. And you can change their accent and all that kind of stuff as well. Pretty powerful, right? Let me show you an example. And by the way, as I mentioned before, just for Content Genie customers, I’m going to give you a 30-day test drive of this technology, right? You try it out risk- free, zero risk to your part on your part. I’ll show you that in just a second. And then you start getting results. If you make a profit, you pay us. If you don’t want uh you don’t want to pay us, hey, that 30 days effectively became free to you. Think of it like that, okay? Because the idea is that to get you results. The goal is to get you quick results so that you can now sell this to clients. So, let me show you an example. One of the key things that you can do here, you can offer five different languages for the price of one. I can create a video in Spanish, Portuguese, or German or whatever, Italian. And then also create one additional video. And you can charge that to clients and they’ll happily pay you right right out of the gate. And that is how you can separate yourself from the competition. Right? So let me show you an example of uh languages. Okay? So that you can see how this could be spoken with perfect lip sync in different languages. Now because my you know I’m playing it from my computer, it’ll be slight lag. So it will not be as smooth as it would be in real life. But it should give you some ideas here, right? Because we’re basically having our own virtual assistant and for any business creating unlimited such videos with no monthly fees, no yearly fees, any of that mumbo jumbo stuff and no limits too, right? So let me give you an example.
Animated video.
Hello human.
pretty pretty powerful, right? And you can have multiple people like this. Like you can have this person, this person, this person. You have tons and tons of opportunities and choices to pick and that sort of thing. But here’s the thing. I’ve noticed this and you’re probably wondering, right? Okay, that sounds great. But these people, if they’re out there, they’re going to become too common. There’s t there’s going to be too many people competing with me out there and all that kind of stuff. What if you can create a custom person out of thin air, right? And you create that person that becomes the mascot for a brand or a business. and that sort of thing. Wouldn’t that be powerful? Like you only have one person that is unique to only that chiropractor that you’re dealing with or that dentist you’re dealing with or even your own business. So then nobody else would have similarity. Meaning you have hundreds of thousands of different variations you can pick from. This is what we do where you can take any photo and you create make that photo into your own very own personalized spokesperson. This is how you can do it. Again should be giving you some ideas of how you can create unlimited content where a video is worth thousands of images, right? to engage audiences and that sort of thing. So, let me show you here an example so you understand how this works. So, you see this on your screen. Any photo can be converted over into your very own spokesperson in just one click. I’ll show you how that works in just a second. You just click anything, just one button. Just pick any photo and then we’ll give you also copyright free photos of people who don’t exist. So, you never have to worry about a Brad fit Brad Pitt or some Tom Cruz or somebody like a celebrity. No, you don’t have to worry about all that. We integrate with some technologies where you don’t have to worry about all that. These are people who don’t exist. So you can create your own personalized mascot this way. Isn’t that powerful? That should be giving you some ideas, right? So it’s that simple. Let me show you how easy it is to create your very own spokesperson, right? You can go into the application, right? I’ll show you this. Like you can go into the application like so this technology. Again, I’ll give you a special link for this. You can pick, you can search, you can um, you know, say I want a person who is an African-American, an Asian or whoever it might be, right? And specific ages and age groups and and whoever it might be. And you just use that person. You uh can go in and you can tweak it, things like that. Basically, these are unique copyright free uh things. So, you can create your own little mascot, if you will, right? So you can have a person unique to you because we’re taking off of a library of hundreds and hundreds of thousands of such people in different races, ethnicities, and diverse amount of people. And then you just click on the people that you like, right? And you just choose their it goes down into their eye color, their hair color, their hair length, and all that. You click generate, and then boom, it’s done. You generated this person, right? Like so. Um, male or female, by the way. And then you just click on one person you like. Let’s say you want a youthful looking um you know spokesperson or you want a person who’s a little bit uh you know middle-aged or maybe you want to be much much much more younger, right? Depending on which target market you’re trying to reach, right? And again because they can speak any accent using text to speech with perfect lip sync because of the fact that they can actually uh do all that you have the capability like you see this where you can create a younger person, you can create an older person, you can change their skin tone. We have some special technologies behind the scenes that will allow you to do this and every single time it’s unique like what I was just showing you earlier, right? All you have to do really to make this work simple just a couple of clicks. I’ll show you how this is done. And this uses a brand new technology where it’s called uh you it really complex to explain but in simple terms what it does is you take a person you take some photos of that person in different angles and then that person’s real person is converted into people who don’t exist. Okay. So that original person always gave the permission, got paid really well, that sort of thing. So what you have to do, let me explain to you how this works. You let’s go into the application. Again, I’ll show you how to get this application. Um, literally with zero risk today, right? Um, you go click on this custom human pal option, right? I’ll show you how to get that. And you just click on that option, and I’m going to show you right now. And then you press one button, and then it’s going to change. Look at this. In just a couple of seconds, it’s going to change the person completely, right? with a clothing of your choice. It’s going to change that person and their face and everything else and right out of the gate creates a brand new person with that new face. You see this? Isn’t that cool? And again, the lip sync is maintained and all that kind of stuff. So now you can have hundreds of different hundreds of thousands of different spokespersons that you can create out of thin air basically in different ethnicities in different races and male and female and all that kind of good stuff, right? And because of that fact, you can always use this person in the future. you can clone this person and use in your projects and you know the chances of somebody else using it is almost um you know non-existent right so that’s the beauty here you can um basically create your own out of thin air now that gives you even more flexibilities right let me show you an example of what I mean by that you can do say for example uh different ways because you have full control over it like a video in video looking to buy or sell a home no problem most realtors only want to sell your home we go beyond that we offer full service leasing property management and selling. So whether you want to sell the property now or keep the property as a long-term investment, we give you the option to choose what works best for individual financial situation. We perform the proper due diligence on your behalf, such as running comparisons for both rent and sale, as well as helping you to determine your best route. Best of all, our fees are very affordable to everyone. Ready to get started? contact us today. Pretty awesome, right? Now, the thing is you can even upload your own audio. Let’s say a client gives you a basically a script to upload. Well, you can just go upload that script in, you can upload their audio file of a client. You have flexibility. Basically, the they can speak anything you throw at them, an audio file, a text file, or whatever you decide to do, right? And the reason why this is so powerful, right? And this is another thing that people will ask you all the time, like if a client says, “Okay, this sounds cool. uh what’s so great about this kind of thing, right? I just want to show you something real quick. Okay? And again, this is not to brag or anything. I just want to show you um in real time how this would um you know, basically work out and that sort of thing. So anyway, I want to show you this. Okay, this is one of our uh sales videos. This one I mean obviously we use spokespersons, right? Because it’s branded and it does really really well. Now in this case, this is me speaking right now. This one video did just in the last uh about just a few months did 1.4 $.4 million. Okay. Now, what is so unique about this? Well, the uniqueness about this is, of course, there’s a spokesperson, right, speaking. That’s okay. That’s fine. But I want to actually show you a couple other things. There’s also these animations that are out there, right? You see when a person is speaking, there’s some animations happening beside the person. You see this? Like animations like what you’re seeing right now. There’s a spokesperson here, but there’s animations happening to the right. These are the type of videos that command the top dollar online right now. this is the type of content that does really well. I mean, you’ve seen it, right? You’ve seen Apple do it where they have a spokesperson speaking and behind them there’s a lot of these animations and stuff like that. Well, this is what you can create as well. It’s just not some person speaking, but it’s actually some animations behind that person, beside that person and that sort of thing as well. So, let me explain that. And again, I’ll show you how to get this risk free today. No monthly fees, no yearly fees, and all that kind of stuff. So, when you go to the application, you have all these types of videos. See these mockup videos, you have these virtual studio sets like so, right? uh when you have like these billboard animation videos where a spokesperson is speaking and then there’s billboards behind the scenes. I’ll show you some other examples as we go along. But the idea is that because of this aspect here, let me show you here, right? You can even create these other videos as well, the circle type of videos. You see this a person is a circle here. Uh like what you see here, uh you can do stuff like that as well. I mean there’s different options you can do like loom style videos for demos and all that kind of stuff for corporations. But I want to show you another cool way here. Okay, one of the cool other ways is you see these animations here. These are basically animations where you can put any mockup or web demos and that kind of thing and and you can go out of your way and make it really really powerful this way, right? I’ll show you some examples as we go along. And you can do it in any language, right? And the beauty is you pick something you like. Let’s say you like this one. You pick the person you like or you can create your own person as I showed you. Let’s say you like this person. You can just upload any uh audio file in any one of these languages. It will automatically transcribe it. Put the subtitles and all the stuff. You can even put any kind of voice here like what you see here. And you can choose in all these languages as well. You have complete flexibility here. And you can generate that person and that video right out of the gate using all those templates that are built in. Super easy. And the beauty is you can create multiple videos at the same time cuz it doesn’t use your computer speed at all. So meaning if 10 clients come to you and they want you to do 10 videos, well you can do that without having to get stuck waiting for one of them to render or create like you do with uh Final Cut Pro, Apple or uh Adobe Premiere and all this other mumble jumbo stuff, right? Um so that’s the reason why. Now, that’s the reason why video creation is so powerful like this. Like in the last year, uh in this just one account in ClickBank, uh we made well over 3,379,167.
Now, the reason why I’m showing you this is that’s about $300,000 a month or so, give or take, as you can see here. Now, the reason why I’m showing you this as an example is video as a content when it comes to Content Genie and all that kind of stuff is so powerful. People interact with video, okay? People are more engaged with video. When people see somebody’s face, they’re more likely to buy something from them than if they just see a bland image or a text. Right? This is where content creation is heading towards. Right? Now, I just want to also show you another thing. This is uh JVZoo. Probably you’re familiar with that platform. Uh I’m the number one vendor for a while now. They’re an affiliate. Uh this one did 11,641,83 in sales. This account, again, I know it’s a big number. Who cares? The reason why I’m showing you that is because this the secret behind that is what we like to call a video sales letter or VSSL or video. Okay? And because people watch it, they buy it because they like to see demonstrated. Right? Again, as I mentioned to you, these are the video type of videos. So, spokesperson videos in vertical format or even um you know um a square format that kind of thing. They do really really well. Like let me explain how easy it is to create one. You go into the application, right? I’ll show you. Again for content genie also this is super powerful because they need vertical videos right in content genie you need those. So you go into the application you go into aspect ratio instead of landscape you just put mobile and you can create any one of these mobile based vertical templates right you click on this and then you have different variations of these mobile vertical templates right you see this and you can add subtitles and all that kind of stuff and publish them into Instagram as reals and all that kind of good stuff right out of the gate. No confusion no mumbo jumbo stuff right out of the gate. powerful right and this is why you have to pay attention to what’s happening in the world right technology keeps changing all the time this puts you on the map of success right now as a content genie customer I want to do something very very special for you okay and generally right I want to ask you a question here right normally you buy something and first of all there’s risk involved cuz you got to try something new and then you have to try and you don’t know for sure if it’ll work for you and all that kind of stuff right and then there’s a lot of upsells and all that kind of stuff so let me ask you a simple question. Do you hate it when there’s upselles? Like, do you like do you hate upsells? Let me know in the chat box. Like, you hate upgrades, upsells, you don’t know what the heck you’re buying. There’s a lot of confusion, mumbo jumbo stuff, and then you have to buy the one which is like, as I’m showing you as an example here, you have to buy for 49 bucks, and there’s a $97 upgrade and this one, this one, this one. Oh, and by the way, there’s this other uh webinar you have to come. That’s the main application you have to buy. Before you know it, to get the full benefit of something, you’re paying 1,700 bucks or something, right? And it gets frustrating after a while. Do you agree with me? Let me know in the chat box. What if you can get this technology which I was telling you about the human pal technology with zero risk, right? No need to worry about that. No monthly fees, no upsells, no downells, no cross sales or anything on any of that stuff. And on top of that, you get me access to me who’s done well over $100 million in sales online in the last uh um you know, close to 15 years I’ve been doing this stuff. And on top of that, you get unlimited access to unlimited amount of those videos and all that kind of stuff as I mentioning to you earlier. and you get one-on-one access to my team and I where you can come you can email a support team saying hey look I want to book an appointment on Skype can join in I have some technical issues with content genie and integration with this can you help me out well we’ll help you out oneonone it can be a screen share it can be a call it can be text whatever works for you and we can help you out would that be a big game changanger for you let me know in the chat box right that be a big game changer right so instead of putting a bunch of upsells downells cross sales confusing you with a bunch of stuff you can get this technology right with no upsells no down cells any of that kind mumbo jumbo stuff, right? For just 199 bucks. Try it out today full risk-f free for 30 full days only. If you get it on this link right here, get pal.com/livive. That’s a special link only for Content Genie customers. I posted the link in the chat box as well. You get a no questions asked 30-day guarantee, meaning you can try it out. Day 29, you didn’t like it, all the videos you created until then, maybe you created 200 videos, I don’t know. You get it for free. You get to keep them. Whatever revenue you made, it’s yours to keep. And you saw that, right? A video can be sold for at least $350 to $400. So, one video will put you in the profit and everything else thereafter is pure profit cuz you’re getting lifetime access to this technology. Normally, people are going to pay $69 to $97 a month for this and that comes with limits as well. You’re getting unlimited access as a founding member u because we just released it just a couple of weeks ago and released it uh this brand new version of this and you get access to all the updates and everything else we make as well. Now, I have some special bonuses for you on top of this as a Content Genie customer. It’s worth your time uh to get it. All I need you to get those bonuses, which you can keep risk- free, 100%, right? You can keep all those bonuses and I’m going to mentioning uh to you in just a second. Even if you leave and you get every single penny back, my way of saying thank you. Okay, I’ll talk about that in just a second. And you can also use the PayPal credit option in the checkout page as well. Okay, I’ll talk about that in just a second. But all I need to do is post your transaction ID if you get in. There’s 199 bucks. There’s also a payment plan option for just $69 spread out over a few months. A little bit more expensive. Uh but you just pay 1900 bucks. It’s the cheapest option you can get and you get lifetime access. I’ve been in this business for 15 years. I’m not going anywhere. You can use this and I’m giving away 10 training sessions as well as a bonus live like this one where we can walking you through different ways you can succeed. Like for example, YouTube shorts are doing really well. We’ll talk about how to do that. Instagram reels are doing well. How do we use content genie and Instagram reels to get this platform to work alongside to create all this beautiful content? Yes, but also get traffic, leads and sales. These trend are live sessions just like what I’m doing right now answering all your questions and that sort of thing. Okay, so it’s super powerful and uh super profitable as well because these live sessions are yours to keep as well. Even if you leave, we’ve already done a few of them. You can jump on the next one is coming up actually surprisingly tomorrow. So you can jump in and u uh join in that next training session is coming up as well uh in a day or two. So you can jump in on this as well. So you get that as a bonus as well. I’ll talk about that um in just a second. Now the reason why this is so powerful, right, is no upsells, no downells, no monthly fees, no credits, no limits, all that kind of mumbo jumbo stuff. You get in and you’re good to go, right? And again, I need to post your transaction ID to get some special bonuses I have for you. Plus, what I’m going to do is I’m going to be picking from the chat box. So any question you have, it can be content gen related questions or any related to this application here, doesn’t matter. You post in the chat box, I’ll pick three people in the next few minutes and reward you with $100 each just for posting in the chat box. So I can reward you that way and I’ll announce them as well and then um you know basically have a lot of fun that way as well. So you can post any question you have in the chat box with Content Genie and um uh the human pal application. This is a special link only for Content Genie customers. By the way, we have some special bonuses for you that’s worth your while to try it out. Again, no upsells, no down cells, no cross cells, none of that mumbo jumbo stuff. You get everything in one place. Right now, what is the competition out there, right? Why is this? Okay, it sounds great, but you might be saying, “It’s going a little bit on the higher end. I wish it was just 50 bucks.” Well, let me explain to you. The only competition for this application is a platform called Cynthia. You can go get it right now. I mean, I don’t care if you want to buy this or you buy that. Cynthia raised 50 million recently and total uh money that they’ve raised from venture capitalists and all the stuff was $100 million. Okay, we spend well over a million dollars on this technology alone ourself. Okay, and to compete with this platform, right? And now why is this so powerful? Let me explain. So you’re going to Cynthia right now because of the fact they raise so much money, they’re emboldened to venture capitalists and all that kind of stuff. So they have a special type of pricing. Okay. So, what they do is they have a plan where for corporations, right, for people who want to use for commercial purposes, you want to sell your videos on Upwork, Fiverr, you want to sell your videos to clients, there’s a minimum of $500 a month to start off with. And on top of that, they charge you per video. So, in other words, they charge you $3 per video. So, you can just about create about 100 videos per month. And then after that or 100 minutes worth of videos per month, I would say and and and you have to pay $500 a month on top of that as well. So it’s not unlimited and that’s a limitation they said. I didn’t set it, right? And so to really do well that’s a good thing for you because your competition has to pay $500 a month. You don’t have to, right? That’s the beauty here. Your competition has to pay $500 a month. Like if you go into uh that website, I mean you can get it if you want. I mean I don’t really care. I mean at the end of the day I want you to get results, right? With content gen. If you’re into pricing, you see this personal access. This is only for your personal use, for fun, right? You can you get it for $30 a month, 10 videos uh per month, which is 10 minutes worth. So, it’s about $3 per um you know, video. Then you have to do it for commercial purposes. Then you’ll have to book a demo and then they’ll pitch you like a $500 per month plan or $5,000 a year type of a plan. And then you’re stuck with it, right? And there’s no uh there’s no unlimited usage or any of that stuff, right? That’s the problem. And this is a benefit for you too because your competition has to pay this stuff. You don’t have to. And that gives you an edge with your uh clients and that sort of thing cuz it’s going to take you just a few minutes to create all these videos, right? And on top of that, as I mentioned to you earlier as well, you can use the PayPal credit option in the checkout page for that $199 plan, right? It just log into your um PayPal account in the checkout page and then you see this option that’s going to show up like you see this right here. It’s PayPal credit. This option, you just go in, you choose that. If you’re in the United States or United Kingdom, it’s 30 uh in the case of uh United States, it’s six full months, no payments, no interest. Okay? 6 months, half a year, no payments, no interest. You by then you should be getting results and then you pay it back. There’s no interest at all and you can get in for free. I mean, if you want to cancel in 29 days, you get it didn’t cost you a single penny anyways, right? You get every single penny back. And this is a benefit for you if you’re in United States, United Kingdom, it’s about 4 months, no payments, no interest. The only thing they ask is the minimum payment has to be about 100 bucks. Uh so it’s 199 bucks works out really well for you. that’s there for your benefit. If you’re in the United States or United Kingdom, definitely try out the PayPal credit option in the checkout page that will enable it for you. Uh once you log into PayPal, choose the PayPal option. You also have we also have Visa, Mastercard, Apple Pay, Google Pay, Discover, American Express, and all the other payments as well that you can try out to your heart’s desire. Only thing is I want you to post your transaction in the chat box because I’m announcing some uh winners from the chat box where I’m picking from the chat box. Okay? You can post any question you have. I’ll answer them uh live in the next couple of minutes. Now, there’s some special bonuses that I have for you as well that I wanted to show you. But before I show that, you know, when you’re buying something and you’re getting it, I get it. One of the things is, okay, that sounds great, but what’s happening in the near future? Well, what we’re planning is we have a actual public road map. You can go in and you can do it. And we’re implementing a lot of things based upon that, right, on the public road map. So, you have brandable attire. We’ve added a new feature where we’ve added new brandable uh attire. That was one of the features. So, we’re adding more of them. We added a a gym spokesperson with gym attire and uh doctor attire and all that. So we’re working on uh we’ve worked on that already. We’re also adding more. So we have a public road map where you can add in as many as you want and based on what people will present. And this is a headshot presentation. Remember this one which was that circle videos I was telling you the loomshot style once loom video style. Well we’ve done that. Okay. We’ve implemented that. We’re just going to complete it. This was done just a few days ago. So it’s going to be marked as complete very soon. So these are the things we’re doing. And on top of that on we have a professional set of um you know you know people who are using this technology as you can see on this platform called capter.com which is one of the top platforms out there for software reviews we have 4.8 Eight stars. 375 people have reviewed us here as you can see. So this is something that matters. Okay. Now I know you might be saying okay let’s all find this. You have a road map. Everybody has not many people can have 375 reviews which is almost five star reviews right I mean check this out. I mean look at this. Look at it. Other competitors have like what 17 17 here right? Maybe 232. We have so many here because look at this right? All the most powerful reviews that are out there here. Right now I mean we’re not perfect right? You’re not perfect like you see here. Um this some of them are four stars here and there. We’ll get better and better with time because we’ve invested so much uh time, energy and money and resources into it. We also have a Facebook group by the way and again I’ve been posting the um link in the chat box as well. So you can click on it and you can go there um in case you cannot. And I have a special bonus as well for uh people attending the webinar. I’ll talk about that a market research application for free and you’ll can um and and we can do that. So let me explain to you so that you can um uh see it. But anyway, we also have our own Facebook group. There’s about 38,000 people in that group. So you can come in and you can interact with like men entrepreneurs. You can uh you can post videos because you you see this right here. Uh we have people posting their content and giving feedback um and what’s good uh what are suggestions that they’re posting and stuff like that. So it’s a long-term project for us, not a short-term thing that you get and you’re gone kind of thing. Uh so you look at that people posting and helping each other out all the time. So, uh, this one right here, you can see that 6,000 people have watched this, 574 comments. Uh, this one right here. So, these are best ways for you to learn and grow your brand and your business because you’re seeing what other people are doing and what other people are teaching you. And I get on a live stream all the time talking to people like you and how you can benefit and stuff like that as well. So, that these two will help you as a community to benefit and grow your brand and your business, right? And these are free. You can jump in, you can good and you’ll be in these groups anyways, even if you decide this is not for you and you leave uh long term. It doesn’t even really matter to me. My goal is to get you results, right? And goal is to uh help you grow your brand, your business and that sort of thing long term, right? So, I want to show you some bonuses that are available uh as well. As I mentioned to you, these are for every single person who gets in and you know, even if you leave and you get every single penny back, you can keep all these bonuses. Okay, the first one is 10day step-by-step success training. So, these are 10 live training sessions. We did a few of them. You can watch them right away. Some and we have a lot more left as well with these live. The next one is coming up in about 24 to 48 hours. You can register for that. And here I’m going to be live just like this. My team is going to be live just like this. We’re going to answer all your questions, show you how to integrate with Content Genia and some other things like that. And this way you know you know how to get traffic, how to get clients, how do you get leads and the idea here is to get your results using different ways because you might be an e-commerce business. You don’t care about appointments, lead generation. You just want sales. What do you do? what platforms do you focus on? Right, with content Gmail and other things. So, we’re going to talk about that and you can keep this for free even if you leave. Okay, these are the most powerful training sessions you’ll ever learn where you’re going to cover every question you have and every way you can succeed and you’re going to be able to sustain and grow long term with the latest trends that are out there, right? YouTube Shorts is hot right now. Instagram reels is hot right now. Tik Tok is hot right now. You’re also uh LinkedIn is really really hot right now. So, these are platforms. How do we use them? Right? What are the type of content we create? And that takes some time because each one is specific to one platform. So we’re going to give you that extra advanced training as well. And plus on top of that, you also have our mockup video creator technology where this is a really powerful tool where what you can do is you can create different types of mockups and content. You know the images and content you’re getting into content gen put them in here and it’s going to show up in laptop mockups, image mockups, uh in in MacBooks and phones and stuff like that. And you should be good to go. And you also get access to our niche dashboard which is probably one of the best applications we built in recent times. Uh what you get you get free access to this one. It’s the best video script generator or copyrer uh application. You can just pick it has hundreds and hundreds of different niches you can pick from with voiceovers ready to go. So you’re not staring at a blank screen when you’re trying to generate scripts for a business, copywriting scripts and stuff like that in different markets. You don’t have to be an expert in that market either, right? So you can use this right out of the gate and you can create powerful scripts and stuff and you can keep this technology as well for free even if you didn’t didn’t feel like okay this technology this human pal technology which I’m getting as a content genie customer um you know it’s not worth it for me you can keep it no worries you also get access to our uh template request club uh this is basically where one of the key problems always is as you can probably imagine right one of the problems always is people uh you have certain requests I have certain things that I want to put in an application somebody else has so much. But here you can request something that is pertinent to your use case. Let’s say a client of yours is a DJ. You want a DJ type of a template or you’re a client is an educator or a coach or maybe even an author. Well, you can create templates based on your request and they’ll be in there with no monthly fees, no yearly fees and they’ll be requested first and meaning we’ll put them first into the application for free based on what you request and that sort of thing. Very, very powerful as you can imagine, right? And the beauty is this will put you give you an unfair advantage over your competition because allows you to speed up your workflow and your success. Right? The other technology you’re going to be also getting is a vid editor application which is basically like a Camtasia style application Camtasia studio where you can record your screen but also merge multiple videos. You know these spokesperson videos or even uh videos you can create within content a genie or on content and you can merge all of them and do a really beautiful long length video as well. if you want to do you can edit to your heart’s desire and again you can keep this technology it’s a really really powerful technology you can keep it you can create unlimited videos with it it’s all in the cloud so it never uses your computer speed and that sort of thing and the other one you can keep also uh for free even if you decide to leave and get every single penny back is our resizer application this is a beautiful application because every platform as I mentioned before even in content genie requires a certain format of video right in the case of Instagram you need vertical videos in the case of LinkedIn there’s a special format LinkedIn requires ires videos to be in or else it’s not going to look good. They’re not going to accept it. YouTube requires it in a certain way. Facebook requires it in a certain way, right? WhatsApp requires it and all these other platforms required in a certain way. Pinterest requires in a certain format. This is going to shrink that video size based upon that platform automatically regardless of what video you throw at it. It’s going to be super powerful in that sense, right? And then you’re also going to get this really really powerful video marketplace builder technology where you can actually put a marketplace for your services which is be social media management services where it can be content creation services, video creation services. You can feature them. You can create a portfolio website. Uh you can even take payments in there where you have stripe integration and we do all the hosting and all that kind of stuff. So you don’t pay a single penny on hosting and you can build unlimited amount of them. We don’t charge you a single penny on hosting at all and it cost us a lot of money by the way to manage this stuff. as you can imagine. So you might be wondering how much does this thing uh hosting wise? Well, just the human pal technology that you’re getting access to and the hosting for that um you know the video marketplace uh where you can charge people and money and they can pay you that alone last month was $14,000 roughly. In this month um well last month was $16,58 as you can see here and uh this month already is about $13,922. So it’s probably going to by the end of it all it’s going to be more than last month, right? We’re investing in this much into your business. Okay, I want you to understand this is serious stuff, a professional service, a very high level service that you can use for the rest of your time, right? And you can be super happy using it and we’re going to keep updating it long term. I’ve been in this business for over 15 years. I showed you my Facebook group, right? If you have a problem, you can you know who to complain, right? And it’s me and that’s a stress that nobody else can take. A lot of times what you see, you buy a technology and then the person says, “Okay, it’s a developer fault. I don’t know. They hide behind a company and they’re gone forever, right?” Here, it’s going to be updated long term. And I want you to understand that, okay? It’s something that’s going to be there for the long haul and you get that with no upgrades, no upsells, no downsells, any of that mumbo jumbo stuff. So, this is your last chance to get it in. There’s a button right below this video because you’re watching this in video format where you can immediately get access to this human panel technology, which perfectly complements with Content Genie. I was one of the earliest beta testers for Content Genie. So I know for a fact that when you actually want to use Content Genie, the biggest issue you’re going to run into is content a quality reliable content that which you can rely upon to get you incredible results long term. Well, this is the only way to do so where video content is 90% of the content consumed online. That’s why Tik Tok beat uh YouTube. That’s why for example, if you look at it, YouTube is beating Instagram, right? So to actually get content that’s doing really really well online, we’re getting users uploading videos on YouTube and getting 20, 30, 40,000 views in just a matter of a day or two right now. Pushing YouTube shorts, pushing Tik Tok videos with this content on vertical videos with these spokesperson videos and getting thousands and thousands of visitors right out of the gate because the voices are human voices. The actual people are real human people. And because of this, you really are able to customize a human to however they want you want them to be. And also you can create videos that just pop and get you the results. So click on the button below and get access right away. All those bonuses I mentioned, you can keep them 100%. Even if you decide this is not free, you get every single penny back. You have a 30-day no question money back guarantee. So either go to that uh page getumpal.com/live or you click on the button below right below this video and you can get started right away. Look forward to seeing you on the inside. We will go out of our way to help you succeed and take your business to the next level integrating this human pal technology with content genie. So thanks again and click on the button below to get started right
-
30 Items YOU Need Before A Great Depression!!!
Hi and a big welcome back to the channel today. Thank you so much for tuning in. Today’s video is going to be a little bit different than the content that I normally produce. Normally I focus on finance and macroeconomics, often a lot of geopolitical or current affairs. But today, I wanted to just add a video to the preparation playlist around a number of items I think is really important that you actually own as we go into this difficult period. Or should I say as we continue to go through this difficult period because one of the things that a lot of people have been putting in the comments is that some of the things that I talked about a year ago or even two years ago have already come to pass. And a lot of people said they wish they had these things that I talked about previously. And also, I know many of you will know this, many of you won’t know this, but I actually did serve in the army for over a decade. I’m trained in everything you can imagine in terms of survival and preparation, disaster management, uh, from Arctic, the coldest of climates, right through to arid, the hottest of deserts, from home defense or or compound defense, right through to being on the move and having to survive for long periods of time on your own on the move. So, what I thought I’d do today is just share some of this knowledge. And no, I’m not a a prepping channel, but I did just want to share some of this knowledge that I have with you. And now, many of you who are big-time preppers will already have a lot of these items, but for those of you who are not, I really think it would be valuable if you just have these 30 very, very basic items at your home so that no matter what happens, you will be prepared for the worst. And remember, it’s always best to prepare for the worst and hope for the best because if nothing happens, you’ve lost absolutely nothing, especially with a lot of these lowcost items. So, with that said, let’s get into item number one then. Now, item number one is water filtration. When I went through over a dozen survival courses in different countries around the world, the first thing I was always told to think about was water. That is the number and that’s the same thing I taught my soldiers as well. Number one thing to always bear in mind first is water. And I often hear people say, Neil, I’m fine. I’ve got gallons of water stored at home. I’m I’m good. Well, actually, that’s usually not the case because even if you have a lot of water stored, if you think about the amount of water that a human consumes each day, most people would run out of water. Even the most hardcore with the largest storage capacities, most people would run out of water in an emerter prolonged emergency situation. So that’s why one thing I always say is to get yourself a water filtration system. Yes, having water stored is fine, but you will run out eventually. So a water filtration system is very useful. Now, this ranges from things like your on the counter systems like a Berky, which requires no electricity. It’s gravity-fed, right through to smaller water bottles that you can use on the move. And if you go camping a lot with your family, you’ll probably already have something like these small uh water filtration water bottles. I know that I do. If I’m ever out for 2 or 3 days, I know that I would always take yeah 2 to 4 L of water with me. But the the main thing I would use is a water filtration system of some sort so that I can just fill up water from rivers and streams or lakes or wherever I am. And that brings me on to my next point then which is number two and that’s some sort of water storage or flask. Uh this is a an army issued water bottle by the British Army. Comes with a cup as well and just slots in like this. Uh fits in your rrook sack or however you’re going to carry it. I also have various flasks like this. This is my favorite one. It’s super well insulated and keeps uh liquids hot for usually around 4 to 5 hours in this uh this as well. Another type of flask. And the good thing about this one is that it’s single skinned. So, if you did need to heat this, I mean, it’s not ideal. I’m not recommending it, but if you did ever need to heat this in emergency, you could cuz it’s single skinned, whereas some of the others you can’t. And then I just have my normal uh water bottle which is what I use on a day-to-day basis. Number three then is food. I don’t mean perishable food here. I’m talking about long life stored food. Now you can go anywhere from rice. This is a 4 kilo bag and it will last for quite a long time in this bag on its own. But if you want to actually store uh grains and some long life grains for a lot longer, you’re going to have to start thinking about myar bags and oxygen absorbers or even as far as freeze dryers. Now, this food if you purchase it will cost a lot more. Freeze-dried food is a lot more expensive. We have a good store of it. We don’t have, you know, 30 years worth. We’re not looking uh out that far, but we do have a good store of a couple of years worth alongside our grains and other items that we use on a day-to-day basis. Number four then, I’ve mentioned this a lot of times before, is your clothing. You’ve really got to think now about clothing. Not designer, fashionable, throwaway clothing, but long life warm clothing. Especially if you’re in Europe this winter, uh you you know what’s happening. There’s a lot of crises at the moment. Maybe you’re in a cold climate and there may be some sort of load shedding or you know there may be a lack of energy this year is having nice uh wool jumpers, sweaters, we call them jumpers, you may call them sweaters. Having wool that keeps you warm uh body warmers items like this, this is a body warmer will keep you uh very warm. And then we have uh your usual stuff. So wool uh thick socks, a wool thick hat. This is uh my favorite item actually when it’s freezing cold. And then things like gloves. Now these are a tactical gloves. So I use these when I’m on the range every week. So they’re not super warm, but they are convenient for me because they give me full mobility of my hands and if I’m having to do anything else like anything maneuvers and climbing over stuff, these are really useful cuz it stops me shredding up my hands. Number five then is all about keeping warm at home. So, we have a thick wool blanket. This was from the army surplus store. It cost £20. A normal wool blanket will cost you quite a lot of money. Then, we have uh thinner different fabric uh blankets. We have all sorts of uh these right through to thick winter sleeping bags. So, if I ever needed to use this in an emergency, I’ve got this. Or often I might use sleeping bags anyway when I’m out in winter. If I’m camping in winter, then I will use these sort of items. Number six then is your home heating. This is what you want to think about. Now, whether you use heating oil, electricity, natural gas, or wood, you really want to think about your supply and your storage. Now, obviously, natural gas is not something you probably store at home, but some people again use propane for their heating if you’re quite rural. There’s all sorts of different supplies. Start thinking about your heating situation now. Do you have a a wood burner? This is one of the things I recommended a couple of years ago to get a wood burner before all of these energy crisis. If you have that, have you had your your chimney or your flu swept? If you use oil heating, have you got your boiler serviced? Have you got your oil tank filled up? These are all the things that you want to think about as we go into what is being called this dark winter. Number seven then is all about cooking. If you’re relying on somebody else to provide you with your energy that you’re going to use for cooking, that is something you may want to consider and think about. Honestly, the more independent you can get of all of these sort of things that we’re talking about, the better. Remember, plan for the worst, but simply hope for the best. You’ve lost absolutely nothing by doing any of these things. So, you can go from anything to something like this. This is my cast iron skillet. I swear by this. It weighs a ton. So, you don’t want to be carrying it around. And actually, I can cook on this just using tealight candle. I’ve got a a cast iron stove top. Again, that’s quite heavy, so it’s more for if you’re, you know, needing this at home. Uh, it’s got about eight tealight candles that sits underneath it. And this would be very easy to just put on top of that and and cook very very easily. And if you have a propane burner or something like that, you might want to get something very simple. Again, this is just for an emergency. I know it sounds doom and gloom here, but this is just a worst case scenario. Again, these are British Army mess tins. They are absolutely brilliant. You can easily cook in these, do all sorts of things with these actually. So, it’s better to have this kind of stuff, which costs very little. Uh these were less than £10. So, we’re not talking huge amounts of money here for something that could save your life in an emergency. Number eight then is obviously the fuel that you use. So, do you use wood? Do you have wood burners? will make sure that you’ve got enough wood stored up now ready for the winter time. And that comes into number nine, which is your fuel for other things. Maybe it’s for your vehicle. You might need some gasoline. And you can get these 5 L. I don’t know what that is in America, but these 5 L fuel cans. Uh, obviously don’t store these things in the house. Not just because it’s a fire hazard, but also it absolutely stinks the house out, even if you’ve got a good seal on these things. So, these are the sort of things that you want to think about. Now, I definitely keep at least 10 to 15 L of petrol. I also have around 1,000 L heating oil tank. Obviously, I have wood. I I have pretty much everything that I would need in an emergency situation. And I’ll tell you another beauty of doing these sort of things. For those of you who think this is too much work, this is doom and gloom, whatever, the beauty of this is that it it just takes such a weight off your mind. If you are sat there right now or stood there watching this and you’re thinking about, you know, you’re worrying about some of these things, honestly, once you’ve got them in place, it takes that weight off your mind, that stress, and it just you can relax a lot more. Number 10 then is this stuff. This is washing powder. Now, you can have it as a powder form in you can seal it in bags or tubs or you can get the small tablets, but not the sort of liquid tablets. This stuff is the best. Uh you can buy this in bulk very very cheaply and it lasts forever. So definitely get this just in case as we’ve heard in the UK the sort of energy blackouts that are being talked about if you can’t wash your clothes and you need to do a wash then this is what I used to when I would travel around. I would just fill the sink with some water, use some washing powder, wash the clothes and then hang them up to dry with some pegs on a on a line or something like that. So this is another thing that you should definitely have. Number 11 is pet food. Then make sure that you have enough food for your pets. We know what happened during the lockdowns. A lot of this pet food supplies just ran out very quickly and it did cause a lot of upset and a lot of stress for a number of people because they were worried about feeding their pets. Number 12 then is cleaning products and hygiene related items. One of the things that people forget are the black bags, what you might call trash bags in the USA. People forget this very quickly. Now, these have numerous uses, especially the strong ones. You can use these for all sorts of things, for uh waste, which is the main thing. Sometimes they even will hold some water if you need to collect some water, as crazy as that sounds. You can use them for storing other items, which is very useful as well. They just have so many uses. And then, of course, your hygiene products. This is absolutely crucial. When I was in the field, I would never take say hand gel and all these sort of shower gels. I would just take a very small bar of soap and that was absolutely perfect for me. Number 13 then is linked to number 12, but this is about your health. Do you take prescription items? Do you take medications? What about normal things like your vitamins, vitamins? Uh just having very basic things like a manual toothbrush and toothpaste and these items. Remember what I talked about last year? I actually went out and stocked up on all of these long life um non-p perishable items from toothpaste to to razors to shaving cream to soap and all these things because they never expire. So why would I wait 2 years when the price might double, you know, 2 or 3 years later when I can just buy it all and store it now, especially as these items are so cheap. Number 14 then is one of these things. This is a first aid kit. This is absolutely crucial that you have one of these in your household. This one here is from my vehicle. And I have actually used this before twice when I’ve been out and there has been some sort of a I wouldn’t say an emergency, but there’s been incidents and I’ve had to go back to my car run and get this to actually assist. Now, does that mean that you need some sort of medical training? Not necessarily. As part of my role, I was trained for about six to eight weeks in what you call a medic, a field medic. But it doesn’t mean that you need to know these things. But just having a basic first aid kit and knowing some simple skills would be very useful. And again, what did we see very recently, especially in the UK, in some of the places where there was up to a 3hour wait for an ambulance, an emergency ambulance in some cases because of all sorts of problems. And just recently, there was a lady that almost died in the UK because the road had been blocked off by these sort of protest people. And I’m I’m talking about these climate protest people. The ambulance couldn’t get to her. They had to go different ways. In the end, it had to be a helicopter that came in. See, under these circumstances, you need to have a little bit of basic medical training or at least a first aid kit. Number 15 then is this stuff. You might not think this is very valuable, but aluminum or the Americans call it aluminum foil is extremely valuable and it would be extremely valuable again during any kind of crisis. Now, when I go away, so I’m out um for three, sometimes four day treks at times, I definitely have some of this with me because if I need to cook anything, this is the easiest way to do it over an open fire. Again, I don’t want to carry my very heavy cast iron skillet with me. Sure, I have my mess tins that I showed you before, but this stuff is so simple. You can just wrap whatever you’re cooking into it. If it’s some meat, for example, or fish, wrap it in this, throw it on top of the fire, and it will cook it beautifully without needing to worry about any sort of cleanup or or any sort of equipment. Number 16 then is one that most people forget about, and that is one of these. This is a can opener. Now, you can get fancy ones that do it all for you. The battery, you know, it’s battery operated, or it plugs into the electricity supply. I don’t have any stuff like that. In fact, I don’t even use this one. This is my wife’s one. Mine is about this big. It’s got a little metal hook on it, and I just use it manually to open any can because yeah, most cans look like this these day and they have the ring pull. But I’m pretty sure, I can almost guarantee you if you look in your pantry, you’re going to find some that look like this where they don’t actually have a ring pull on it. So, you’re going to have to, and these are cans of tuna, by the way, that I’m holding up here, which will last I think these are 2027 on these. So, 5 years from now. So, just think about these things. Often, it’s it’s small items that you haven’t thought about that you need the most. Number 17 then is lighting. And you saw my video last week where I was holding these things up. And these are tealight candles. And this is a pack of 100 here. So, I must have uh two or three thousand of these things. But you also noticed last week and it was somewhat tongue and cheek where uh that I was lighting the candle and it kept going out. But that is sometimes what happens with these matches. So, make sure you’ve got alternatives. You got matches, you’ve got waterproof matches, you’ve got, you know, one of these things that I use uh from time to time. See, look at that. Uh it took three clicks there. I also have a flint in my bugout bag. or if I’m away trekking or something, I’ll use a flint to light my fire. Candles are really important for lighting. And again, these have so many different uses because I talked about my cast iron burner there. I can put, you know, just a few of these underneath the burner and that will heat a meal if I needed to. So, they are very, very useful. Number 18 then are torches or what Americans you will call flashlights. Uh these things very very useful, very important. Uh this is my main torch. This is my secondary one. Uh this is absolutely phenomenal. I’ve never had a torch or flashlight like this in my life. Uh this used to go on top of my rifle. That’s why it’s got the mounting brackets here. This is unbelievable. It will light up anywhere at all. And it only uses small batteries as well. It’s phenomenal. Yeah. Can’t recommend this enough. Okay, your next one then is one of these. This is just a very simple axe. Uh, multifunctional. I use this for all sorts of things. I’ve had this one for probably 15 years. And you can see how heavily it’s been used. And you can use it for all sorts. I’ve even used this as a hammer before. It’s so good. Now, what was I holding in the thumbnail? I was holding one of these. You probably wondered what it is. Well, this is your sharpening block. And it always makes me laugh when I speak to people and they say, “Oh, I’m I’m buying a new axe or new chisels or whatever.” And I say, “Why?” They say, “Oh, mine’s blunt.” Well, hello. This is what you use. Very simply, you just That’s it. It’s as simple as that to sharpen your axe. Uh, you know, you got to buy one of these. I bought this at a car boot sale, what you might call a flea market or something. It was less than a pound. I think it was 50p. I bought two of these sharpening blocks and I’ve had them forever. But this is good for your little bits of wood if you’ve got a wood burner. It’s good for taking down uh trees or anything in your grounds or your property. Again, you can really use it as a hammer if you need to for some small uh work. It also works as protection, shall we say. There’s only certain things I can say on this video platform,
but this is multifunctional. Uh, yes, I’ve got loads of different types. I’ve got hatchets through to wood splitters. I’ve got I’ve got probably a dozen in my tool shed, different axes and things. They all serve a different purpose, but really you just need one good one of these and you are good to go. Number 20 then is a small portable crank radio. Super super useful if you need to hear any emergency broadcasts when the power is out. Number 21 is a whistle. This will cost you, you know, a pound, a dollar, a euro. They’re super super cheap, but they may save your life if you are ever out and you need that. Or even if you’re at the home and you know something has happened, there’s some sort of an incident. You can always open the window and blow the whistle to attract emergency attention or to attract neighbors attention. That is if you don’t live in the middle of nowhere on your homestead where the nearest house is 10 miles away. Number 22 then are maps. I bet you’ve never thought of this. Well, most people won’t have done, but uh I have ordinance survey maps. I use these if I’m out trekking uh with a compass, but this I know this is pretty old school now, but this is the sort of stuff that I have and I use. And I think this will be very useful if we ever had a major um cyber attack or grid down situation or you just had to travel somewhere and your GPS or something like that doesn’t work. That’s for the younger people watching who don’t know any of the roads. They just use the Google maps or something like that these days. Brie then is cash. And I’ve got some different types of cash here from euros right through to British pounds and US dollars. Now, let me tell you, this will be pretty useless if you ever need cash in an emergency where we already know that they’re going to at some point transfer over to a central bank digital currency. Uh, so this stuff won’t be too useful. You need to have smaller denominations like this here, you know, £5 or or £10, something like that. Make sure you have uh small denominations, maybe even some coins. Number 24 then comes back to your tool shed, and that might be rather than having all those tools, something like a multi-tool with some pliers and a screwdriver and, you know, these sort of things attached. Number 25 is your gardening equipment and supplies. So, your seeds, uh, spade, all the things that you might need for growing your own food. And if you’re sensible, you will have already started doing some basic growing of vegetables, whether that’s on the window sill uh in your house with in a pot, whether you start a little patch in your garden this year, or whether you’ve got an an entire aotment like some people do, or their whole backyard is now a garden. This is definitely a highly highly recommended thing that you do. and a great idea because we know how bad the food supply is getting. Now, I’m not talking about actually the supply of food coming in, which is obviously a concern with all the famine warnings that we’re receiving, but also just the amount of chemicals and pesticides and crap that they are pumping into the food these days. Why not grow your own and be a lot healthier? Remember who you are and your health is uh pretty much 80% from your diet. Number 26 then is my favorite as you know it is books and I have so many books. I have thousands of books in my library but just a small sample here. Everything from books that you’ll want to read if you know you have no power. This is a what am I reading at the moment? Plato the republic. Another one is the book of the farm. This is absolutely brilliant from the Victorian ages. Highly recommend this book. This is all about food growing uh a lotment monthtomonth. I have probably 15 of these different uh foodbased books. And then I have one on wood basics, you know, basic carpentry. But honestly, having lots of interesting books is really important. And also because remember, we’ve been warned about these cyber attacks over and over. Again, this is not just me saying it. It’s governments and other industry bodies saying that there could be cyber attacks as we go through the next year or two. And you just got to start thinking about if there was a cyber attack and you couldn’t access certain things, how would you know how to do things? This is one of the reason I have a library and I collect a lot of books because there’s things I just don’t know how to do and those skills could be lost for a long period of time if they’re on the internet or uh things get hacked and destroyed online. So, I want to make sure that I’ve got an offline source of information. And of course, this links in with point number 27, which is to have hard copies, so physical paper copies of very important documents. This ranges from your marriage or your birth certificate right through to bank accounts, medical information. Learn from what happened to me with my bank accounts being closed down. It was only because I had physical paper copy records at home. And again, this is where you might want to have a fire safe that I was able to actually win my case in court and get the money back from those accounts. Number 28 then, and this is where we’re going full-blown prepper style here, is berable items. So, very simple things right from uh silver 1 oz coins here right through to gold. Now, you would get a lot for an ounce of gold like this, but also medicine, other equipment, uh food. These are all items that you could barter if we went into a worstc case SHTF as we say situation. Number 29 then is for I probably some of the younger generation. These are your power banks. So if you honestly just can’t go without power. You need your your phone or your laptop or something. Then you can get these power banks and they come in all different shapes and sizes and they have come down massively in cost now. But just remember that just because you have a power bank to charge up your phone or laptop, if the power’s down, your internet probably isn’t going to work anyway. So, I come back to my previous point, make sure you’ve got some good, enjoyable books to read. And number 30 then is batteries and rechargeable batteries. Make sure that you keep these in a myar bag or oxygen absorber or just in a tub for long-term storage because this will help the batteries to last a lot longer. Now, if you’ve made it all the way to the end of the video, then massive well done to you and please drop some of your suggestions below in the comments. But I just wanted to finish up here with one last point and that is that in my life I’ve traveled to over 70 countries. I think it’s 72 countries now. And I’ve been in all sorts of disaster zones. And one thing that I can share with you from the pattern I noticed with all of these things is that even some of the the most honest good people will break after a while. Now, I’m not saying all people, but a lot of people will eventually let go of some of their morals if their children are starving or if there’s a major disaster and there just isn’t help there. So you you really want to start thinking about these things now. Making sure that you’re protected and also some of your neighbors if you like your neighbors or your community or family members. You you’ve got to think not just about yourself but your community as well because I have seen the worst of the worst that civilization and humanity can do to people. And I know that in the west we often think that these things will just never happen. But already we’re starting to see u societal breakdown and we have seen it for two or three years now as we’ve gone through this crisis period. So I just want to finish with this last point. Always prepare for the worst case scenario. Hope for the best and if it doesn’t happen, you’ve lost absolutely nothing by your preparation. So thank you for watching today’s video. Take care. God bless. I will see you tomorrow on the walk and talk which will be a little bit different. will be in a different location.
-
09/02/2026 – Alliant Webinar – How to Get Rollover Ready! – Rollovers can be tricky! Explore your options for funding a comfortable and sustainable retirement
Good afternoon everyone. Like to welcome you to our presentation today on how to get rollover ready. I got 12 o’clock here. I’m just going to give it another minute or so. Let other folks have a chance to join in and connect to the audio. Just kind of watching the attendance. It looks like we have some uh people connected already. I’m just going to do a systems check here. Just want to see if anybody could respond in the uh chat feature. But uh just let me know if you could hear me. Okay. if you could see the uh presentation. Okay. Yeah, if there’s any technical difficulties, I’ll try to get those adjusted and we’ll get started here in just a moment. Okay, I think we’re in good shape. It looks like everybody’s had a chance to uh to join in here. So, I’d like to get started. Just about 1201, but introduce myself here. My name is Tom Davia. I’m a financial consultant at Alliant Credit Union. Our department is called Alliant uh Retirement and Investment Services. And today’s presentation, we’re going to be talking about how to get rollover ready. So, we’re going to be talking about rollover options in and we call them qualified retirement plans, but your 401k plans, 457, 453, any retirement plan like that. We’ll talk about some uh rollover options. As all of our presentations, we ask that you do not record, reproduce, or distribute any part of this presentation. And uh questions come up quite a bit. We don’t record these presentations, but if you do have questions, I’m happy to go over that with you as well. Uh this is a kind of a scheduling of our upcoming webinars. So, um I myself I run a uh every other Wednesday schedule, but if you’d like to see the complete list of all our webinars, uh we have webinars. I’m the co-host of the uh financial podcast here for the credit union as well and we have a blog available on financial topics. But uh basically it’s the alliancreditun.com/events
for the webinar schedule/mpodcast for my podcast series or blog for the blog information. I know that’s a very long uh website address. I don’t expect you to memorize nor write all that down. The simple way, if you’re interested in more information, you could let me know. Or if you go to the credit union website, there’s a button on the top that says uh investments. It’ll take you to our landing page at the credit union. And then right at the top here, it’ll have the schedule for webinars, podcast, and blog there as well. So, you can access all that information on the credit union website. But again, we are a uh investment services arm of the credit union. I always say we’re the best kept secret here at the credit union. So, not many members know we exist. So that’s why we do these presentations and put the podcast together to let you know that we do have a fullervice financial firm at the credit union, no cost uh service to members of Alliant and uh we are a fiduciary firm as well. So that comes up uh quite a bit as well. But I’m uh just sharing a sample of a financial plan. So I’m a certified financial planner. We do full financial planning. We uh talk about investments here. I’m a registered investment adviser and uh pretty much uh everything in between on the investment front. But uh with a financial plan, this is a sample output and I’m going to be referring back to this a little bit today. We’ll come back to some of the outputs and the financial plan to explain these rollover opportunities for you as well. But basically to put together a financial plan, again, it’s part of the service here at the credit union. But we sit down with you, we have a conversation about your situation, your goals, gather some basic information from you that’ll allow us to create this comprehensive financial plan. Basically, we’re looking at ways of reducing taxes, fighting inflation, creating more income from your nest egg, deal with raising rising volatility in the market. make sure your portfolios are positioned correctly and also talk about rising health care costs in retirement as well. So, just a service again that not many people are aware of that we offer here. Uh, only 36% of Americans have a written financial plan. Again, I can’t do this for everybody at the credit union. We have something like 900,000 members, but just want to let you know that we’re here as a resource for you. whether it’s talking about uh the rollovers today or whether it’s working on a financial plan. It’s a couple bullet points on a financial plan. Uh we do this to give you a clear picture of where you are today and where you want to go. A financial plan will help you make sure your investments, retirement account, taxes, insurance, estate planning, everything is working together. This financial plan will help you identify potential gaps and opportunities that you may not have known about or have been overlooked and help you determine if you’re on track for retirement and which accounts to withdraw from in a taxefficient manner as well. And of course, today’s topics are rollovers. A financial plan will help provide a framework of making an important decision like today’s topic of the rollover opportunity for you. And once you have a financial plan in place, it’s an ongoing conversation. It can be reviewed and adjusted as your life change, markets change, and your goals change as well. So, let you know that service is available to you, and we could talk to you about that. So, we are back on track, right? We’re going to be talking about rollovers today. We’re getting rollover ready. So, there’s a lot of uh information to know here. Can be tricky sometimes. So, we’re going to talk about all the different options available to you on the rollover. I would mention too that if you do have any questions, if anything comes up, uh, feel free to use that chat feature as I’m giving the presentation, kind of talking through this that comes to mind, put your question in there. I’ll get to the questions at the, uh, end of the presentation. I’ll take a look at the chat feature. I’ll also take a look at the Q&A feature of Zoom as well. So, if anything comes to mind, uh, make sure you put it in there. We used to do these seminars in person a long time ago and we’d stop and raise our hands. So this is the next best thing. So we’ll do questions at the end. But uh first slide right rollover challenge. I always say the challenge it’s pretty easy. We call the accumulation phase and then the distribution phase while you’re working and saving. That’s your accumulation phase. I always kind of call that the easy one just because you’re making contributions to these qualified plans that we’re talking about today. Maybe for most people it’s a 401k plan. Money’s coming out of your check every two weeks. So, you’re a good investor, right? You’re buying when the market goes down. You’re kind of disciplined with your purchases. Market goes down, you’re actually buying on the dip. Market goes up, your accounts are appreciating. And maybe you have a certain goal set in mind. Now, that goal for people are are are different goals, right? Maybe it was to get the 401k to a certain dollar amount. Maybe it was $500,000, a million dollars. you could see that value on the horizon or you reach that value. But times change when you go into the next phase of life which is the distribution phase. Distribution phase kind of goes in handinand with our topic today of rollovers. But now instead of just saving every two weeks and market has been performing great the last four years, now you have to worry about maybe living as long in retirement as you did [laughter] after retirement as you did working. So, we have to make sure we’re addressing longevity with these rollovers and these distributions. It’s always in the news. We’re talking about uh rising prices, inflation. So, we want to make sure that the rollover that the investments are addressing long uh inflation, longevity, tax concerns, search charges on tax concerns, beneficiaries. So, there’s more things that we look at in the distribution phase. That’s kind of why they put a little bit of a puzzle here. Lots of different things to consider for the setup for this presentation. I think it’s important to go over the rules. Uh fiduciary rules. Fiduciary rules mean right always uh acting in what’s your best interest to accomplish these rollovers to accomplish the investments or the uh distributions as well. But another way I look at these rules uh just kind of a milestone in time in retirement. Just like to walk through this just to let you know these are important issues, important ages, just some information you need to be aware of. If you caught my presentation two weeks ago, we spent a good amount of time talking about age 50 and the catch-up contributions and the power behind those. Usually at age 50, theory is maybe the house is paid off, maybe our kids are in college or out of college, and now is really a time to focus on yourself. So, if you haven’t been doing that, uh, you want to make sure you’re taking advantage of those catch-up contributions. If you’re not exactly sure what that is, contact me. I’ll go over that with you. There was some rule changes in 2026 that affected these ketchup contributions, so we could talk about that. This will come up a little bit later in the presentation as well, but at age 55, if you’re in a 401k account, you can take a penaltyfree withdrawal at 55 if your money is still in the 401k account and you’re over age 55. If you’ve left the company, that is age 55. Everybody else has to wait till age 59 and a half to take a penalty-free withdrawal from their retirement plan. Whether it be a 401k qualified retirement plan, whether it be an IRA account once you’re over 59 and a half, no more, excuse me, no more penalties. There’s also something that comes up at 59 a 12 that is kind of uh appropriate to our conversation today, but there’s also something called the inservice rollover. you are able to accomplish our topic today, the rollover, if you’re still working, if you’re age 59 and a half or older, if you want to implement funds into your financial plan and start your planning early, it’s just the IRS being nice to you and saying retirement is on the horizon. You don’t have to wait till you completely retire. There is something called the inservice uh rollover at 59 and a half. At age 60, we’re going to get into uh social security benefits. The absolute earliest conversation on social security is for a surviving spouse. Surviving spouse can start benefits at age 60. For everybody else, uh benefits can start at 62. It’s a bigger conversation swirling around that. If you do start at 62, we should probably talk about that a bit, but uh social security will be tiered 62. Full retirement age for most people is probably right around age 67. And then right in the middle of all that is Medicare eligibility. Medicare eligibility at 65. There’s different periods to sign up. So you want to make sure you understand those three different periods. Make sure you’re not missing your Medicare eligibility at age 65. And then age 70. That’s going to be the maximum for what they call the deferred credits on social security. So, if anybody out there is over age 70, if they have not started their Social Security, I would almost pause this presentation and go file for your benefits right now because you’re missing out. But you can maximize benefits all the way up to age 70 on Social Security. And then finally, uh we talk about required distributions. Required distributions are really determined by the year 1960. If you were born before 1960, your required distribution starts at age 73. 1960 and later, they’ve just increased this to age 65 with the Secure Act 2.0. So, again, 1960 line in the sand. Uh, if you’re 1960 and later, it would be age 75. Getting back on track to rollovers, right, off of our milestone list. So, what we’re going to talk about here is number one, we’re going to do a rollover, but you want to determine first what you want to do with your retirement plan savings. Again, retirement plans, call them retirement plans, qualified retirement plans. Uh we’ll just use this as a general term. 401ks, 403bs, 457, any kind of a like employer sponsored plan. So, we want to determine what you want to have happen with these plans. You want to choose a distribution option. And this is kind of our agenda. We’re going to go through each one of these uh points. We’re going to review the sources of funds within the plan and potentially consolidation in there. We’re going to look at some advanced planning techniques. We’re going to look at actually performing a rollover. And we’re going to uh look out for some common mistakes or complications that happen with the rollovers as well. So again, as I’m going through this, anything that pops up, please feel free to uh put it in the chat feature. But the first thing that we’re going to talk about is what do I do with the money in my retirement plan. So the first goal is determining where this funds are are ultimately going to go. Uh you may find yourself in a situation where you did your proper planning for retirement. You have fixed income sources. You have social security. Maybe a pension. Maybe some rental income. Other sources of income. Maybe the account value in the retirement plan has reached such a level that you don’t envision yourself spending this money. So, we’re going to talk about leaving an inheritance using the plan for leaving money to the next generation. So, that could be one option for you. Next option could be as we go through that financial plan, maybe social security and a pension just isn’t enough. Maybe you need a little bit extra from your retirement account savings to pay for living expenses. So with living expenses, if that’s part of it, again, we need to determine what the appropriate withdrawal is and what the appropriate withdrawal strategy is. So strategy could be twofold. Number one, it could be what is the most taxefficient way to uh withdraw money from my accounts using in consideration both your retirement accounts and the non-retirement accounts and possibly some tax-free money in a Roth account. So what’s the best uh option here for living expenses tax efficiently? Now the other way to look at this is investment wise. How do I need to structure my investments to provide me an income stream? What is an acceptable income stream where I wouldn’t project that I would run out of money. So all things to consider on living expenses as well. Next option uh leaving money to charity. And I have another slide on this a little bit deeper in the presentation talking about charity. So if you find yourself in charitably inclined, if this is one of your ultimate goals, we’ll talk about this as well, but this would be one of the determinations of what you want to use with these retirement plan funds. giving to a charity. There’s two ways to do it really, and we’ll go over this, but you could do some distributions while you’re alive, do a charitable distribution from your retirement account, or you can also some clients will name a beneficiary as a charity as well. So, that would be another option for you. And here we also have uh cash out, right? So cash out. I think you know years ago if you watched any of the commercials on retirement, we are all supposed to buy a vineyard or a second house or in this situation a yacht. So if there is some retirement savings that is kind of earmarked for a large purchase, you just need to determine what the tax consequences are going to be for something like that. because if it is a large distribution, you just need to make sure you’re not incurring any additional taxation or sir charges from say Medicare by doing something like that. But once you have that determined, say you might fall in a couple different categories. Some of this money may go to the kids. Some of the money may go to the yacht. Some of the money may be living expenses. But you may find yourself not fully understanding how much or when or which accounts are going to which sources when you’re deciding where these funds will go. I’m just going to default back to the simple cash flow overview on a financial plan. But this will help really determine maybe the last side, right? may be beneficiaries. How much money is left over in your financial plan after we take into consideration, say, healthcare expenses, possible long-term care scenarios, taking care of yourself first with your income needs. In this example, there was $2.1 million left over to the beneficiaries. We would say, “All right, everything is satisfied as far as living expenses. what is the most taxefficient way to get this projected asset portfolio base to the beneficiaries. So really a financial plan can help you determine how much may be available to give to charities, how much you need to live on and what sources to take, how much is also left to the beneficiaries in the proper way to plan for each. So number one, uh we took care of that, right? What we want to have happen with the funds. Number two, we’re going to talk about distribution options. So, we’re going back distribution option. It’s a qualified plan. It’s a 401k plan. You do have a couple options, right? Options really fall into these three categories. Number one, your option could be to do a rollover to a IRA, an individual retirement account, an IRA. So, you do a rollover, you roll over your funds, it’s not taxable, it goes into an IRA, which is also tax deferred. If you have Roth funds at the 401k, it would go Roth IRA. If you have pre-tax money in the 401k, it goes to a traditional pre-tax IRA. And we’ll talk about this as well, but once you’re in an IRA, the investment world really kind of opens up to you. So many different choices on a rollover option, and that’s kind of the focus of today as well. Um, option number two is cashing out. Maybe it’s that large purchase. Maybe it’s that second home, that yacht. Maybe it’s to help some family, but second option would be to cash out. Third option, do nothing option is an option. Leave the money within the company plan. So, we’re going to take a look at each one of these in a little more detail here. But the first one is the last one. The last one we talked about, right? Leaving the money in the employer plan. So, leaving the money behind. There’s pros and cons to everything. So, one of the cons is statistically somebody throughout their career may have 10 to 12 different jobs. So, you may have accumulated a lot of these 401k plans in the past. Maybe you don’t know how how they’re invested. Maybe you’ve lost track of them. Maybe you don’t know the beneficiaries, but leaving money in employer plan, right? Some of the pros, these plans may have lower fees than are available elsewhere. Uh potential for good investment choices. And that’s also one of the cons as well, the fewer investment choices. So, usually there’s a basket of six to 12 options and I kind [clears throat] of lump all those target date retirement funds into an option, but they don’t give you the complete world or universe of investing. They have a few pre-planned choices. So, could be a pro, could be a con in there as well. uh company stock. We’re going to touch on this in a few more slides, but if you do have company stock, and it’s highly appreciated, there’s some tax advantages inside the uh the plan as well. If you have the ability to purchase or if you’re being matched with company stock, that may be a uh a pro in the conversation. As well, as I mentioned earlier, if you’re 55 or older when you leave the plan, you have to be 55 when you leave the plan. you retire, separate from service, whatever the situation is, you would have the penalty-free withdrawals if you leave the money in the plan. These are shielded from creditors. We’ll talk about this as well. So is the IRA or the rollover IRA and the pro, right? Savings continue to grow tax deferred if it’s traditional pre-tax and it may be taxfree if it’s in the uh Roth portion in there as well. but leaving your money in the plan. Con, right? Fewer investment options. We talked about that. So many different choices outside of the plan. If you’re utilizing one of those IRA accounts, if you’ve left the company, right, you have no more contributions allowed. You’re not getting payroll every two weeks. So, they’re not taking money out of the account. So, generally not too big of a concern. This goes handinhand with no loans. So no loans. You’re again not being paid every two weeks. So they can’t take the loan payment out of the IRA. So no loans if you leave the employer plan. Uh if you are staying in the plan limited withdrawal options, they may restrict some of your withdrawals. They will also in a 401k plan if you do withdrawal, they will automatically withhold 20% for that withdrawal. So it doesn’t give you the ability to manage your own taxes. is they’re going to do a lot of that for you on there. They may limit transactions if you want to buy or sell some securities. Uh they may be limited securities and you may have a limitation on the number of times you can make a transaction. Uh limited beneficiary options again rolling over in an IRA much more beneficiary options, trust options, more creative ways to get the money to the next generation or create that legacy. So if we look at that, that is leaving money behind. Uh, number two, we’re going to talk about cashing out. So, if you cash out your plan, uh, good news is you get immediate access to all the funds. And cashing out is exactly what it means. You cash out, you get a check, you no longer have a retirement account. You now have a check in your name. So, you cash the whole thing out. And uh again, we’ll talk about this in a little bit, but company stock might have a a tax benefit to doing that if you have highly appreciated company stock that you work for. So, the pros, right, immediate access to the funds, maybe some tax savings. Uh the cons is it probably has been something that you’ve been saving for a long time. It probably has a substantial uh value to it. It is going to go through the marginal tax brackets pretty quickly because it’s all treated as ordinary income. The 22% bracket, 24% bracket, 35%, 37% bracket. So, that’s going to push you into higher and higher tax brackets where if you didn’t cash out and you systematically took withdrawals or systematically did Roth conversions, you may uh manage your tax brackets much more efficiently. Uh penalties may apply, right? If you’re under 59 and a half, if you’re not 55, you may have a penalty to do all this. And again, if you cash out, beware, mandatory 20% withholding from the account. So, we’ll talk about this a little bit more cuz there is a way to put money back if you’ve done this, but that 20% withholding goes right to the government. So, you would have to at least pay taxes on the 20% withholding. And then cashing out, it’s in your bank account. It’s in your investment account. So you lose the creditor protection that retirement accounts have been offering you over that time period. Third option is we’re going to talk about uh rolling over, right? So we’re going to roll over the qualified plan, the 401k with a retirement plan into a traditional IRA. More pros on the left side than cons on the right side. Pros, uh again we talked about this uh complete accessibility to any type of investment portfolio. Uh ETFs are index or exchangeraded funds, stocks, bonds, portfolios. We have investments with certain amounts of protection. We have the best access to the best money managers and the biggest risk management firms in the world as well. So much more access to some of those top money managers. You could work with a financial adviser and we would love it if you work with us here at Alliant Investment Services. But doing the rollover then can introduce some financial planning into the conversation and working through some of these tax situations or income distribution situations as well. Uh liquid and portable, right? It’s your account. It’s your IRA, individual retirement account. You can move it from firm to firm. You can move it from investment to investment as well. One thing I would stress is uh I do get the question where can I combine this with my spouse’s account? These are individual retirement accounts. So it would have to stay within your name individually with your spouse as the primary beneficiary. And we could do that vice versa on spouses as well. But the IRA rollover IAS, we do retain creditor protection. So that’s a pro for this conversation. uh beneficiaries may have the ability to stretch the benefits uh when they receive them over their life period over their lifetime. As my last presentation, we talked about the new beneficiary designations. The eligible designated beneficiary can stretch over life. You could have trust designations. You could have so many options within the IRA account that may not be available within the 401k beneficiary or legacy planning as well. flexibility, ease, and use of converting money to a Roth. We’ll talk about the Roth a little bit more in a few slides, but I do presentations on Roth conversions. It’s going to be uh become wildly popular on my conversations in the fourth quarter where everybody kind of procrastinates till the end of the year. But [snorts] within the traditional IRA, it’s very easy just to determine the appropriate amount for this year and then quickly do a conversion. Sometimes the previous employer’s plan, they don’t do it, they don’t allow it, they get backlogged in December, they can’t accomplish it, and they don’t really help you with the tax brackets or the tax planning to do one of these conversions as well. Mentioned before, right? Consolidating accounts. So, this one takes it a little bit step further. Uh, consolidating accounts, not only retirement accounts, maybe you have a few different IRA accounts, maybe you have a few different 401ks. kind of consolidating, making sure you can see them in one statement, in one place, one login view, but also working with us at the credit union, you can also link together and see your non-retirement accounts. You can see your brokerage accounts, your investment accounts kind of consolidated on one statement, so you always know where you sit and what your position is. So, we’re talking about rolling right into roll over into the traditional IRA. uh potentially higher trading costs uh depending on what the 401k offer. 401k may limit some of this, but uh there might be some cost. We completely disclose any cost to you as a fiduciary firm. Um you’re in an IRA. Again, there’s no loans allowed. They don’t have loan provisions. They don’t have the ability to withhold from your payroll. So, a individual retirement account cannot offer a loan. Mandatory distributions, right? the required minimum distribution either at age 73 or if you’re born after 1960, age 75. This is really applicable to leaving the money behind or bringing it into an IRA. You’re going to have a required distribution. If you’re still working, if you’re working past age 73, if that’s your number, if you’re working past age 75, kind of few and far between. But if you’re still working and the money is still in the 401k, you are not subject to the required distribution. And once you leave or once you stop working, then you have to take the required distribution. So that may be a benefit or a consideration to leaving the money behind if you’re still working. and uh again rolled over company stock taxed as ordinary income. So there’s a little tax advantage to that as well, but uh we’ll go over that just it’s actually a tax saving, so not a a big con. So uh right, there was three there. This is kind of a uh fourth one or a part 3B, if you will, on rolling over to a traditional IRA. This is a Roth IRA. So Roth IRA, if you have a Roth, you have after tax dollars in the Roth. It has the Roth designation. So the Roth is receiving taxfree compounding. So assets, your base, you’ve already paid taxes on it. Your bases, your earnings are growing tax-free. They’re never taxed again. No mandatory distributions, no required distributions at age 73 or 75. and no taxation to your beneficiaries. So, a lot of pros to doing a Roth or a Roth conversion. The con is you must pay taxes at the ordinary income rates today if you do a conversion. So, whatever your tax rates are today, you look at your income for the year. You take away that standard deduction. You kind of see where you’re falling within those tax brackets and then see how much room there is for a conversion. But that money would be due April 15th of next year if you do a 2026 conversion. So you must pay the ordinary income taxes. So lots of pros, but uh you do have to keep that con in mind. So step three, we’re going to talk about sources of funds. So if you ever look at your 401k statement, your qualified plan statement, they’re going to say this is your pre-tax money. This is your matching money. This is the after tax dollars in the plan. This is the Roth portion of the plan. You’re going to see about four or five different categories. So, you may again find yourself scratching your head. How did that happen? What are all those numbers? How do I roll it over? Where does it all go? The biggest one is going to be those after tax dollars. This might not apply to everybody here. For the most part, uh most clients, they’ve done uh pre-tax money. They’ve done pre-tax matching from the company. Maybe some Roth contributions in there. That’s all after tax. But you do have the ability in a 401k in a qualified plan that once you meet the maximum, you can go above the maximum and you could do additional contributions on a aftert tax basis, which there’s some good news and bad news, right? You got to pay the taxes on it. It doesn’t go in the Roth. It goes in an after tax basis. But then you got to make sure when you do that rollover that you’re tracking your aftert tax dollars and you know what that basis is so you don’t have to pay taxes twice on that. You can don’t get double taxed on the after tax portion of the plan. Again, if you find yourself uh wondering what you have should be on the statement. If you get a quarterly statement from your uh 401k plan administrator, uh I could talk you through it as well if you see a couple different categories, but you just want to make sure you’re you’re uh staying aware of the after tax and you’re tracking those after tax dollar amounts. This is a a big chart with lots of boxes and lots of yeses in there. For the most part, there’s yeses, but this is talking about rolling from rolling from a qualified plan. 403b plan, 457 governmental plan, 401k, private plan, all those different things. You just watch the tax treatment. So, if you roll from a 401k and it’s a Roth, you can roll that into a Roth IRA. Yes. If you have a Roth 401k, if you go to the second box on the bottom, Roth 401k, no, you don’t want to roll that to a traditional IRA. That would be a bad situation. it would uh kind of put you backwards in the tax situation. But the thing to keep in mind, you just follow the tax treatment. So any one of these qualified plans, we want to know what the uh taxes is on it, whether it’s pre-tax, Roth, or after tax. We’re going to follow that same taxation chart to the IRA and make sure it stays in the same category. So we’re keeping these same taxation on the accounts. We’re going to talk a little bit here uh section four on advanced planning. advanced planning uh techniques, right? Are they only for the rich and famous? There is some very very advanced techniques. We would talk about trust and irrevocable trust and tax planning. But for everybody who has some pre-tax money, if you go through that financial plan and you see that, all right, maybe some of this will be left to my beneficiaries, these accounts, uh, pre-tax retirement accounts are not a good wealth transfer vehicle. Basically, either you have to pay the taxes at your ordinary income tax rate or your beneficiaries do. And your beneficiaries were kind of hurt in this conversation a few years ago. They used to be able to spread it over their entire lifetime. Now they have to take the money out in 10 years. So they could take it out equally over 10 years, add a little bit to their taxation. They could wait 10 years and then pay it all at once, but they’re going to add that to their income. They’re going to go through the marginal tax bracket. So not a great tax situation. Great retirement savings vehicle, but not a great wealth transfer vehicle. So we’re going to look at and say, “All right, again, my pension, my social security, everything’s fine. Life is good. I’m meeting my obligations. I’m traveling, maybe taking some money out of my cash accounts, my brokerage accounts. I’m supporting everything I need to, but I would like to leave money behind to my children, to my grandchildren in the most tax advantaged way possible. So, as I said, uh pre-tax money, pre-tax retirement accounts is not the most taxefficient way. What we want you to do is we want you to consider converting a portion of the pre-tax retirement accounts to a Roth. Big bullet point here is heirs can inherit this money taxfree the tax-free income. They still have that 10-year rule. They have 10 years to take it out, but those 10 years would still be in a Roth designation. So even after we leave this money to our kids, they could still have another 10 years to grow this tax-free. So there’s a lot of benefits to the Roth conversion. And I’m just going to walk you through one of those scenarios, right? Hypothetical example, we have somebody uh I think it was the past slide, the mom and the daughter, but we have momed [snorts] 66. She has 250,000 in a 403b qualified retirement plan. What she’s going to do is she’s just going to take her required distribution every year. She’s going to do nothing, right? Just take the required distribution, pay the taxes on it. She doesn’t need the money. She’s just going to put the money in an investment account. Both accounts are growing at 6%. But what happens if we take her all the way out to age 90? What we’re going to have is taxation during mom’s lifetime because of all those required distributions. Her taxation and we have her at the 24% bracket here or 28 I think on this slide, but she has a total tax liability that she has paid of $120,000. She has not depleted the 403b retirement account. So the daughter still has income tax of 93 almost $94,000 on the retirement account that she inherited. So over this example, there’s going to be taxation of about $214,000 due on this $250,000 retirement account. And again, that’s a do nothing scenario, right? Just take the required distributions, put it in an investment account, don’t do any advanced planning, don’t do any Roth conversion planning. Now this next slide is mom’s going to say that’s not the optimal way to give money to my daughter. I want to convert this because I am at a lower tax break bracket now than she may be in the future. So what mom did is systematically over four years the first four years she has done a Roth conversion. She has ended up converting all the money and she has paid all the taxes on it. So from there mom has no more required distribution. Mom has no more taxation on the gains in the account and the daughter has no taxes due on the inheritance. Previous slide said total tax liability was 214,000. In this slide by systematically doing it over four years, total tax liability was 76,500.
Uh considerable savings, $160,000 or so in savings in that conversation. But what mom did here is she had the conversion pay the taxes. So she grossed up how much the conversion was. Told her IRA account custodian to withhold for taxes from the conversion. Send 10% send 20% to the IRS to pay for all this because I don’t have the money available in cash or stocks that I want to spend on this. So in this example, the IRA paid its own conversion taxes and the ending value came out to $772,000.
So again, starting at 250, total tax liability 76,000 left taxfree to the beneficiary $772. The IRA pays the taxes. One more example. One more example. Mom did the same thing except [snorts] when she did the conversions, she said, “I’m going to pay the taxes out of pocket. I have plenty of cash available. I have brokerage accounts. I have an inheritance. I have other money.” So each one of those years, first year the tax was 17,500. Then 18,500. She wrote a check every year. So by writing a check every year, there’s more money in the account. There’s more money that’s growing and compounding over all of these years. Again, there’s no required distribution. It’s all growing tax-free. The tax liability was the same, $76,000. She just paid it out of pocket, but we’ve increase the inheritance to the daughter tax-free of $1,73,000 completely tax-free to the daughter. That’s the way to make retirement accounts more tax advantage, tax efficient for the beneficiaries, for the next generation. Now even in this situation the daughter inherits a million dollars. That million dollars is not required to be distributed for another 10 years. So the daughter can enjoy more tax-free growth of that million dollar before she has to completely withdraw it and at that point she would have to put it somewhere else, invest it somewhere else. This uh summarizes everything I just talked about. Left hand side is the do nothing scenario. Mom paid taxes of 120,000 and daughter paid taxes of 93,000. That left uh potential after income tax inheritance 589,000. Middle scenario, the IRA paid for the taxes. Total taxes due at the bottom 76,000, daughter gets 772,000. And then final scenario, mom wrote a check every year for the conversions. Total taxes at the bottom still 76,000 but the daughter got a million dollars a million73,000. So that’s the power of these Roth conversions. Usually at this point hopefully this is getting some people excited either for themselves where they don’t have to take the required distribution for themselves. They don’t have to pay higher taxes on those distributions possibly going through Irma uh search charges on Medicare or if they want to help their beneficiaries. Right? This is a motivating conversation, but when you look at these charts, you say, “I don’t know what’s the best thing for me. How can I figure all this out? I don’t know my tax rates today. There’s some special standard deductions going on in the tax code for the next couple what what does all this mean for me?” But again, going back to our financial planning capabilities, this is a tax bracket report. This summarizes everything I just put in the last four to five charts. This is a personalized look at your tax rates, not only now, not only 5 years from now, but for the next 20 to 30 years, counting in those required distributions. This is usually the way the graphs go. And this is usually what we’re looking for. But left-hand side, somebody’s still working for a few years, your tax rates are going to be higher. When you stop working, you can see those blue bars really go away. That’s your tax income base. Income tax base. That’s how much you’re paying your taxes on. And that’s moving through the marginal tax brackets. The green one being the 12% bracket. So, you can notice in this example that we could pinpoint ideally when you stop working, you’re going to have some very low tax years. You’re going to have possibly that standard deduction in there that you might not be uh fully taken advantage of. And then when you turn 73 or 75, the taxes are going to start up, the required distributions are going to start up. So, we pinpoint that low tax year. So, we look at the bottom and we say, well, the do nothing strategy that leaves you with uh total tax liability $746,000 that you paid to state and local taxes. And on the bottom, you have a total portfolio value of 2.1 million. How can we improve this for yourself? How can we improve this for your beneficiary? So what we’ll do is in the interview process, right, when we’re gathering this information, we’ll identify the years to look at low taxes. And then when we identify those low tax years, we’re going to say, “All right, we can, in this example, fill up a tax bracket. We could fill up the 10% bracket. We could fill up the 22% bracket. We could do sideby-side comparisons. We could do a specific dollar amount, 20,000 a year, 50,000 a year. We can look at all these different scenarios. And on the bottom, we’re going to pick on what accounts to convert. When I say that, that is your pre-tax accounts that you have to pay taxes or your beneficiaries have to play pay taxes. But if we put all this together right here, we’re illustrating the Roth conversion as denoted by yellow. Yellow is filling up that 12% tax bracket. So, we kind of spread out the taxes, the future taxation. We filled up that low 12% bracket. And at the bottom, just by using the 12% bracket, we have tax savings in this example of $112,000. And we’ve also added ending portfolio value to the beneficiaries of an additional $600,000 by having this Roth conversion conversation. So, there’s still some taxation here. We didn’t complete everything. We didn’t convert everything. Sometimes it gets very expensive to do something like that. But I always say everybody should consider this conversation. And when you consider this conversation, really what you’re trying to focus on is number one, does it save me in taxes? Could hurt you as well. Could cost you more taxes. So we want these numbers to be on your side. Is it going to save me in taxes? And then number two, does it add portfolio value to my uh estate to my beneficiaries as well. So, next thing uh we’re going to talk about, right, shifting gears a little bit, just uh charitable giving. I know we talked about that uh previously, but when you’re in an IRA, you’ve done your rollover, you’re in an IRA account, you have the ability to do something that’s called a qualified charitable distribution, a QCD. If you’re not familiar with this, you need to be over 70 and a half years old. And a lot of times this will be kind of mirrored with your required distributions, but this is available in the IRA. And basically what you’re doing is you’re telling your retirement account or your IRA, take a certain amount each year and give that to charity on my behalf. It’s not you doing it. You don’t take constructive receipt of the funds. But by doing that, this will count as your required distribution. And this is not taxable to you. So, another benefit of the rollover to the IRA account is some of the charitable giving uh considerations. So, we could talk about this in greater detail. I think the number this year it’s up to 111,000 per person you could do as a qualified charitable distribution. There’s also something that’s called a QAC. If you’re using uh IRA accounts, QAC is a qualified longevity annuity contract. Not in 401ks. They’re in IRA. Number one, it’s a longevity contract. So, it’s the government offering you a way to make sure you never run out of money. So, this will pay you for life. But this is also a way if you’re doing the calculations, if you find yourself with a high taxation, a high required distribution, you could remove up to $210,000 from the IRA portfolios, put it in a qualified uh longevity annuity contract, defer your required distributions. is really you could push it all the way back to age 85. So if you’ve ever heard about those, we could talk about that in greater detail as well. And then finally in the charitable giving I just kind of put down here as well naming your beneficiary as a charity. We’ve had some clients that they just don’t have anybody. They don’t have any beneficiaries. I have the conversation it’s going to go to the estate. It’s going to go through probate. The judge is going to have the same problem that you’re having right now. So, if you have any uh charities that you’re you’re fond of, that you participate in, that you’d like to support, you can name a charity as the beneficiary of your IRA. The good thing is at that point, nobody pays the taxes. You didn’t pay the taxes because it was left in the IRA. Charity doesn’t pay the taxes when they receive the uh the gift as well. I know I promised a couple times a company stock. Uh this might affect a few of you. It might be uh few and far between, but if you have uh company stock in your 401k, it has to be company stock. And really for this conversation, it has to be uh substantial gains, right? So if you work for a company that’s really highly appreciated, maybe you’re at a technology company. Uh I know those tech stocks have been doing great. So what you can do is you could take advantage of something called the NUA, net unrealized appreciation. I’m not going to spend a lot of time on this, but if you find yourself in these categories, if you want to learn more about this, uh, basically this NUA, net unrealized appreciation, allows you to swap ordinary uh, taxation, ordinary income taxes on your stock, you could swap that for the more preferential capital gains tax treatment. So, instead of going through all the marginal tax brackets, uh, for most people, the, uh, capital gains taxation is 15%. But again, if you feel you may fall in this category at all, if you want to run some examples, um, we could talk about this as well, but you must take a lump sum in distribution. So, you must take everything out of the plan and then the original basis in the stock is going to be immediately taxable to you as well. So, bigger conversation here, but uh, again, if you find yourself in that situation, happy to have some of those conversations with you. So, finally, right, we’re going to talk about uh getting rollover ready. There’s a couple things that go along with this. Uh, everybody has a 401k that goes through a plan administrator. So, you have an administrator. For some people, right, it’s Fidelity, some might be Vanguard, some empower. You’re going to have all these different plan administrators. So, this slide is really based on your plan administrator, what they require. So, sometimes we’ll talk to talk to plan administrators. We’ll do a rollover. They’ll take the instructions over the phone. Some plans will have their own paperwork that need to be filled out. It’s a bit of a chore. Sometimes it’s 10, 15 pages long, requires notaries and things like that. So, if you found yourself in that position, I’m pretty detailed, pretty familiar with all those forms. So, we can help you navigate through that as well. So, you want to check with the uh plan administrator, right? see if I’m eligible. If you’ve left work, you really have to wait one to two pay cycles before the rollover is ready to be performed. If you’re over 59 and a half and your plan administrator allows it, you have that inservice rollover opportunity for you as well. You just want to touch base with either HR or the plan administrator to get that paperwork. When you go to initiate a rollover, the first thing they’re going to ask you is if you’ve seen the 402F, they will call it the special tax statement. Special tax statement. It kind of recaps all the things that we’re talking about today. But you need to get that. You need to review that. You need to understand that 402F special tax statement. Basically, it means if you do a rollover, it’s going into an IRA. You do it correctly. It’s not taxable. If you do a distribution, it’s all taxable and they’re going to withhold 20%. So, you want to make sure you’re reviewing your 402F. Make sure you get the uh paperwork to open. You need an account to put the funds in. So, you have to have a a home base for the account. We help with this as well, whether some funds are going to the credit union, savings account, IRA, CD, IRA, investment account. We’ll help coordinate and get those account numbers set up and uh ready for the rollover as well. just confirming what the custodian needs for the rollover. What this means, for example, uh at the credit union, if we receive rollover funds, we need something that’s called a rollover authorization form to document that. So again, we can walk you through that if you have any questions. But whether it’s credit union, whether it’s our investment services, you just want to make sure you know what the new custodian IRA account is going to need for that rollover. uh complete it, turn it in, and it is up to them as far as what their processing times are. Again, the major firms are usually pretty quick with processing. Smaller companies, smaller firms, it might take a while. So, you want to make sure you ask those questions and you know uh what the timetable is going to be for a rollover like this. Uh next, this is really important. This is uh two types of rollovers uh direct and indirect rollover. A direct rollover is really what we’ve been talking about today. The plan, the 401k, the uh retirement plan sends funds directly to your new IRA, your new IRA custodian. And the key there is custodian. The funds are not sent to you. So, they’re sent to the custodian. That’s a direct rollover that is not taxable. The other one is a indirect rollover. And really this concept applies to 401ks, qualified plans, and it also uh applies to IRA accounts. So if you’re moving IRA to IRA, you just always want to make sure that you’re doing these direct rollovers or direct IRA transfers. The indirect means that the check the funds are sent to you. You’ve taken constructive receipt immediately becomes all taxable. So, not a great situation. If you’re dealing with 401k plans, they’re going to withhold 20% right away. Send it to the government. So, you’re 20% in the hole to begin with. Now, you do have there is a 60-day rule. So, if you put all that money back within 60 days, then you’ve saved yourself and it’s not taxable. A few caveats to that. It’s 60 days, so you could not have done this the 12 months before the 60 days. you cannot do it again in the 12 months after otherwise the whole thing would be taxable. So that is the 60-day rule. Even if you fell in this situation, the plan, the 401k, the qualified plan is already withheld 20%. So you already have a 20% taxable distribution that’s gone to the IRS. So you have to be careful with these indirect rollovers. Basically, it looks like this, right? This is a check. These checks are never made out directly to you. However, they’re for your benefit. FBO. So, example of a check, right? Rollover check. This is what we want to see. Uh maybe the first part will say Alliant Credit Union FBO for benefit of and then your name. You’ve successfully completed a direct rollover or a direct IRA transfer. You’ll notice this check is not technically made out to you. It’s for your benefit. So, when you get this check, it’s made out to the credit union. Don’t need to sign it. It’s for your benefit. it goes into your account. But that’s uh that’s what a direct rollover check would look like as well. Just going to wrap up uh just quickly, right? Uh some common mistakes, missing deadlines, maybe the plan administrator only opens a certain window uh during the year to let you do these rollovers. That’s a little more prevalent in pension plans. So, if you have a pension plan that you’ve been thinking about doing a rollover, this is on the table as rollover, but watch out for some of those deadlines. Watch your 60-day rules. Watch your beneficiaries, right? rules have changed a couple years ago with the Secure Act and the Secure Act 2.0. If you have a couple different IAS, 401k accounts, you just want to make sure as you’re doing this process and consolidating accounts, you have the correct beneficiaries on there. [snorts] Rolling over company stock. If it’s highly appreciated company stock, we may have the ability to find you some tax savings in there. If you don’t pay off your loans before the rollover, it’s going to be a taxable distribution of the loan. So, it might be a little surprised when you do your taxes. And then again uh cashing out or taking an indirect rollover and [clears throat] u the proper beneficiaries or naming a beneficiary as well at all. So uh with all this we’re just shy of an hour. Um how can we help? Right. I talked about financial planning. So we can help you put this all together. Create a financial plan a retirement income plan. How much do I need? What accounts do I need? How can I tax efficiently do this for myself and for my beneficiaries? We could advise on the investment options, review your current options and your goals, look at some of the volatility that we’ve been facing in the markets, see if this is what the correct course of action is for you going forward. We could talk about consolidating of different accounts. If you’ve collected a few of these retirement accounts over the years, we could coordinate these conversations with starting social security. We could run examples either starting late or starting early and uh Medicare guidance, right? We could talk about Medicare and how Roth conversions or required distributions may increase or may give you a search charge on the Medicare uh part B premiums. And right, we put it all together in a uh concise form for you. This is uh again our uh output from a financial plan. So I’m just uh starting a poll here. I’m going to get to your uh questions, but we’ve gone over this a few times, but this just answers all the questions really. Do I have enough? Where am I going to draw it from? What the kids what the kids are going to receive? When do I start a social security? And why am I doing all this? Right? Where where is it all leading to? So happy to help uh answer any of those questions you may have on your individual situation or the topic today. Um this is my contact information. I always say call, click, or visit. Call [snorts] or the phone. we could have a conversation, answer some of those questions for you if they’re a little more uh personal than today’s uh chat can handle. Um, click right if you scan that QR code. Uh, that’s going to take you to my calendar link. It sets up a Zoom meeting for us just like this to talk about some of these important topics and visit. I’m in the credit union headquarters in Chicago, right outside of O’Hare. If you find yourself in the general greater Chicagoland area and you’d like to meet in person, credit union is still open for investment meetings and financial planning so we can meet in person as well. Uh when we wrap up here, the credit union sends an email out on my behalf, gives you my contact information, my link to my calendar, you can send me an email, questions, we we could talk through all those important topics for you. But with that said, I’m going to look at some of those questions. If there’s anything else that’s coming to mind, feel free again go into that chat feature or Q&A feature. We’ll get all these answered and we’ll get you on with your uh Wednesday afternoon. So, a question came in here. Can I take my required distribution at age 73 from a pre-tax IRA to a Roth IRA? Okay, great question. So [snorts] when you are at the required distribution age, you have to take your required distribution first before you’d be eligible for any Roth conversion. So when you take your required distribution, you can’t simply just take that and put that into a Roth IRA. Got to take the money out, you got to pay the taxes on it, and then you could do a Roth conversion. Now, one caveat, right? All my answers are usually it depends. if you are still working, if you have a spouse that is still working, you are still going to be eligible for a Roth IRA contribution. So, you could take out your required distribution, you could pay the taxes on it, and then you could put that back into a Roth IRA because you still have eligibility, right? Somebody is still working because you need earned income on those Roth IAS. Uh, a question came in, um, I missed the required distribution ages, right? 7375. If I was born in 1955, am I able to convert from a company plan to a Roth? Uh, so good question. So, number one, born in 1955, your required distribution age is 73. So, regardless of the required distribution age, a Roth conversion is available to anyone at any time for any dollar amount. You still have to take your required distribution, but anybody can do a Roth conversion, any amount. The government would love if you do all of it at once and you pay a huge tax bill on it, but you are able to convert. Now, the only thing I would say is in your question, am I able to convert from a company plan to a Roth? I would hope so. Company plans, maybe they’ve adopted the conversions. Some have, some haven’t. So, you might not be able to do it at the company plan. If you do a company plan rollover, right, our topic today, if you do the rollover to the traditional IRA, then you can do a conversion for whatever you want, whenever you want. Another question came in, right, there was a thank you uh thank you for joining. And another question, uh when can I have an appointment with you? Again, uh scanning the QR code that will take you right to the uh calendar link. Uh there’ll be an email that comes out and email will have a link to my calendar as well. Get to know you if you’d like to learn more about our services and my background. That’s a 30inut conversation. We’ll kind of lay the the ground the framework for future conversations and some planning just to make sure we’re a good fit for for doing some of this. But that would be the 30 minute meeting option. And then we have longer time slots available if we want to go into bigger cons uh conversations or financial planning. Uh, let me see. Is the meeting free? So, we don’t charge for these conversations. We’re not going to charge you to answer some of your questions. We’re not going to charge you to put these financial plans together. Uh, the question was, I don’t have an investment at Alliant, and I only have CDs. Well, you are a member of Alliant Credit Union, so we are big on members helping members. So, we’re going to help you out with uh some of these uh issues and questions, get you on the right path. I always say, you know, we’ll have these conversations. Hopefully, we’ll put you in a better position than we found you in either tax- wise or uh income distribution wise, but um you know, I kind of wear two hats here. So, certified financial planner, so we could have these planning conversations, but you mentioned you don’t have investments at Alliant. We do offer investment services as well. So happy to do a uh a review for you, analyze current portfolios, see if we could do anything on um any investments that would help you with your goals, reduce fees, reduce volatility. So yeah, we do quite a bit here as well. So happy to help you with the investment side of everything as well. Uh another question came in. Is it advisable to do the Roth rollover to uh to do the 401k rollover to a Roth IRA earlier rather than later? [snorts] So you are talking about a conversion. You’re going to convert your money hopefully systematically over time to a Roth. Now two-part question there earlier rather than later. I could take that as calendar year. Some clients in January will say I completely know my tax situation for the year. There’s going to be no surprises. I am positive on the markets. I believe we’re going to have a good year in 2026 or 2027. I want to convert the money earlier in the year rather than later to get the appreciation in the market in the taxfree Roth. So that’s calendar year. The other way I kind of look at your question is agewise. Um that’s a uh kind of a function of these conversions. The younger you are, the longer you have to compound taxfree in the Roth IRA. So everyone’s going to be a little bit different. love to run the scenarios for you but uh really in your question earlier rather than later gives you more taxfree timing taxfree growth in there. Another question here if I convert small amounts from traditional to Roth annually do I need separate Roth accounts or can I consolidate into one? So you do not need separate Roths. You do it all into one. We just kind of do it as he said systematically over time year after year. put it into the Roth whenever you please for what’sever best for your situation. Uh it depends on your age to answer this because if you are over 59 and a half and if you’ve own any Roth account for 5 years that’s all going to be tax-free to you. So you don’t have to track the conversions if you’re over 59 12 you just have to have any Roth for 5 years and if usually if people are doing the Roth conversions going to hold on to it for 5 years uh anyhow. So, uh, you don’t have to worry about any of that. You can use the same Roth account and you don’t have to, uh, track those conversions. Let me see. I think, um, see if anybody came in on the Q&A.
Yeah, there was a question. Uh, we did a whole presentation on this last week, two weeks ago. Uh, somebody brought up the please discuss eligible beneficiaries, eligible designated beneficiaries in the context of the 10-year distribution for inherited IRA. I did an hour long hourlong presentation on beneficiaries and eligible beneficiaries. So, I’m going to try to recap this as quick as I can. You have a good question, so you may want to talk to me individually just to make sure you’re doing the right thing. I run into situations where people are not doing the right thing and there is a tax penalty for not doing this the right way. But now there’s two different categories. Uh eligible designated beneficiary retain the lifetime stretch of the IRA little bit of tax every year for a long long period of time. Eligible uh designated beneficiaries are going to be spouse uh beneficiary not more than 10 years younger uh disabled individuals, chronically ill individuals, minor children up until the time they’re 21, but those would be eligible. They get the stretch option. Everybody else is not an eligible designated beneficiary. Everybody else has to take the money out within 10 years. So, a lot of rules that kind of swirl around that, but happy to uh discuss that with you. And final one here. I have a 401k at a previous employer. Can I do a Roth conversion without HR involved? I’m over 59 and a half. Uh I would say it depends. It depends on the uh plan administrator. So, a lot of times HR is not involved in these conversations. Sometimes they are. Uh it depends who your plan administrator are. I would call them and say, “Hey, I want to do the Roth conversion.” Uh, it’s a previous employer, so you are eligible to do our presentation today, the rollover. So, you can roll over into an IRA, have it invested, and you can do the conversion whenever you want to for whatever dollar amount you want to hopefully with the help of a adviser that walks you through the taxation implica implications of that. But that would put you in control of the Roth conversation without worrying about plan administrators, HR representatives, or anything like that. I think with that said, uh, just over an hour. I hate to do that, but we got all the questions answered. Shared some good information on rollover IAS all in the comfort of your home today. Any questions that I can answer, please feel free to reach out or respond back to the email that the credit union sends. If you did uh answer in the poll that we put out, we’ll reach out to you as well and try to set up a time to uh talk a little bit more and help you out. Appreciate everyone’s time today. Hope you have a great afternoon and hopefully we can talk soon. Take care everyone.